Thursday, October 15, 2020

Scrum Master Learning path_ Scrum Guide_Question and Answers_Collections

1. Dt: 10//2020 - Scrum Master Learning Path  - 01.30 Hours

2.  Dt: 10//2020 - Online test - Scrum Guide

i.   https://www.classmarker.com/online-test/results/ - 00.30 Hour

ii.  Scrum Guide.pdf  - 100% completed - 04.30 Hours

  iii. https://mlapshin.com/index.php/scrum-quizzes/

iv.  320 questions : $14 - https://www.volkerdon.com/courses/take/psm1/texts/5285480-what-is-scrum


3. Dt: 10/2020 - Online test

i.   Scrum Guide.pdf  - 100% completed - 04.30 Hours

ii.  https://www.classmarker.com/online-test/results/ - 50% Completed  - 00.30 Hour 

iii. https://mlapshin.com/index.php/scrum-quizzes/sm-learning-mode/ - 01.00 Hour 

iv.  320 questions : $14 - https://www.volkerdon.com/courses/take/psm1/texts/5285480-what-is-scrum

https://mlapshin.com/index.php/scrum-quizzes/

Target for 95%

https://www.volkerdon.com/courses/take/psm1/texts/5285480-what-is-scrum

Best of luck! and thanks to contributors :-)

The scrum team

-----------------------------


https://www.scrum.org/forum/scrum-forum/7198/passes-psm1-938-first-attempt-experience-share-tips


 Kuntesh Rathod

 04:19 pm June 18, 2016

First of all, I would like to thank everyone in the community by sharing their experiences which help others in exam preparation. Today I passed with 93.8% first attempt .


The exam is not that difficult however there were one liner questions and options given requires the understanding of what is being asked. I think you should target for 2-3 weeks maximum. Here I will agree with comments mentioned on this forum (https://www.scrum.org/Forums/aft/1892) about Scrum Master Role. So please understand well about SM Role. Even I scored 83.3% in Coaching & Facilitation.


The exam interface was quite slow, it used to take a lot of time between two questions. I used to finish open exams on scrum within 5-10 minutes (30 question or 15 questions). Even on http://mlapshin.com/index.php/psm-quiz/ I used to finish 80 question in 30-35 minutes. However, here it took me almost 45 minutes just because of the exam interface. So be prepared.


I had basic knowledge about scrum framework and even not sure which certification to go choose from CSM or PSM1. But after reading few blogs I choose PSM1. I started preparing for PSM1 certification before 12 days and wanted to give exam asap.


My tips:


1)

Read Scrum Guide few times. (5 times ideally or until you understand well enough)


2)

Watch videos on about scrum here http://www.scrumtrainingseries.com/. Gives you good understanding if you don't have much experience.


Start attending these tests only after your read above books couple of times at least.

3)

Attend open assessment on http://mlapshin.com/index.php/psm-quiz/ until you score between 95% - 100%. Really good questions and really good help because it is completely free. Many Thanks to Mikhail Lapshin.


4)

Attend PSM1, PSPO open assessment on http://scrum.org ( I went through PSD as well however I don't think it is necessary for PSM1 exam)


5)

Don't over do by reading more materials. It may confuse you.


I hope my experience above will help people who are planning to give the exam.


Best of Luck!



--------------

 ELLA WODZINSKA

 09:39 pm April 5, 2018

Just passed exam form the first attempt with similar score 92.5  total (83.3% in Coaching & Facilitation). I think this section is rather tricky because everyone is having problem with it.


I would agree that the interface is slow.


My 5 cents, during preparation I used https://www.volkerdon.com/, its 10$ for 1 month of practicing and mock exam.


Lots of questions from all the different sources were here in exam, like word-to-word questions... so to answer them was no-brainer, because you memorize everything during mock exams. But a few questions were rather challenging. Somehow I managed to nail most of them. I guess you just start thinking logically and apply common sense in such cases. I prepared lots of notes in advance, but oddly enough I didn't use them. Everything is my notes I remembered by heart, and for every "puzzling question" i could't find clear answer on the internet.


in this situation the best strategy to investigate your choices and look for the obvious "no way!" answers and exclude them. Then re-examine your choices.


I fount that you save a time if you practice a lot and know your answers immediately for the most questions.


Best of luck! and thanks to contributors :-)

--------------

Online Exam : Day1 : 

--------------------------

* Question 1 of 30

Who should know the most about the progress toward a business objective or a release, and be able to explain the alternatives most clearly?

(choose the best answer)

 A)The Project Manager

 B) The Scrum Master

 C) The Development Team

 Correct answer D) The Product Owner

Feedback

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the <Product Backlog>, which includes that the Product Backlog is 

visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next.

* Question 2 of 30

True or False: The purpose of a Sprint is to produce a done increment of working product.

Correct answer: A) True

Feedback

The heart of Scrum is a Sprint, a time-box of one month or less during which a "Done", usable, and potentially releasable product Increment is created.


* Question 3 of 30

What is the main reason for the Scrum Master to be at the Daily Scrum?

Correct answer: C)

A) To write down any changes to the Sprint Backlog, including adding new items, and tracking  progress on the burn-down.

B) To make sure every team member answers the three questions.


Correct answer C) He or she does not have to be there; he or she only has to ensure the Development Team has a Daily Scrum.


D)To gather status and progress information to report to management.


Feedback

The Scrum Master enforces the rule that only Development Team members participate in the Daily Scrum.



* Question3 of 30

Sprint Planning is time-boxed what is the max hours required?

Correct answer: C)


A) 4 hours.

B) Monthly.


Correct answer C) 8 hours for a monthly Sprint. For shorter Sprints it is usually shorter.


 D) Whenever it is done.

Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.



* Question 7 of 30

Upon what type of process control is Scrum based?

Correct answer: D)


 A) Hybrid

 B) Complex

 C) Defined

Correct answer D) Empirical


Feedback

Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions 

based on what is known.


* Question 8 of 30

The Product Backlog is ordered by:

Correct answer: D)


 A) Size, where small items are at the top and large items are at the bottom.

 B) Items are randomly arranged.

 C) Risk, where safer items are at the top, and riskier items are at the bottom.


Correct answerD) Whatever is deemed most appropriate by the Product Owner.


 E)Least valuable items at the top to most valuable at the bottom.

 

Feedback

The Product Owner decides what makes the most sense to optimize the value of the work being done by the Development Team.


* Question 9 of 30

The three pillars of empirical process control are:

 Correct answer: C)

 

 A)Planning, Inspection, Adaptation

 B) Respect For People, Kaizen, Eliminating Waste

 C) Inspection, Transparency, Adaptation

 D) Transparency, Eliminating Waste, Kaizen

 E) Planning, Demonstration, Retrospective


 Feedback

Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known.

Three pillars uphold every implementation of empirical process control: transparency, inspection, and adaptation. (T I A )


* Question 10 of 30

Which three behaviors demonstrate that a team is NOT self-organizing and are NOT following the Scrum Guide?

(choose the best three answers)

Correct answer: A) D) E)

 

Correct answerA) The Development Team invites external people to the Sprint Planning to ask them how to turn a Product Backlog item into an Increment via a complete and detailed Sprint Backlog.

 B) The Development Team has all the skills needed to create a releasable Increment.

 C) The Development Team creates their own sprint backlog, reflecting all work that is part of the definition of "Done".


Correct answerD) Stakeholders attend the Daily Scrum to check progress and work with the Scrum Master to optimize the functional scope for the Sprint.

Correct answerE) The Development Team members are working within the boundaries of their functional description and nicely handing off work from analyst to developer to tester to integration.

 

 F) Development Team members collaboratively selecting their own work during the Sprint.


 Feedback

The Daily Scrum is for the Development Team and attended by the Development Team.  It should not be used by external stakeholders to check progress.


During Sprint Planning the Scrum Team should be crafting the Sprint Goal based on the set of Product Backlog items selected for the sprint.  

The Development Team identifies the necessary work to meet the Sprint Goal.


Scrum Development Team members don’t have titles, and no sub-teams; such as, testing, architecture, or operations are recognized. 

Accountability belongs with the Development Team as a whole, regardless of whether team members have specialized skills.


* Question 11 of 30

Who is required to attend the Daily Scrum?


(choose the best answer)

Correct answer: E)

 

 A) The Development Team and Product Owner.

 B) The Scrum Master and Product Owner.

 C) The Development Team and Scrum Master.

 D)The Scrum team.

correct answer E) The Development Team.


Feedback

Only the people doing the work described on the Sprint Backlog need to <* inspect and adapt at the Daily Scrum>.

 If the Scrum Master or Product Owner is also on the Development Team, they will need to be at the Daily Scrum.

 Otherwise, the Scrum Master simply has to make sure the Development Team knows how to conduct a Daily Scrum and does so.


* Question 12 of 30

The Development Team should not be interrupted during the Sprint. The Sprint Goal should remain intact. These are conditions that 

foster creativity <படைப்பாற்றல் வளர்ப்பு>,  quality and productivity. 

(Which one the following answers is FALSE?)

Correct answer: D)


 A) As a decomposition of the selected Product Backlog Items, the Sprint Backlog changes and may grow as the work emerges.

 B) The Development Team may work with the Product Owner to remove or add work if it finds it has more or less capacity than it expected.

 C) The Product Owner can help clarify or optimize the Sprint when asked by the Development Team.

 Correct answerD) The Sprint Backlog is fully formulated in the Sprint Planning meeting and does not change during the Sprint.


 Feedback

The Sprint Backlog makes visible all of the work that the Development Team identifies as necessary to meet the Sprint Goal. The Development Team modifies 

the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint.


* Question 13 of 30

True or False: When multiple teams work together on the same product, each team should maintain a separate Product Backlog.

Correct answer: B)

 A) True

Correct answer B) False


Feedback

Products have one Product Backlog, regardless of how many teams are used. 

Any other setup makes it difficult for the Development Team to determine what it should work on.


* Question 14 of 30

The Development Team should have all the skills needed to:

Correct answer: C)

 A) Do all of the development work, except for specialized testing that requires additional tools and environments.

 B) Complete the project as estimated when the date and cost are committed to the Product Owner.


 Correct answerC) Turn the Product Backlog items it selects into an increment of potentially releasable product functionality.


Feedback

The Development Team consists of professionals who do the work of delivering a potentially releasable Increment of "Done" product 

at the end of each Sprint. Development Teams are cross-functional, with all of the skills as a team necessary to create a product Increment.


* Question 15 of 30

The maximum length of the Sprint Review (its time-box) is:

Correct answer: C)


 A) 1 day.

 B) 4 hours and longer as needed.


 Correct answerC) 4 hours for a monthly Sprint. For shorter Sprints it is usually shorter.

 D) As long as needed.

 E) 2 hours.


 Feedback

Sprint Review is a four-hour time-boxed meeting for one-month Sprints. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.


* Question 16 of 30

Who is on the Scrum Team?

Correct answer: A) B) C)

You chose: A)


Correct answer A) The Scrum Master

Correct answer B) The Product Owner

Correct answer C)The Development Team

 

 D)Project Manager

 E)None of the above


 Feedback

The Scrum Team consists of the 

<* Scrum Master (manages the process), 

<* the Product Owner (decides what to do) and 

<* the Development Team (does the work).


* Question 17 of 30

When is a Sprint over? <expires>

Correct answer: B)


 A) When the Product Owner says it is done.


 Correct answerB) When the time-box expires.

 

 C) When all the tasks are completed.

 D)When all Product Backlog items meet their definition of done.


 Feedback

The duration of a Sprint is fixed and cannot be shortened or lengthened.


* Question 18 of 30

When does the next Sprint begin?

Correct answer: B)


 A) Next Monday.


 Correct answerB) Immediately after the conclusion of the previous Sprint.

 C)Immediately following the next Sprint Planning.

 D) When the Product Owner is ready.


 Feedback

A new Sprint starts immediately after the conclusion of the previous Sprint.


* Question 19 of 30

The CEO asks the Development Team to add a "very important" item to a Sprint that is in progress. 

What should the Development Team do?

Correct answer: A)


Correct answer A)Inform the Product Owner so he/she can work with the CEO.

  B) Add the item to the current Sprint without any adjustments.

  C) Add the item to the next Sprint.

  D) Add the item to the current Sprint and drop an item of equal size.


Feedback

The items selected for a Sprint have been selected as most valuable with the Product Owner. The items serve the Sprint's goal. 

No changes should be made that endanger <ஆபத்துக்குள்ளாக்கு>the Sprint Goal. 

No one external to the Scrum Team can force changes on 

the Development Team (Sprint Backlog) and 

the Product Owner (Product Backlog).


* Question 20 of 30

Which of the following services are appropriate for a Scrum Master in regard to the Daily Scrum?

Correct answer: D)


 A) All answers apply.

 B) Facilitate in a way that ensures each team member has a chance to speak.

 C) Lead the discussions of the Development Team.

 

 Correct answer D) Teach the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15 minute time-box.

 

 E) Ensure that all 3 questions have been answered.


 Feedback

The Scrum Master ensures that the Development Team has the meeting, 

but the Development Team is responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum. 

The Scrum Master teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box. 

The Scrum Master enforces the rule that only Development Team members participate in the Daily Scrum.


* Question 21 of 30

The time-box for a Daily Scrum is?

Correct answer: A)

 

 Correct answerA) 15 minutes.

 B)15 minutes for a 4 week sprint. For shorter Sprints it is usually shorter.

 C) 4 hours.

 D) Two minutes per person.

 E) The same time of day every day.


 Feedback

The length of a daily Scrum is time-boxed at 15 minutes, it does not change with the length of a Sprint.


* Question 22 of 30

An organization has decided to adopt Scrum, but management wants to change the terminology to fit with terminology already used. 

What will likely happen if this is done?

Correct answer: D)


 A) Without a new vocabulary as a reminder of the change, very little change may actually happen.

 B) The organization may not understand what has changed with Scrum and the benefits of Scrum may be lost.

 C) Management may feel less anxious.


 Correct answer D) All of the above.


* Question 23 of 30

Which of the below are roles on a Scrum Team?


(choose the best three answers)

Correct answer: B) D) E)


 A) Customers

 

Correct answerB) Development Team


 C) Users


Correct answerD)Scrum Master

Correct answerE)Product Owner


Feedback

The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner, the Development Team, and a Scrum Master. <PO, DT, SM>



* Question 24 of 30

When does a Development Team member become the sole owner of a Sprint Backlog item?

Correct answer: A)


Correct answerA) Never. All Sprint Backlog Items are "owned" by the entire Development Team, even though each one may be 

implemented by an individual development team member.


 B) At the Sprint planning meeting.

 C) Whenever a team member can accommodate more work.

 D) During the Daily Scrum.


 Feedback

Sprint Backlog and all of its items are collectively owned by the Development Team. 

No individual team member can claim ownership over an item as this would block communication and collaboration.


* Question 25 of 30

Who creates the definition of "Done"?

Correct answer: D)

 A) The Scrum Master as he/she is responsible for the Development Team's productivity

 B) The Scrum Team, in a collaborative effort where the result is the common denominator of all members' definitions

 C) The Product Owner as he/she is responsible for the product's success

 

Correct answerD) The development organization (or Development Team if none is available from the development organization)


Feedback

If the definition of "done" is part of the 

conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, 

all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. The Development Team of the Scrum Team can complement it with elements specific for the product or context.


If "done" for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, 

the Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of "done" appropriate for the product.


* Question 26 of 30

True or False:  The Scrum Team should choose 

at least one high priority process improvement, 

identified during the Sprint Retrospective, and place it in the Product Backlog.

Correct answer: B)


A) True

Correct answer B)False


Feedback

False, to ensure continuous improvement, the Sprint Backlog rather than the Product Backlog includes 

at least one high priority process improvement identified in the previous Sprint Retrospective meeting.


 * Question 27 of 30

Which statement best describes Scrum?

Correct answer: C)


 A) A cookbook that defines best practices for software development.

 B) A defined and predictive process that conforms to the principles of Scientific Management.

 

 Correct answerC)  A framework within which complex products in complex environments are developed.


 D) A complete methodology that defines how to develop software.


 Feedback

Scrum is not a process or a technique for building products; rather, it is a framework within which you can employ various processes and techniques.


* Question 28 of 30

What is the recommended size for a Development Team (within the Scrum Team)?

Correct answer: C)

  

 A) Minimal 7

 B) 9

 

Correct answerC) 3 to 9

 

 D) 7 plus or minus 2


 Feedback

Optimal Development Team size is small enough to remain nimble <வேகமான> and large enough to complete significant work. Fewer than three Development Team members 

decreases interaction and results in smaller productivity gains. More than nine members simply requires too much coordination.


* Question 29 of 30

Which two things does the Development Team do during the first Sprint?

Correct answer: B) C)


A)Develop a plan for the rest of the release.


Correct answer B) Deliver an increment of potentially releasable software.

Correct answer C) Develop and deliver at least one piece of functionality.


D) Create the complete Product Backlog to be developed in subsequent Sprints.

E) Determine the complete architecture and infrastructure for the product.


Feedback

The heart of Scrum is a Sprint, a time-box of one month or less during which a "Done", useable, 

and potentially releasable product Increment is created.  This applies to every Sprint.


* Question 30 of 30

True or False: Scrum does not have a role called "project manager."

Correct answer: A)


Correct answer A) True

 B) False


 Feedback

A Scrum Team has a Scrum Master, 

a Product Owner and 

a Development Team. As a whole they have all controls needed.


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 

Mikhail Lapshin

SCRUM QUIZZES


Please, do not post questions with answer options. I got several complaints about copyright violations. Just ask the question in your own words.

1. Essential features of a Scrum Team

Q: It is regarding the question on psm-quiz on your site.

What are the two essential features a Scrum Team should possess?

It should choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team

It should have all competencies needed to accomplish the work without depending on others not part of the team

It should use tools, processes and techniques approved by the Organization

It should be flexible enough to complete all the work planned for the Sprint even if some team members are on vacation

Though the explanation mentions 1 &2 as the answer for this but shouldn’t option 3 also be the answer for this question. Development team should be using tools, process and techniques approved by organization and if there is any hindrance the scrum master should notice this as impediment and talk to respective stakeholders?


Mikhail: For me #3 looks like a contradiction to #1. As long as the team creates increments according to the DoD, it can use any techniques, tools, etc.


2. Architecture type questions

Q: I noticed that the official Scaled Scrum open exam contains a few architecture type questions. There does not seem to be any reference material around this subject area and just wondered if you could point out some good learning material?

Mikhail: I think, Scaled Scrum does not prescribe any particular architecture. It only says the dependencies between teams should be minimized and we should inspect and adapt frequently. So, it is an ongoing process. Evaluating the current architecture and suggesting ways to improve it is a part of every Sprint.


As I remember, the open Scaled Scrum quiz contains only the following topics:


Q: A system is decomposed into elements like workflows, features, capabilities, etc. How it affects Scrum Teams on a scaled project?

A: It will be reflected in the implementation.


Q: Two ways how Dev Teams can ensure a good application architecture?

* Architecture is an ongoing discussion

* The DT should have a set of architecture principles and follow them


Q: How to start a big complex project?

A: Form 1-2 teams of best developers for implementing the core, add more teams later.


You see, there are no any specific architectural questions. So, nothing to read about this. 🙂

However, the exam contains references to SOA (service-oriented architecture). It is worth to get a high level view of SOA, or at least read its definition. For example at Wikipedia: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Service-oriented_architecture


3. Opportunities to inspect and adapt

Q: Your quiz contains a question that asks to check all the opportunities to inspect and adapt from a list. There is “Sprint” option. Why it is considered as incorrect?

Mikhail: The idea is simple. Sprint is a special event that is nothing more than a time-box for other events. The Scrum Guide explains it in this way: “Other than the Sprint itself, which is a container for all other events, each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something.”


4. Who creates DoD?

Q: Your quiz has the following question: Who is responsible for creation of the Definition of “Done”? The expected answer is the Development Team. However, some Scrum materials declare that the Scrum Team creates DoD. What is the correct answer?

Mikhail: The Scrum Guide says: “The Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “done” appropriate for the product.” So, the correct answer is the Development Team.

From my point of view, DT owns DoD on behalf of the whole Scrum Team. So, it is possible to say “Scrum Team creates DoD”, however “Development Team creates DoD” is more precise.


5. Stakeholders and PB transparency

Q: During sprint review stakeholders notice that the product development progress is not very clearly visible and lacked transparency. Moreover, they are not able to understand the next steps. Who is responsible for this?

Mikhail: The Product Owner is responsible for this.


In the Scrum Guide you can find that the PO is responsible for:

* Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next;


At the Sprint Review:

* The PO explains what Product Backlog items have been “Done” and what has not been “Done”;

* The entire group collaborates on what to do next, so that the Sprint Review provides valuable input to subsequent Sprint Planning;


The Product Owner is the Lead Facilitator of Key Stakeholder Involvement. The PO is responsible for identifying the key stakeholders for the product and involving them as necessary throughout the development effort.


6. UI markup to better understand a Product feature?

Q: Scrum Team decides they need to create one more artifact UI markup to better understand the product feature, can they proceed or not since Scrum Teams should capture product features/needs only in Product Backlog?

Mikhail: Of course, the team can proceed. Right, PB is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product. If the Scrum Team does not understand what should be done next, it means the PB needs to be refined. The Product Owner should put his product vision as backlog items, maybe with help of the Development Team.

A product backlog item should contain everything necessary to be understood by any member of the Scrum Team. So, if a new UI markup needs to be developed, it should be a part (task) of some item (story) in the PB. When the markup is ready, it should be attached to the item.

So, the answer is not a simple “yes/no”. I would carefully look at the wording of the suggested answers to be maximally close to the point I described above.


7. Stakeholders at PBL refinement sessions?

Q: Can the PO invite stakeholders to PBL refinement sessions?

Mikhail: I would say the PO should not usually do this. The PO must be the arbiter of product value and how it is represented to the team. Frequently key stakeholders do not know exactly what they want and how it can be achieved. This is a job for the PO to understand their needs, decide how they can be fulfilled with the maximum value.

Probably, in rare cases a key stakeholder can be invited as a domain expert to a product refinement session. However, the PO should have the final word.


8. Does PB contain only functional requirements?

Q: Does the Product Backlog contain only functional requirements for the Product?

Mikhail: No. The Scrum Glossary gives the following definition for Product Backlog: “It is an ordered list of the work to be done in order to create, maintain and sustain a product.” So, Scrum is not specific about exactly what a Product Backlog Item is or how it should be expressed. It is just “work to be done”.

The Scrum Guide gives a bit more details about a PBI: it should have the attributes of a description, order, estimate, and value. However, it does not change the “work to be done” definition much. For example, a Product Backlog can contain knowledge acquisition tasks, prototyping, technical chores etc.

However, there is one important moment: a Product Backlog should contain items that the Product Owner cares about, in the sense that they add clear business value and can be ordered by him or her. If there are some “Developer Stories”, i.e. removing technical debt, they can be introduced by the Development Team into their own Sprint Backlog, if they think such stories are necessary in order to help mitigate a technical risk.


9. Should the PO approve the DoD?

Q: Should the PO approve the DoD?

Mikhail: The following points should be taken into the account:

1. The Development Team is responsible for the Definition of Done.

2. There is no direct requirement in the Scrum Guide for a formal approval of the DoD by the PO.

3. The PO as a member of the Scrum Team participates in the Sprint Retrospective where the DoD is revised and adapted.


‘No’ answer is more comfortable for the question. However, the PO can affect the DoD at the Sprint Retrospective by making suggestions for the Dev Team how to improve it. Also the PO can bring some non-functional requirements for the product and the Dev Team usually applies them via DoD. See 11. How to address non-functional requirements? and 46. Non-functional requirements, PO and DoD


10. Can the SM create a PBI?

Q: Who can create a Product Backlog item? Can the Scrum Master do it?

Mikhail: The Scrum guide says:

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog… The Product Owner may do the above work, or have the Development Team do it. However, the Product Owner remains accountable.


Creation of a PBI relates to PB management. So, certainly the PO is responsible for this. However, he can delegate this work to the Development Team.

If the Scrum Master combines his role with the Developer role (the most common situation), he is a part of the Development Team and can create PBIs when it is agreed with the PO. Otherwise, I think, he should not do it.


In my quizzes I have a similar question: who can change the PB? The answer is “The PO and the DT with permission of the PO.”


11. How to address non-functional requirements?

Q: How to address non-functional requirements such as security, performance?

Mikhail: Non-functional requirements describe qualities of the system being developed. E.g. the system should be secure, extensible and have acceptable performance. 

The only way to meet such requirements is to have them as a part of the DoD and check every Increment against these criteria.

From my side I would mention that if some non-functional requirements relate only to a part of the Product (i.e. to some feature),

most likely the requirements should be processed as a sub-task within this feature instead of the DoD.


12. How does DoD help in Sprint Planning?

Q: How does DoD guide the DT in knowing how many PBL items it can select during Sprint planning?

Mikhail: The DoD helps to reveal the work necessary to complete a PB item. So, it helps to estimate how much time it will take. With better estimations the Development Team can better plan which items can be completed in the upcoming Sprint.


13. When the Sprint length is determined?

Q: When the Sprint length is determined and who decides on it?

Mikhail: The whole Scrum Team should come to a solution about the first Sprint length before starting it. The length of the following Sprints can be changed (adapted).

There is no a formal event for this purpose. The Scrum Guide limits only the maximum length by one month. However, the following points can be taken into account:


The pace at which the PO wants to have increments (new features implemented), demonstrate them to the Key Stakeholders and get feedback.

Experience of the SM. What was the optimal length for teams doing a similar work.

Experience of the DT. Too long Sprints make planning difficult. Too short Sprints do not allow to implement bigger features in one chunk, but give faster feedback.

From my experience, the optimal Spring length is 2 weeks.


14. What is enough to start a first Sprint?

Q: What is enough to start a first Sprint?

Mikhail: A first Sprint requires no more than a Product Owner, a team, and enough ideas to potentially complete a full Sprint.


15. Concerns about progress and budget

Q: A Project Manager working with your Scrum Team has raised concerns about progress and money spent. What are the two best responses?

Mikhail: First of all, there is no Project Manager role in Scrum. So, the manager from the question is an external person for the team.


My best options are below:

a. Invite the manager to the next Sprint Review. There the manager will see what was completed in the Sprint, what is the feedback from the Key Stakeholders, what are the priorities for the next Sprint, get some review of the timeline and budget.

b. In agile practices the duty of all participants is to be transparent. Those who need information are responsible for getting it. They have a duty to ensure that the information they act on is obtained in a timely fashion and with minimal filtering.

So, the manager can investigate the artifacts of the Scrum Team: the Product Backlog, the Sprint Backlog, the Increment. The team is responsible for sharing these artifacts and any information radiators that can help to make the artifacts more transparent (e.g. burn down charts, story boards, etc.)


One more point is that proper use of Scrum makes sure that the most valuable features are implemented first and the proof of success lies in ongoing delivery and not in reporting.


Update: I got the suggested options for the question:

1) Scrum doesn’t have PMs

2) Share the PB and forecast for the sprint

3) Share the current roadblocks

4) Share the last stakeholder report by PO


I see the options fit well with my answer:


1) Scrum doesn’t have PMs

* Correct

2) Share the PB and forecast for the sprint

* Correct. Scrum Team artifacts should be transparent.

3) Share the current roadblocks

* Wrong. Sharing artifacts is much better.

4) Share the last stakeholder report by PO

* Wrong. The PO does not have duty to prepare a special report for the Key Stakeholders.


16. Individuals to consult with for PO to maximize value

Q: Who are the individuals the PO should consult with when considering the value of a Product?

Mikhail: The most important individuals for maximizing value for the Product are the Key Stakeholders. The PO should identify and involve them as necessary throughout the development effort. The Key Stakeholders are typically customers, purchasers, users, and the people that fund the product’s development. These people may be internal or external to the Organization.


17. Which work can PO delegate?

Q: What is Product Owner work that a Product Owner might delegate? Choose one from (a. Facilitating Stakeholder Involvement, b. Writing Product Backlog Items, c. Facilitating meetings).

Mikhail: The PO can delegate writing Product Backlog Items.


The Scrum Guide contains:


The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog. Product Backlog management includes:

* Clearly expressing Product Backlog items;

The Product Owner may do the above work, or have the Development Team do it.


The PO is responsible for identifying the Key Stakeholders and involving them as necessary.


The Scrum Master is responsible for facilitating the Scrum events.


18. Three things to focus on for the PO?

Q: What three things might a Scrum Product Owner focus on to ensure his product delivers value?

Mikhail: There are several possible good answers. I would suggest the PO should focus on:

* Key Stakeholder Involvement

In order to maximize value, the PO should identify the key stakeholders for the product, and involve them as necessary throughout the development effort.

* Product Marketplace

The Product Owner should be expertly aware of the marketplace for the product. They should constantly be gathering and re-gathering information and data regarding the marketplace, so that the product value is maximized.

* Product Release Decisions

The PO is the one and only person who can decide whether to release the latest increment of the Product. In order for value to actually be captured, a release of the product must occur.


19. Must the PO write all PBIs?

Q: Must the Product Owner write all of the Product Backlog items (e.g. user stories, non-functional requirements, etc.) on the Product Backlog before handing them over to the Development Team?

Mikhail: Of course not. This question is very similar to the question #17 above.

Who does the work of updating and managing the Product Backlog is a collaboration between the Product Owner and the Development Team. However, the Product Owner is solely responsible and accountable for the decisions in the Product Backlog.

For example, the PO can write nothing, but explain everything in detail to the Development Team. Then the team will create the required PB items and write down all the details.


20. PO responsibilities

Q: My job as a Product Owner focuses on the following (Choose 2 answers):

A. Writing clear, transparent User Stories

B. Working with customers and stakeholders to identify the most important product requirements

C. Being with the Scrum team all the time, just in case they need me to clarify a requirement

D. Clearly communicating project or release status and strategies to customers and stakeholders

Mikhail:


C is wrong because the PO does not have to spend all the time with the DT. The PO has other things to do. For example, communicating with Key Stakeholders. The main PO commitment is product value delivery. So, he or she should spend enough time (but not all the time) with the DT to meet that commitment.

A is just partially right. Writing clear user stories is important, but the Product Backlog also contains many other things like features, functions, requirements, enhancements, etc. The PO is responsible for the whole management of the Product Backlog. Also the PO can ask the DT to write the stories.

D is partially correct because the PO should communicate his product vision not only to the Key Stakeholders, but also to the Scrum Team.

B is correct. Identifying the most valuable Product features one of the most important PO responsibilities.

So, I would answer B and D.

21. All DT work originates from PB

Q: All work to be done by the Development Team must ultimately originate from the Product Backlog?

Mikhail:

I think, in the broad sense the answer is “yes”. The PB is the source for the Sprint Backlog. The Sprint Backlog is the source of the Dev Team work. However, only the Dev Team knows how to implement Sprint Backlog Items. It can involve technical tasks, for example, removing some technical debt or even installing a development environment for a new developer.


22. How does SM help DT and PO in communication?

Q: Which technique is the best way the Scrum Master can ensure that the Development Team communicates effectively with the product owner?

Mikhail:

The Scrum Guide says: the SM helps the PO to understand and practice agility. Agility means using the most effective ways to collaborate. Direct collaboration between the PO and the DT is the most effective one. So, the best technique for SM is to monitor communications between the DT and the PO and facilitate direct collaboration.


23. Can the PO measure success by team velocity?

Q: A Product Owner can measure success by an increase in the team’s velocity?

Mikhail:

No. It is just one of the first steps to success. Success in Scrum is getting maximum value with the existing resources. Value, as defined in a Scrum context, is the financial (or social) benefit an organization receives or might receive by creating and releasing the product under development. In order for value to actually be captured, a release of the product must occur. The sooner you release, the sooner you can start capturing the value created by the product.

Increase in team’s velocity shows that the Dev Team became more mature and can do more in the same time frame.


24. Who are the participants of Sprint Review?

Q: The Sprint Review is mainly an inspect and adapt opportunity for which group?

Mikhail:

The Scrum Guide says: During the Sprint Review, the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate about what was done in the Sprint.

So, the answer is “the Scrum Team and stakeholders”.


25. New DTs and productivity

Q: If two Scrum Teams are added to the development of a product that previously only had one Scrum Team, what will be the immediate impact on productivity of the original Scrum Team?

A) Its productivity is likely to stay the same

B) Its productivity is likely to increase

C) Its productivity is likely to decrease

Mikhail: C.

In a short term the productivity will decrease because the new teams will spend time to get up to speed with the Product. The old team will spend a lot of time for communications with the new teams.


26. Factors affecting the Sprint length

Q: What three factors are best considered when establishing the sprint length? Choose 3 answers.

A) The frequency at which team formation can be changed

B) The organization has mandated similar length sprints

C) The risk of being disconnected from the stakeholders

D) The level of uncertainty over the technology to be used

E) The ability to go to market with a product release.

Mikhail: C, D, E.

A. is wrong because Development Teams in Scrum are self-organizing and can decide to change at any time.

B. is bad because Organization is not responsible for the Sprint length. It is determined by the Scrum Team. The PO and the Dev Team should agree on this. The SM may have some coaching duties to perform in that regard.

C. is good because the bigger part of interaction with the Key Stakeholders happens at the Sprint Review meeting. If the Sprint length is bigger, this feedback loop becomes longer.

D. Shorter Sprints is an effective way to hone in on the requirements or try out the technology before committing to a solution.

E. Shorter Sprints suppose that the Dev Team produces “done” increments more frequently. It allows the PO to release the increments more frequently too.


27. How to divide 100 developers?

Q: How would an organization with 100 developers divide into teams?

A) Manger would divide them depending on location, bonding between members and xyz…

B) Developers will form teams themselves.

C) Scrum master will assign them according to budget.

D) Understanding scrum encourage self organization, developers will organize themselves into teams based on skills.

E) Product owner brings all developer working on same product together for planning and depending on functionalities , developer with self organize themselves into teams.

Mikhail: All the options related to self-organization are correct: B, D and E.


28. When the Sprint Goal is crafted?

Q:The Sprint Goal is the result of the Sprint Planning, 

just as the Sprint backlog. True or False?

Mikhail: Of course the answer is “True”. The PO comes to the Sprint Planning with an idea for the Sprint Goal and then all the Scrum Team crafts the final version of the Goal.


29. Sprint Review topics?

Q: Which topics should be discussed in the Sprint Review?

A) The scrum process and how it was used during the Sprint

B) Coding and Engineering practices

C) Sprint Results

D) All of the above

Mikhail: The Scrum Guide says “A Sprint Review is held at the end of the Sprint to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog if needed.”

So, D. option would be great for the Sprint Retrospective meeting, but it is wrong for this question. All the topics related to the development process are discussed at the Sprint Retrospective.

So, the correct answer for this question is C. Sprint Results.


30. Participate vs Attend

Q: I noticed an error in your questions. It looks like there are two similar questions with different answers:

In which meetings the Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate? The correct answer is “The Sprint Review”. The Sprint Planning was evaluated as wrong in this question.

Select the two meetings in which people outside the Scrum Team are allowed to participate. The correct answers are “The Sprint Planning” and “The Sprint Review.”

The Key Stakeholders are people outside of the Scrum Team, so in the second question they are allowed to participate in the Sprint Planning, in the question #1 they are not. Is there an error in one of the questions?


Mikhail: The difference between “participate” (come to the meeting and speak) and “attend” (come to the meeting, but not speak) is a bit difficult. However, the real exam uses it for sure.


The question #1 is correct. The Sprint Review is the only formal Scrum event where the Key Stakeholders are allowed to take part in. They are invited by the Product Owner and actively give their feedback on the Product.


The question #2 is also correct. It looks like your confusion comes from mixing together concepts of “Key Stakeholders” and “technical experts”. The Key Stakeholders are typically customers, purchasers, users, and the people that fund the product’s development.


In “Sprint Planning” chapter the Scrum Guide says: “The Development Team may also invite other people to attend to provide technical or domain advice.” So, these people are not the Key Stakeholders. They are technical and domain experts. And these people give technical advice. It obviously means they can speak at the meeting. Using the word “attend” here looks like a little inconsistency between the Scrum Guide and the questions.


I hope, now you see the Key Stakeholders go to the Sprint Review and technical domain experts could go to the Sprint Planning. So, there are two meetings when people outside of the Scrum Team can come and speak.


31. Characteristics of a valuable Increment?

Q: In which cases an Increment is valuable? (choose 2 answers)

A) It reduces long-term operational costs

B) It increases customer satisfaction

C) It is delivered on time

D) It has all the features that the Product Owner expected

Mikhail: The answers are A and B.

If you take a look at the Evidence Management Guide, you will find A and B among the Key Value Measures in Current Value section. C and D are absent in this list.


32. Product Backlog is...

Q: A Product Backlog is (choose 3):

A) Managed by the Product Owner.

B) Ordered based on priority, value, dependencies, and risk.

C) An inventory of things to be done for the Product.

D) An exhaustive list of upfront approved requirements to be implemented for the system.

E) Only visible to the Product Owner and stakeholders.

Mikhail: I would choose A, B and C.

E is wrong because all the Scrum Team members can see the Product Backlog.

C and D answers are similar. I like C better because a Product Backlog is never complete, so it cannot be exhaustive. From the other side, if a requirement is in the Product Backlog, it is approved by the PO. So, “an exhaustive list of upfront approved requirements” could be also valid. I do not like this question much because of the ambiguous wording.


33. Metrics for value delivery?

Q: Which two (2) metrics will help a Product Owner establish that value is being delivered?

A) Customer satisfaction

B) Velocity

C) Time to market

D) Budget spent

E) Productivity

Mikhail: A and C are correct. If you take a look inside the EBM guide, you will find “Customer Satisfaction” KVM and “Time to Market” KVA. Budget, velocity and productivity do not contribute directly to capturing Product value.


34. What is Sprint Backlog?

Q: Which statement best describes the Sprint Backlog as outcome of the Sprint Planning?

A) Each task is estimated in hours.

B) It is a complete list of all work to be done in a Sprint.

C) Every item has a designated owner.

D) It is the Development Team’s plan for the Sprint.

E) It is ordered by the Product Owner.

Mikhail: The Scrum Guide contains

“The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal.”

“The Development Team modifies the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Development Team works through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal.”


A) Wrong because there is no requirement to have estimation in hours

B) Wrong because the team cannot foresee all the work in the beginning of a Sprint

C) Scrum does not require a designated owner for items

D) The best option here

E) Wrong because the Dev Team owns the Sprint Backlog


35. Cross-functional team?

Q: What does it mean for a Development Team to be cross-functional?

A) Developers on the Development Team work closely with business analysts, architects, developers and testers who are not on the team.

B) The Development Team is a virtual team drawing from separate team of business analysts, architects, developers and testers.

C) The Development Team includes not only developers but also business analysts, architects,developers and testers.

D) The Development Team includes cross-skilled individuals who are able to contribute to do what is necessary to deliver an increment of software.

Mikhail: The best option is D. Scrum recognizes just one role “Developer” within the Development Team. The Scrum Guide tells:

– Development Teams are cross-functional, with all the skills as a team necessary to create a product Increment;

– Scrum recognizes no titles for Development Team members, regardless of the work being performed by the person;

– Individual Development Team members may have specialized skills and areas of focus, but accountability belongs to the Development Team as a whole.


36. Scrum value affected by lack of trust

Q: Which Scrum value is affected by lack of trust in the Scrum team?

Mikhail: The Scrum Guide says: “When the values of commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect are embodied and lived by the Scrum Team, the Scrum pillars of transparency, inspection, and adaptation come to life and build trust for everyone.”

So, the answer will be: commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect.


37. Which Scrum values are exhibited?

Q: Which Scrum values are exhibited by not building product backlog items that have low business value?

Mikhail: The same as in question #36, the answer will include some of these: commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect. For me the most suitable answer looks like focus (focusing on the most important things) and openness (the PB items and their values are transparent to everyone).


38. The same Sprint length for all teams

Q: There is the following question in your quiz: All the Scrum Teams working on the same Product should have the same Sprint length and the expected answer is “False”.

I would disagree because the Teams must do integrated increment in the end of the Sprint. It means Sprint length of all the Teams must be the same.

Mikhail: The Scrum framework does not require the same Sprint length or aligned Sprints for all teams. The Nexus framework is built on top of the Scrum and also has no requirements regarding this.


However, if several teams work together using the Nexus Framework, they work in the same Nexus Sprint, have common Nexus Sprint Planning and other events. You are right, the teams should use (but do not have to) the same Sprint length and all Sprints should start and finish together to avoid inefficiency.


Usually the emphasis is placed on having a shared Definition of Done. Another option could be when one team has 2 week sprint length, whereas another teams use 4 weeks.


One of the best things about Nexus – it is less prescriptive when compared to SAFe & LeSS. Usually there are many ways to solve the inefficiencies. But definitely not by making something prescriptive.


39. Communications between the DT and Stakeholders

Q: In my opinion the stakeholders should never initiate communications during the sprint however I do think under the proper conditions that the development team should have access to the stakeholders for clarifications during the sprint. Is this an anti scrum pattern? I am not a big fan of gong up and down ladders for communications such has the product owner having to be an tweener.

Mikhail: The PO is the lead facilitator of Key Stakeholder involvement. The PO should involve them as necessary throughout the development effort. The PO is responsible for making sure that the Key Stakeholders attend and interact in the Sprint Reviews, but really the Stakeholders can be involved with the Scrum Team any time where it’s valuable to have the stakeholder input.

Product ownership is not a committee. The PO is responsible for the product value and how it is represented to the team. So, in the case of any contradiction, the issue must be explained to the PO as soon as possible. Then the PO will communicate with the Stakeholders, resolve it and communicate solution back to the team.

It is an anti-pattern if someone does the PO work for the Dev Team.


40. Product Backlog size

Q: I have seen articles stating the backlog should not grow excessively large. Never above a hundred or so items. Here I do not agree. I believe once a piece of information that has value is identified that it should be added to the backlog even if the item will not be worked on in the near future. I do agree that you would never have many items in the backlog that are groomed to the level to being sprint ready. What is the consensus of backlog size in Scrum.

Mikhail: I completely agree that any valuable idea how to make the product better should be added to the backlog. However, only the top items for one or two next Sprints should be refined enough (be in “ready” state).

With bigger backlogs it becomes harder to order the items and find dependencies. However, there are helping techniques. For example, the stories could be grouped into epics.


41. Why is the Increment the sum of all previous Increments?

Q: I am a bit confused by this definition: “The Increment is the sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during the Sprint and the value of the increments of all previous Sprints.” Can you elaborate?

Mikhail: It is because of two reasons:

1. All the previous work is required for the Increment done in this Sprint to have value and to be potentially releasable

2. An Increment must be tested adequately. This includes regression testing.


42. What is the result of the Sprint Review?

Q: Why the answer to “What is the result of the Sprint Review?” is ” A revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint” and not “Common understanding of progress toward the Sprint Goal and how progress is trending toward completing the work in the Sprint Backlog”?

Mikhail: First of all, the Scrum Guide tells: “The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted overall to meet new opportunities.”


The second option relates to the Daily Scrum: “The Development Team uses the Daily Scrum to inspect progress toward the Sprint Goal and to inspect how progress is trending toward completing the work in the Sprint Backlog.”


I agree, at the Sprint Review the PO explains what Product Backlog items have been “Done” and what has not been “Done”. However, what is more important, the whole group collaborates on what to do next, so that the Sprint Review provides valuable input to subsequent Sprint Planning.


43. What belongs solely to the DT?

Q: I have a question regarding two questions in the PSM I quiz at your website:

1. Who is responsible for creation of ‘Definition of Done’?

– Answer is mentioned as ‘Development Team’

2. What belongs solely to the Development Team?

– Answer is only “The Sprint Backlog” and it didn’t include ‘Definition of Done’

If the answer for #1 is Development Team, the answer for #2 should also include “Definition of Done” as per my understanding. Can you please throw some light on the answers to these questions?


Mikhail: The Scrum Guide contains: “Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.”

and

“the Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “Done” appropriate for the product.”, “This is the definition of “Done” for the Scrum Team and is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment.”

So, the DoD is for the whole Scrum Team. However, the DT is responsible for it (on behalf of the Scrum Team).

There is no any contradiction.


44. Does PO change Sprint Backlog?

Q: The Product Owner has the authority to replace an item in the Sprint Backlog. True or false?

Mikhail: The Scrum Guide contains: “Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. “

So, the answer is “False”.


45. Is Sprint Backlog frozen after Sprint Planning?

Q: Is the Sprint Backlog frozen after the Sprint Planning?

Mikhail: The Scrum Guide clarifies it: “The Development Team modifies the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Development Team works through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal.

As new work is required, the Development Team adds it to the Sprint Backlog. As work is performed or completed, the estimated remaining work is updated. When elements of the plan are deemed unnecessary, they are removed.“

So, the answer is “No”, not frozen.


46. Non-functional requirements, PO and DoD

Q: It looks like two of your questions have a contradiction in the answers:

Q1: The Product Owner wants to apply some non-functional requirements to the Product. What is the best way to proceed?

A1: Add the non-functional requirements to the DoD and check every Increment against these criteria

Q2: Who is responsible for creation of the Definition of “Done”?

A2: The Development Team

Mikhail: It looks like your confusion is like this:

The Product Owner wants to apply some non-functional requirements… The best way is to add the non-functional requirements to the DoD… The Dev Team is responsible for the DoD. How the PO can add the requirements into the DoD?


Well, there is no any contradiction.

Non-functional requirements describe qualities of the system being developed. E.g. the system should be secure, extensible and have acceptable performance.

The PO explains the requirements to the Dev Team. The team has two options how to handle these requirements:

1. Add a new sub-task for every Product Backlog Item to make sure the non-functional requirements are met for this particular item (feature)

2. Add the non-functional requirements to the DoD. So, every Increment will be validated against these requirements.


The second way looks more robust because having the requirements as part of the DoD won’t allow the team to forget about them when working on new items. It also will increase transparency.


So, the PO does not change the DoD. He asks the Dev Team to produce Increments that meet the non-functional requirements. The Dev Team adds the new requirements to the DoD because it is more robust way of doing the work.


You can also check my answer for 9. Should the PO approve the DoD?


47. Angry stakeholders. What led to this?

Q: At the fifth Sprint Review, the stakeholders seem disappointed and angry. When asked about it, they say the product or system as being built will not meet their needs and will cost more than they anticipated spending, What led to this?

A) The stakeholders haven’t been using the Sprint Reviews to actively engage , and inspect and evaluate progress

B) Changes to the project plan were not adequately documented and shared. The change request procedure was not diligently followed

C) The PMO and its project managers have not been engaged adequately causing the project plan to become inaccurate

D) The Product Owner has not been interacting frequently with stakeholders keeping them aware of the progress.

E) The stakeholders were not allowed to attend daily scrum

F) The scrum master has not ensured transparency

Mikhail: Let’s go through all the options:

A) Looks good except that the PO is responsible for Key Stakeholder engagement. Probably there are better answers.

B) Wrong because Scrum does not have a “change request procedure”.

C) Wrong. Scrum does not have a Project Manager role.

D) The best option.

E) Wrong. Stakeholders have nothing to do at Daily Scrums.

F) Good enough. The whole team is responsible for transparency, however the SM should notice if there is a lack of transparency and help the team to address it.


48. How to do a perfect Sprint Planning?

Q: Creating a forecast for a sprint tends to run smoothly when the Product Backlog items that are discussed are well understood and actionable. Which approach would you recommend to ensure this state of Product Backlog at Sprint Planning?

A) The Development Team uses some time in each Sprint to analyse, estimate and design high ordered Product Backlog items.

B) A separate Scrum Team of business analysts and functional testers analyse high-ordered requirements one sprint ahead of development.

C) The Product Owner works with the stakeholders to prepare Product Backlog items outside of the sprint so the development team will not be disrupted.

D) The analysts on the Development Team document high ordered Product Backlog items during a Sprint when they are not busy working on the forecast.

Mikhail: A) Correct. The name of this activity is Product Backlog Refinement. However, why the PO is not mentioned here? The Scrum Guide says “Product Backlog refinement is the act of adding detail, estimates, and order to items in the Product Backlog. This is an ongoing process in which the Product Owner and the Development Team collaborate on the details of Product Backlog items.”

B) Wrong. Scrum does not have separate teams for business analysts.

C) This is a good option, but it won’t get enough clarity at the Sprint Planning. When the PO is ready with a new PB item, the PO should discuss it with the DT to make sure it is understood well before taking it into the next Sprint.

D) Wrong. Scrum recognizes only Developer role in the Development Team.


It looks like the correct answer is A. However, if it were my question, I would mention the PO in this option.


49. PM asks for a status report

Q: The Project Manager has asked for a status report to the Scrum Master about the progress. What should he do ?

A. Prepare it by himself

B. Tell the PO to prepare and submit to the Manager

C. Ask the DT to include the report into their Sprint Backlog

D. Tell the Manager that status will be visible during the Sprint Review

Mikhail: The best option is D (status will be visible at the Sprint Review).

A duty of the Scrum Team is to be transparent. Those who need information are responsible for getting it. So, the manager can investigate the artifacts of the Scrum Team (Product Backlog, Sprint Backlog) and visit the next Sprint Review.


50. All Scrum Teams must have a PO and SM

Q: All scrum teams must have a PO and SM. True or False?

A. False

B. True and they should be available 100% dedicated to the Scrum Team

C. True and the productivity and progress depends on their availability

Mikhail: C is correct. PO, SM and even Dev Team members can work on more than one Product at the same time, but productivity will suffer because of switching focus.


51. DT is unclear how to plan work for the Sprint

Q: The DT approaches the SM for advice as they are unclear about how to plan work for the Product Backlog Items selected for the Sprint. What should the SM do?

(not sure about other options)

A. tell the DT to figure out themselves

B. Ask the PO to adjust the PB items according to the technical expertise of the DT, so they can plan the work.


Mikhail: A is correct. The Scrum Guide says: Teams in Scrum are self-organizing and cross-functional. Self-organizing teams choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team. Cross-functional teams have all competencies needed to accomplish the work without depending on others not part of the team.


52. The same Sprint start date for all teams

Q: Multiple Scrum Teams working on the same Product must have the same Sprint start date. Is this statement correct?

Mikhail: No, the statement is incorrect.

The Scrum framework does not require the same Sprint length or aligned Sprints for all teams. So, the start date can be different.


53. What may be delivered at the end of a Sprint?

Q: Which of these may a Development Team deliver at the end of a Sprint?

a. An increment of working software that is done

b. An increment of software with minor known bugs in it

c. Some sort of documentation

d. Failing unit test, to identify acceptance tests

Mikhail: The Scrum Guide contains:


“At the end of a Sprint, the new Increment must be “Done,” which means it must be in useable condition and meet the Scrum Team’s definition of “Done”.


a. Perfectly suits to this definition

b. Wrong because we do not know the DoD of the team in the question. So, we cannot tell are the minor bugs acceptable for a “Done” Increment.

c. and d. are wrong because the Scrum Guide says:


“Development Teams deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint.”


They cannot deliver only documentation or an unit test.


54. The customer wants a new feature

Q: In the middle of a Sprint, the customer decides that there are 2 new features they want. What should PO do? Select 2 answers.

a. Ask the Development Team to think about whether they can add these features to the current Sprint

b. The Scrum Master add these features to the current Sprint

c. Add it to the Product Backlog

d. Introduce these features at the next Daily Scrum

Mikhail: c. is definitely correct because the Product Backlog is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product.

b. is wrong because the Scrum Guide says: “Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint.”

d. is wrong because the PO cannot introduce the features at the Daily Scrum because he or she does not participate in it

a. is correct because the Sprint scope can be re-negotiated if the Sprint Goal and quality are out of danger (see a quote from the Scrum Guide below)


During the Sprint:

* No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal;

* Quality goals do not decrease; and,

* Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team as more is learned.


55. PO thinks the team cannot deliver a story

Q: You are the scrum master that is new to scrum. PO comes to you halfway through the Sprint and says “I don’t feel like the development team will be able to meet the commitment to deliver the Product backlog item selected during Sprint Planning”. What you should do here?

a) Talk to the Dev team, challenge and inspire them to complete all the work so that they meet their commitment to the PO and have the forecasted velocity.

b) Advise the product owner that the dev team owns the Sprint Backlog and it is up to them to meet the commitment. No one tell the Dev team how to turn Product backlog into increment of potentially releasable functionality.

c) Add more people to Dev team to meet the commitment to PO.

d) Coach the PO that with complex software development you cannot promise the entire scope that was forecasted during Sprint planning. As more is learned during the sprint, work may emerge that affects the Sprint backlog.


Mikhail:

a) is not a good option. The Dev Team has no commitments to the PO. There is no goal in Scrum to meet the forecasted velocity by any price.

b) is correct. The Scrum Guide says: “No one (not even the Scrum Master) tells the Development Team how to turn Product Backlog into 

Increments of potentially releasable functionality;” So, it up to the Dev Team to meet the commitment.

c) is definitely wrong because adding more people to a team decreases productivity in a short term and won’t help to meet the commitment.

d) Fair enough. Sometimes the Dev Team discovers completely unpredicted work during a Sprint and cannot deliver all the items. In this case the Sprint Scope should be negotiated with the PO as soon as possible.


56. PO and ordering items with external dependencies

Q: One of the top PB items depends on a component provided by another team (still in development). Should the DT take it into the next Sprint? Is it a better option to ask the PO to reorder the PB?

Mikhail: This question is about handling external dependencies in Scrum. The rule of thumb here is not to take any work into a Sprint if there are some unresolved external dependencies. The reason is the Dev team cannot take a commitment to finish the item in this case.

Another point to keep in mind is a piece of functionality should be delivered in every Sprint.


In real life I would ask the following questions at the Sprint Planning in this situation:

* Will the external component be delivered during this Sprint? Rarely the answer is “yes” if there is a person representing the external team and making the commitment.

* If the component is not delivered, will work on this item produce some valuable functionality for customers?


If the answers to the both questions are “no”, the dev team will take the next items from the Backlog into the Sprint.


The primary concern of the PO is the flow of value reflected in the ordering of product backlog. Timeline of the flow might be affected by such dependencies but doesn’t necessarily change the ordering.


57. Risks addressed in Scrum

Q: Which risks to software development are addressed by Scrum?

Mikhail: Scrum addresses the most of the risks involved in software development.

For example, Scrum addresses timescale of the planned work via Sprint Planning and fixed Sprint length. Scrum guarantees the best possible value will be delivered in the specified time frame.

Scrum addresses the risks related to the Team: missing skills or bad relationships. The Scrum Guide tells: “Development Teams are cross-functional, with all the skills as a team necessary to create a product Increment;” and “teams are self-organizing”. It means if some skills are missing, the team can organize itself to gain them. The same is with bad relationships. Teams can overcome them by ourselves with a help from the Scrum Master.

Scrum allows to mitigate the risk of an unstable or complex technology through Product Backlog management. The most risky items will be identified and put close to the top. They will be addressed early that guarantees minimal loses in the case if something goes wrong with the technology.

Complexity and unpredictability of requirements are addressed by Scrum via constant work of the PO with the Key Stakeholders and the Development Team (Sprint Reviews, Backlog refinement sessions, etc.)


58. Bad behavior of a developer

Q: A team practices pair programming. Jason is one team member about who everyone has come to you to complain about him. Anyone who pairs with him gets caught in design and architecture decision discussion.

As the Scrum Master what will your do (choose two)?

a) Raise a concern to HR and get Jason removed from the team.

b) Take Jason aside and express your concern over this behavior. Tell him to act as team player and comply to team decision.

c) You suggest to open it up with full team now so that is does not further worsen. You propose to help initiate this discussion but not being the one to start it.

d) You observe this in Retrospective whether discussion on design and architecture is initiated, if not then check how comfortable is everyone with the way it is handled in project.


Mikhail: This question relates to the group of questions where a team member behaves in a wrong way. There are following ideas for the Scrum Master how to handle this:

* As the Scrum Master you are responsible for supporting Scrum, facilitating Scrum events as requested and removing impediments. So, you definitely should take an action.

* Do not immediately suspect lack of commitment. It can be unfair and even harmful. Try to understand what’s going on. Find it out by asking the individual (privately) or someone who knows the individual (discreetly).

* Scrum Teams are self-organizing, so they can handle this for themselves. You should bring it up in the next Retrospective and try to come to a solution that everyone is happy with.


So, the correct answers are c and d.

Definitely, it needs to be discussed with the team. However, it is worth to understand what’s going on before this. Sometimes the root cause of the bad behavior is very different than it seems. In many questions about harmful developer behavior B would be a good option if it was formulated like “Take Jason aside and ask why does he behave in this way”.

As usually, there is no need to wait for a formal event to inspect and adapt. This can be done as soon as the issue is identified.


59. DoD is changed in the middle of a Sprint

Q: After the last release in the production the Key Stakeholders started complain on performance issues. Even the PO agrees, he comes to the Scrum Master. What should the Scrum Master do? (choose one)

a) Tell the PO that dev team owns the DoD and it is their duty to decide on acceptable performance standard

b) Encourage the PO to bring this up to the team so that team can come up with improved DoD, with strong SLA requirements for performance issues

c) Wait till retrospective because this is the appropriate time for dev team to re-consider the DoD


Mikhail: Of course, the PO needs to bring up the concerns to the team. I think it is better to do as early as possible.

However, changing the DoD during a Sprint seems not a good practice because of 2 reasons:

* If the DoD is strengthen in a middle of a Sprint, it could affect the Sprint Goal because items from the Sprint Backlog will require more time to be completed.

* Sometimes a Dev Team could desire to weaken the DoD in a middle of a Sprint to make some unfinished items “complete”. In my opinion it could endanger quality.


So, the best time to change the DoD is at the Retrospective right before the next Sprint.


60. Developer's opinion is not heard

Q: A dev team member complains at the Retrospective that his comments and suggestions were ignored throughout the Sprint. Which three values are we touching here?

a. Focus

b. Commitment

c. Courage

d. Respect

e. Openness

Mikhail: The Scrum Guide itself does not contain details about the Scrum Values. However, I found a very good series of articles on this topic at Scrum.org that explains every value:

Focus

Openness

Courage

Commitment

Rspect


I think the following values were touched in the question: openness, courage and respect (c, d, e):


Openness:

Openness enables team members to share their perspectives, feel heard by their peers, and be able to support team decisions.


Courage:

It takes courage to share a dissenting opinion with a team member and engage in productive conflict.

It takes courage to admit our mistakes. This could apply to our technical work, our decisions, or how we conduct ourselves.


Respect:

When there is respect for all opinions and perspectives, we can ensure everyone has the opportunity to be heard. When we feel we have been heard, it is possible to fully support team decisions even if the decision was not our preference.


61. Sources of Value for PO

Q: As a Product Owner, if you had access to the following individuals, what sources might you consult with when considering the value of a product?

A. Sales Executive or Sales Leader

B. CEO

C. Customers and Prospects

D. Market research results and analyst reports

E. Development Team

Mikhail: Actually, the Product Owner can work with anyone any time (possibly during Product Backlog Refinement and other activities) who can supply good ideas to capture more value for the Product.

In order to maximize value, the PO should identify the Key Stakeholders for the Product, and involve them as necessary throughout the development effort.


There is a good article at Scrum.org that explains everything about the Key Stakeholders. It divides the Key Stakeholders into three broad categories:


The Users – The human people who actually use the Product. Sometimes the Development team acts as a “Production Support Engineer” user

The External Customers – The people responsible for paying to use the Product

The Internal Customers – The people responsible for making the funding decisions for the Product development effort

The Scrum Glossary gives a definition:


A Key Stakeholder is a person external to the Scrum Team with a specific interest in and knowledge of a product that is required for incremental discovery. Represented by the Product Owner and actively engaged with the Scrum Team at Sprint Review.


So, the PO might consider all the suggested options. However, we can try to arrange them:

C. Customers and Prospects (The Users)

B. CEO (The Internal Customers)

A. Sales Executive or Sales Leader (specific interest in and knowledge of the Product)

E. Development Team (sometimes acts as a “Production Support Engineer” user, can give useful feedback during Product Backlog Refinement and other activities)

D. Market research results and analyst reports


62. Who identifies dependencies between the teams?

Q: You’re a product lead with a good track record and the organization has asked you to take the lead of a new product. The product will have 6 teams working on it but they are all new to Scrum. You’re starting to form a Product Backlog. How would you minimize dependencies between Scrum Teams?

(A): You identify the dependencies and re-order the Product Backlog for them.

(B): You work with the Development Teams on how to best parse the work.

Mikhail: Actually, it is easy to answer using the Nexus Guide. It has special events for identifying and minimizing dependencies between the teams and forecasting which team will deliver which Product Backlog items: Refinement and Nexus Sprint Planning. Both meetings involve representatives from all the teams.

So, the correct answer is B.


There is a good paper describing this process in detail: Cross-Team Refinement in Nexus™


63. What to do with process improvements after Retro?

Q: Q. After a Retrospective there are few high priority action items identified by the team. What would be the next course of action?

A. Add at least one high priority item into the Product Backlog

B. Add at least one high priority item into the Sprint Backlog

C. Aim for highest priority item to be implemented in the next Sprint

D. Add the highest priority item into the Product Backlog

Mikhail: A and D are wrong because they suggest adding a team process improvement directly into the Product Backlog. Remember, the Product Backlog lists all features, functions, requirements, enhancements, and fixes that constitute the changes to be made to the product in future releases.


B (add a process improvement into the Sprint Backlog) looks good. However, the current Sprint is almost over at the time of Retrospective. The scope of the next Sprint will be defined at the following Sprint Planning. So, B is not the best choice.


The Scrum Guide contains: The Sprint Backlog makes visible all the work that the Development Team identifies as necessary to meet the Sprint Goal. To ensure continuous improvement, it includes at least one high priority process improvement identified in the previous Retrospective meeting.


So, C option is the best.


64. Responsibilities of Dev Team

Q: Choose three responsibilities of a self-organizing Development Team:

A. Report daily progress to stakeholders

B. Do the work planned in the Sprint Backlog

C. Increase velocity

D. Pull Product Backlog items for the Sprint

E. Reorder the Product Backlog

F. Set the time for the Daily Scrum

Mikhail: A. Wrong. There is no such a duty.

B. Correct

C. Wrong. There is no a formal commitment for this.

D. Correct. The Guide states: “The number of items selected from the Product Backlog for the Sprint is solely up to the Development Team.” I would rephrase it as the DT pulls items from the PB until it feels it is enough.

E. Wrong. This is a PO responsibility.

F. Correct


65. Productivity after adding a new team

Q: There was one Scrum Team working on a product. According to the last decision, a new Scrum team was added to work on the same product. What does happen with the productivity of the first team?”

Check 1 Answer:

A. The productivity of the first team decreases

B. The productivity of the first team increases

C. The productivity of the first team remains unchanged


Mikhail: The correct answer is A. Productivity will decrease because the first team should spend time on interaction with the other team and resolve dependencies. In the very beginning the productivity will drop even more because members of the first team will have to do some knowledge transfer to the new team.


66. Responsibility of SM @ Retro

Q: During a Sprint Retrospective, for what is the Scrum Master responsible?

A. Facilitating and also participating as a Scrum team member.

B. Summarizing and reporting the discussions to management.

C. Acting as a scribe to capture the Development Team’s answers.

D. Prioritizing the resulting action items.

Mikhail: A. Correct. The Scrum Guide states: “The Scrum Master ensures that the meeting is positive and productive. The Scrum Master participates as a peer team member in the Retrospective from the accountability over the Scrum process.”

B. Wrong because management is not part of Scrum

C. Wrong because there is no Scribe role in Scrum

D. Wrong because the whole team should do it


67. When to adjust practices?

Q: When does a Development Team make adjustments to its engineering practices?

A. During Sprint Planning.

B. After they have been discussed and agreed to at the Sprint Retrospective.

C. Whenever needed.

D. Before a Sprint begins.

E. Prior to starting a project.

Mikhail: The correct answer is C. Teams in Scrum are self-organized. There is no need to wait until a formal event. Scrum events give formal opportunities to inspect and adapt. However, any adjustments to practices or processes can be made whenever it is needed.


68. When is discovered work added to SB?

Q: During a Sprint, when is new work or further decomposition of work added to the Sprint Backlog?

A. When the Product Owner identities a new work.

B. When the Scrum Master has time to enter them.

C. As soon as possible after they are identified.

D. During the Daily Scrum after the Development Team approves them

Mikhail: The correct answer is C “as soon as possible”. The Scrum Guide clarifies it:

“As new work is required, the Development Team adds it to the Sprint Backlog.”

“The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint”

There is no need to wait for the Daily Scrum to approve it.


69. Max time for PB Refinement?

Q: How much time should be spent carrying out Product Backlog Refinement?

A. As much as the Product Owner and Development Team agree is necessary to create enough ready Product Backlog Items

B. Up to 10% of the capacity of the Development Team

C. As much as the Product Owner deems necessary to create enough ready Product Backlog Items

D. Up to 10% of the capacity of the Development Team in a typical Sprint, but as much as 90% in early Sprints

Mikhail: At first glance it seems that answer should be B. However, it is A. The Scrum Guide states:

“This is an ongoing process in which the Product Owner and the Development Team collaborate on the details of Product Backlog items.”

“Refinement usually consumes no more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team.”


So, Refinement takes as much time as the PO and the DT agree. Usually, it takes not more than 10% of the total Sprint time.


70. 10 people in a team?

Q: A new Developer joins the Development Team taking the total number to 10 people. As a Scrum Master, What should you do?

A. Instruct the Development Team to split into 2 teams with 5 Developers in each

B. Instruct the Development Team to split into 2 teams, they should decide the appropriate sizes

C. Raise the increased team size as a potential impediment and help the Development Team decide what to do about it

D. Do nothing, the Development Team must fix its own issues

Mikhail: The Scrum Guide advises optimal team size of 3 to 9 people. A and B are wrong because teams are self-organizing. C is better than D because the Dev Team can be not aware of the potential risks. Your job as the Scrum Master is to clarify it and facilitate coming to a solution.


71. What happens in Daily Scrum?

Q: What happens in Daily Scrum?

A. Development team plans work for next 24 hours

B. Inspect work since last daily scrum

C. Forecast upcoming sprint work

My confusion: A and B looks correct. C is not clear to me, do they mean upcoming work of the current sprint or the work of upcoming sprint?


Mikhail: The Scrum Guide contains “The Daily Scrum is held every day of the Sprint. At it, the Development Team plans work for the next 24 hours. This optimizes team collaboration and performance by inspecting the work since the last Daily Scrum and forecasting upcoming Sprint work.”


So, all the options are correct.


72. Should many DTs integrate their increments?

Q:When many Scrum Teams are working on the same Product, should all of their Increments be integrated every Sprint?

A. No, that is far too hard and must be done in a hardening Sprint.

B. No, each Scrum Team stands alone.

C. Yes, but only for Scrum Teams whose work has dependencies.

D. Yes, otherwise the Product Owner (and stakeholders) may not be able to accurately inspect what is done.

Mikhail:The Nexus Guide states: “A Nexus consists of multiple cross-functional Scrum Teams working together to deliver a potentially releasable Integrated Increment at least by the end of each Sprint.”

So, all the teams should integrate their increments by the end of each Sprint. The answer is D.


73. Purpose of a Sprint

Q:The purpose of a Sprint is to produce a done Increment of Product.

A. True

B. False

Mikhail: True (A). The Scrum Guide states: “The heart of Scrum is a Sprint, a time-box of one month or less during which a “Done”, useable, and potentially releasable product Increment is created.”


74. What belongs to the DT?

Q: I think, these two questions from your quiz contradict each other:

Q1 :Who creates the Increment?

A1: Only members of the Development Team create the Increment.


Q2: What belongs solely to the Development Team?

I think, the answer here should include “Increment”, but the answer was : The Sprint Backlog


Mikhail: I think, there is no any contradiction between the questions. The Scrum Guide contains:

“Only members of the Development Team create the Increment.”

“Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.”


So, according to the Scrum Guide, the both answers are correct.


It is not written in the Guide, but in fact, when the Increment is created, it does not belong to the Dev Team anymore. For example, someone hired a dev team to create a product. When the job is done, the product belongs to the person who funded the project.


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 


SM Quiz : 80 questions :


https://mlapshin.com/index.php/scrum-quizzes/sm-learning-mode/


Test1 : 42%

Test2 : Wip



Question 1 of 87

1. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The structure of the Daily Scrum is well-defined and constant. Every team member should answer the three main questions:


What did I do yesterday?

What will I do today?

Do I see any impediment?

 True

Correct- False


 Correct

There is no any prescribed structure. The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Development Team and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Some Development Teams will use questions, some will be more discussion based. It is still perfectly fine to use the questions, but other ways of conducting the meeting are also possible.


Question 2 of 87

2. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Who is responsible for managing the Product Backlog?


 The Product Owner

 The Scrum Master

 The Development Team

 The Key Stakeholders

Correct

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.


Question 3 of 87

3. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, when must an adjustment be made?


 After Scrum Master approval

 After clarifying all the details with the Product Owner

Correct : As soon as possible to minimize further deviation

 The deviations should be discussed at the Daily Scrum and then an adjustment must be made

Correct

If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, and that the resulting product will be unacceptable, the process or the material being processed must be adjusted. An adjustment must be made as soon as possible to minimize further deviation.



Question 4 of 87

4. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What does  the word “development” mean in the context of Scrum? Select the best option.


 Development of an operational environment for the Product

 Research and identifying of viable markets, technologies, and Product capabilities

Correct :  Complex work that can include all the suggested options and even more

 Product development, its releasing and sustaining

 Software and hardware development


When the words “develop” and “development” are used in the Scrum Guide, they refer to complex work including software and hardware development, development and releasing of products and enhancements, development and sustaining product operational environments, research and identifying of viable markets and technologies, and even more.


Question 5 of 87

5. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Imagine you are a Scrum Master in a small Organization that tries to adopt Scrum. There are 10 developers and the Product Owner. How can they be divided into teams? Choose all applicable options:


Correct : 2 teams of 6 and 4 people (after a short meeting the developers decided this is the best option)

 2 teams of 6 and 4 people (because it is good to have a separate QA team)

 1 team of 10 people (because there is no reason to divide)

Correct : 3 teams of 4, 3 and 3 people (each team is cross-functional)

 

Optimal Development Team size is small enough to remain nimble and large enough to complete significant work within a Sprint. Fewer than three Development Team members decrease interaction and results in smaller productivity gains. Having more than nine members requires too much coordination. The Product Owner and Scrum Master roles are not included in this count unless they are also executing the work of the Sprint Backlog.


Question 6 of 87

6. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What happens when a Sprint is cancelled? Select three.


 At the Sprint Retrospective the Scrum Master determines who from the Development Team is responsible for cancelling the Sprint

Correct : Any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed

Correct : All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog

Correct : If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it

 Several top Product Backlog Items are taken into the Sprint Backlog to replace the obsolete items

 

When a Sprint is cancelled, any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed. If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it. All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog.


7. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The Daily Scrum always should take exactly 15 minutes. For example, if your team managed doing it in 5 minutes, you should spend 10 more minutes on some useful team activity like Product Backlog refinement, but not more.


 True

Correct : False


All events in Scrum are time-boxed. It means that every event has a maximum duration. However, the Scrum Guide does not require a minimal duration for any event. As Scrum Teams mature, they can do some events faster (e.g. the Sprint Planning or the Sprint Retrospective).


Question 8 of 87

8. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is allowed to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint?


 The Development Team and the Product Owner

 The Scrum Master

 The Scrum Team

 The Product Owner

Correct : The Development Team


Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.


Question 9 of 87

9. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

How frequently should scrum users inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal?


 At the Sprint Review

 As frequently as possible

 After the Daily Scrum

Correct : Frequently, but it should not get in the way of the work


Scrum users must frequently inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal to detect undesirable variances. Their inspection should not be so frequent that inspection gets in the way of the work. Inspections are most beneficial when diligently performed by skilled inspectors at the point of work.


Question 10 of 87

10. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master serve the Development Team? Select the three most appropriate answers.


Correct :  Coaching < the Development Team>  in self-organization and cross-functionality

X Adding or removing developers from the Development Team in accordance with team velocity changes

Correct : Removing impediments to the Development Team’s progress

X Helping the Development Team as the team leader

Correct :  < Helping > the Development Team < to create high-value products >

    x Finding techniques for effective PRoduct Backlog Management

The Scrum Master serves the Development Team in several ways, including:


Coaching the Development Team in self-organization and cross-functionality;

Helping the Development Team to create high-value products;

Removing impediments to the Development Team’s progress;

Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed; and,

X Coaching the Development Team in organizational environments in which Scrum is not yet fully adopted and understood.


Question 11 of 87

11. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What is the Sprint Backlog?


Correct :   The Product Backlog items selected for this Sprint plus the plan for delivering them

 The Product Backlog items selected for this Sprint plus the Team Backlog items

 The plan for delivering Product Backlog items

 The Product Backlog items selected for this Sprint


The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal.


Question 12 of 87

12. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Scrum does not allow additional meetings that are not defined in Scrum.


 True

Correct : False


Scrum allows additional meetings if they facilitate achieving the Sprint Goal.


Question 13 of 87

13. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Check all the formal opportunities to inspect and adapt.


 The Sprint

 The Daily Scrum

 The Sprint Retrospective

 The Sprint Planning

 The Sprint Review

Correct

Other than the Sprint itself, which is a container for all other events, each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something. These events are specifically designed to enable critical transparency and inspection.



------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 


Question 1 of 87

1. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What are the Scrum Artifacts? Select all applicable items.


Correct : Increment

Correct : Sprint Backlog

 The list of removed impediments

 The Sprint Goal

Correct : Product Backlog


The Scrum artifacts are Product Backlog, Sprint Backlog and Increment.


Question 2 of 87

2. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Definition of Done can be reviewed and adapted during each Sprint Retrospective. True or False?


Correct : True

 False

During each Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by improving work processes or adapting the definition of “Done”, if appropriate and not in conflict with product or organizational standards.


Question 3 of 87

3. Question

Category: Scrum Team

The Scrum Master does the following regarding the Daily Scrum (select all applicable variants):


 Is responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum

Correct :  Teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box

Correct : If others are present at the Daily Scrum, ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting

Correct : Ensures that the Development Team has the meeting

 

The Scrum Master


Ensures that the Development Team has the meeting, but the Development Team is responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum.

Teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box.

If others are present at the Daily Scrum, ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.


Question 4 of 87

4. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


 False

Correct : True

By the end of the Sprint Planning, the Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


Question 5 of 87

5. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the input to the Sprint Planning? Select four.


Correct : The Product Backlog

 Feedback from the Organization CEO

Correct : Past performance of the Development Team

Correct : The latest product Increment

 Feedback from the Key Stakeholders

Correct :Projected capacity of the Development Team during the Sprint

 

The input to the Sprint Planning is the Product Backlog, the latest product Increment, projected capacity of the Development Team during the Sprint, and past performance of the Development Team.


Question 6 of 87

6. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the three main qualities the team model in Scrum is designed to optimize?


Correct :  Creativity

 Competence

Correct : Flexibility

 Responsibility

Correct : Productivity

 Agility

 

The team model in Scrum is designed to optimize flexibility, creativity, and productivity.



Question 7 of 87

7. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master serve the Organization? Select the three most appropriate answers.


Correct : Working with other Scrum Masters to increase the effectiveness of the application of Scrum in the organization

 Making sure the key stakeholders are invited on all Scrum Reviews within organization

 Mixing experienced developers and junior specialists across different Development Teams in the organization to speed up Scrum adoption

Correct : Planning Scrum implementations within the organization

Correct : Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption

 

The Scrum Master serves the organization in several ways, including:


Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption;

Planning Scrum implementations within the organization;

Helping employees and stakeholders understand and enact Scrum and empirical product development;

Causing change that increases the productivity of the Scrum Team; and,

Working with other Scrum Masters to increase the effectiveness of the application of Scrum in the organization.


Question 8 of 87

8. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

How frequently should scrum users inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal?


 At the Sprint Review

 After the Daily Scrum

 As frequently as possible

Correct : Frequently, but it should not get in the way of the work


Scrum users must frequently inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal to detect undesirable variances. Their inspection should not be so frequent that inspection gets in the way of the work. Inspections are most beneficial when diligently performed by skilled inspectors at the point of work.


Question 9 of 87

9. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What is Scrum?


 A software development methodology which is intended to improve software quality.

Correct : A framework within which people can address complex adaptive problems, while delivering valuable products.

 A sequential design process, used in software development processes, in which progress is seen as flowing steadily downwards.



 


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 

Dt: 09142020

------------

Question 1 of 87

1. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

All Development Teams working on the same Product should use the same Product Backlog.


Correct  True

 False


Multiple Scrum Teams often work together on the same product. One Product Backlog is used to describe the upcoming work on the product.



Question 2 of 87

2. Question

Category: Scrum Team

The Scrum Team consists of


 The Key Stakeholders

Correct The Scrum Master

 Correct The Development Team

 Correct The Product Owner


The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner, the Development Team, and a Scrum Master.


Question 3 of 87

3. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master serve the Organization? Select the three most appropriate answers.


Correct Planning Scrum implementations within the organization

 

 Mixing experienced developers and junior specialists across different Development Teams in the organization to speed up Scrum adoption

 

Correct Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption

Correct Working with other Scrum Masters to increase the effectiveness of the application of Scrum in the organization

 

 Making sure the key stakeholders are invited on all Scrum Reviews within organization


The Scrum Master serves the organization in several ways, including:


Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption;

Planning Scrum implementations within the organization;

Helping employees and stakeholders understand and enact Scrum and empirical product development;

Causing change that increases the productivity of the Scrum Team; and,

Working with other Scrum Masters to increase the effectiveness of the application of Scrum in the organization.


Question 4 of 87

4. Question

Category: Scrum Team

It is a good practice to have at least two Product Owners on big projects.


 True

Correct False


The Product Owner is one person, not a committee, but the Product Owner may represent the desires of a committee in the Product Backlog.


Question 5 of 87

5. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Select the two meetings in which people outside the Scrum Team are allowed to participate.


 The Daily Scrum


 Correct The Sprint Planning  

 Correct The Sprint Review   ( SP SRev )

 

 The Sprint Retrospective


 The Development Team may invite other people to attend the Sprint Planning in order to provide technical or domain advice.

The Product Owner is responsible for inviting the Key Stakeholders to the Sprint Review meeting


Question 6 of 87

6. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Scrum is founded on


 Common sense

 Kanban system

 Empirical criticism

Correct Empiricism


Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known.


Question 7 of 87

7. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master serve the Development Team? Select the three most appropriate answers.


Correct Removing impediments to the Development Team’s progress

 Correct Coaching the Development Team in self-organization and cross-functionality

  Correct Helping the Development Team to create high-value products

  

 Helping the Development Team as the team leader

 Adding or removing developers from the Development Team in accordance with team velocity changes


The Scrum Master serves the Development Team in several ways, including:


Coaching the Development Team in self-organization and cross-functionality;

Helping the Development Team to create high-value products;

Removing impediments to the Development Team’s progress;

Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed; and,

Coaching the Development Team in organizational environments in which Scrum is not yet fully adopted and understood.


Question 8 of 87

8. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Is it allowed to skip the Daily Scrum if there is nothing interesting to talk about?


 Yes

Correct No

Each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something. These events are specifically designed to enable critical transparency and inspection. Failure to include any of these events results in reduced transparency and is a lost opportunity to inspect and adapt.


Question 9 of 87

9. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


 False

Correct True


By the end of the Sprint Planning, the Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


Question 10 of 87

10. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Could the Sprint Planning be finished if only work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed to units of one day or less?


Correct Yes, if the remaining work is also estimated, maybe in bigger units

 No, all items in the Sprint Backlog should be decomposed to units of one day or less by the end of the Sprint Planning


The Scrum Guide requires only the work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed by the end of the Sprint Planning, often to units of one day or less. However, the Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


Question 11 of 87

11. Question

Category: Scrum Team

The Scrum Master is focused primarily on the Scrum Team and usually does not care about those outside the Scrum Team.


 True

Correct False


The Scrum Master is a servant-leader for the Scrum Team. The Scrum Master helps those outside the Scrum Team understand which of their interactions with the Scrum Team are helpful and which aren’t. The Scrum Master helps everyone change these interactions to maximize the value created by the Scrum Team.


Question 12 of 87

12. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who has the authority to cancel the Sprint?


 The Scrum Master

Correct The Product Owner

 The Development Team

 The Key Stakeholders

 The Product Owner and the Scrum Master


Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint, although he or she may do so under influence from the stakeholders, the Development Team, or the Scrum Master.


Question 13 of 87

13. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What are the Scrum Artifacts? Select all applicable items.


Correct Sprint Backlog

 CorrectProduct Backlog

The Sprint Goal

 Correct Increment

 

 The list of removed impediments


The Scrum artifacts are Product Backlog, Sprint Backlog and Increment.


Question 14 of 87

14. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment?


Correct The Sprint Goal

 The Scrum Master

 The Sprint Backlog

 The Product Owner


The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment.


Question 15 of 87

15. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The Daily Scrum always should take exactly 15 minutes. For example, if your team managed doing it in 5 minutes, you should spend 10 more minutes on some useful team activity like Product Backlog refinement, but not more.


 True

 Correct False


All events in Scrum are time-boxed. It means that every event has a maximum duration. However, the Scrum Guide does not require a minimal duration for any event. As Scrum Teams mature, they can do some events faster (e.g. the Sprint Planning or the Sprint Retrospective).


Question 16 of 87

16. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal at the Sprint Planning?


 The Development Team

 The Product Owner

Correct The Scrum Team

 The Scrum Master

 The Key Stakeholders

After the Development Team forecasts the Product Backlog items it will deliver in the Sprint, the Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal.


Question 17 of 87

17. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who is allowed to participate in the Daily Scrum?


 The Key Stakeholders

 The Scrum Master

Correct The Development Team


 The Product Owner


The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Development Team. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.


Question 18 of 87

18. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for coping with incomplete artifact transparency?


Correct The Scrum Master

 The Product Owner

 The Development Team

 The Scrum Team


The Scrum Master’s job is to work with the Scrum Team and the organization to increase the transparency of the artifacts. This work usually involves learning, convincing, and change.


Question 19 of 87

19. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Scrum is not a process or technique. True or False?


 False

Correct True


Scrum is not a process, technique, or definitive method. Rather, it is a framework within which you can employ various processes and techniques.


Question 20 of 87

20. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Definition of “Done” is created during the first Sprint and remains unchanged until the Product release.


Correct False

 True


False.  During each Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by adapting the definition of “Done” as appropriate


Question 21 of 87

21. Question

Category: Scrum Events

In which meetings the Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate?


 The Sprint Planning

Correct The Sprint Review

 The Sprint Retrospective

 The Daily Scrum


The Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate only in the Sprint Review meeting. However, any member of the Scrum Team can interact with them any time.


Question 22 of 87

22. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the time-boxes for the Sprint Review and the Sprint Retrospective?


3 and 4 hours respectively

3 hour time-box for each

4 hour time-box for each

Correct 4 and 3 hours respectively   ( Desending ) - S Retro -3 hrs


The Sprint Review is at most a four-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.

The Sprint Retrospective is at most a three-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.


Question 23 of 87

23. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What is the Increment?


 The sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during the Sprint

 All "Done" items in the Sprint Backlog

 All items in the Sprint Backlog that could be released regardless of whether the Product Owner decides to actually do it


Correct  The sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during the Sprint and the value of the increments of all previous Sprints


The Increment is the sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during the Sprint and the value of the increments of all previous Sprints.


Question 24 of 87

24. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the two essential features a Scrum Team should possess?


 It should use tools, processes and techniques approved by the Organization

 It should be flexible enough to complete all the work planned for the Sprint even if some team members are on vacation


Correct It should choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team

Correct It should have all competencies needed to accomplish the work without depending on others not part of the team

Scrum Teams are self-organizing and cross-functional. Self-organizing teams choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team. Cross-functional teams have all competencies needed to accomplish the work without depending on others not part of the team.


Question 25 of 87

25. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master help the Product Owner? Select the three most appropriate answers.


Correct  Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management

Correct Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed

Introducing cutting edge development practices

Correct  Understanding product planning in an empirical environment

Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption


The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:


Ensuring that goals, scope, and product domain are understood by everyone on the Scrum Team as well as possible;

Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management;

Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

Understanding product planning in an empirical environment;

Ensuring the Product Owner knows how to arrange the Product Backlog to maximize value;

Understanding and practicing agility; and,

Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed.


Question 26 of 87

26. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

All the Scrum Teams working on the same product should have the same Sprint length.


 True

Correct False


False. Scrum does not require having aligned Sprints for multiple teams.


Question 27 of 87

27. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Definition of Done can be reviewed and adapted during each Sprint Retrospective. True or False?


 False

Correct True


During each Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by improving work processes or adapting the definition of “Done”, if appropriate and not in conflict with product or organizational standards.


Question 28 of 87

28. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to (select three):


Correct Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements

Get feedback from the Key Stakeholders invited by the Product Owner

Get technical or domain advice from specialists invited by The Development Team or The Scrum Master

Correct Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools

Correct Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work


The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to:


Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools;

Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements; and,

Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work.


Question 29 of 87

29. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Could the Product Owner and the Scrum Master be a part of the Development Team?


 No

Correct Yes

Yes. Scrum does not prohibit the Product Owner or the Scrum Master do development work. However, it is not the best practice because it could create a conflict of interest.


Question 30 of 87

30. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Scrum does not allow additional meetings that are not defined in Scrum.


 True

Correct False


Scrum allows additional meetings if they facilitate achieving the Sprint Goal.


Question 31 of 87

31. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

The Sprint Backlog is created at the Sprint Planning. It is prohibited to add new work into the Sprint Backlog later by the Development Team.


Correct False

 True


The Development Team modifies the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Development Team works through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal. As new work is required, the Development Team adds it to the Sprint Backlog.


Question 32 of 87

32. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The structure of the Daily Scrum is well-defined and constant. Every team member should answer the three main questions:


What did I do yesterday?

What will I do today?

Do I see any impediment?

 True

Correct False


There is no any prescribed structure. The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Development Team and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Some Development Teams will use questions, some will be more discussion based. It is still perfectly fine to use the questions, but other ways of conducting the meeting are also possible.


Question 33 of 87

33. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who participates in the Sprint Planning? Select three.


Correct  The Product Owner

 Correct  The Scrum Master

The Key Stakeholders

The Team Manager

 Correct The Development Team


The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.


Question 34 of 87

34. Question

Category: Scrum Events

How long should the Sprint Planning be?


Not more than 4 hours

Correct Not more than 8 hours

Until all the Items in the Sprint Backlog are decomposed to units of one day or less

Not more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team

Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint.


There is no need to decompose all the Items in the Sprint Backlog. It can be done only for the first days of the Sprint.


Question 35 of 87

35. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, when must an adjustment be made?


 The deviations should be discussed at the Daily Scrum and then an adjustment must be made

 After clarifying all the details with the Product Owner

 After Scrum Master approval

Correct As soon as possible to minimize further deviation


If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, and that the resulting product will be unacceptable, the process or the material being processed must be adjusted. An adjustment must be made as soon as possible to minimize further deviation.


36. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What is the Sprint Backlog?


 The plan for delivering Product Backlog items

 The Product Backlog items selected for this Sprint plus the Team Backlog items

 The Product Backlog items selected for this Sprint

 

Correct The Product Backlog items selected for this Sprint plus the plan for delivering them


The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal.


Question 37 of 87

37. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the result of the Sprint Review?


Correct A revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint

Common understanding of progress toward the Sprint Goal and how progress is trending toward completing the work in the Sprint Backlog

A list of improvements that the Scrum Team will implement in the next Sprint

Common understanding of what can be delivered in the Increment and how will the work needed to deliver the Increment be achieved


The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted overall to meet new opportunities.


Question 38 of 87

38. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the Sprint Retrospective?


It is a meeting where the Development Team synchronizes activities and creates a plan for the next 24 hours

Correct It is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint

It is the key inspect and adapt meeting

It is a meeting to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog if needed

 

The Sprint Retrospective is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint.


Question 39 of 87

39. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

It is normal to have a “hardening” Sprint to remove all technical debt and prepare the Product for upcoming release.


 True

Correct False


It is not normal. Development Teams deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint. This Increment is usable, so a Product Owner may choose to immediately release it. So, there is nothing to prepare. Each increment contains only “Done” functionality that could be released immediately.



Question 40 of 87

40. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Only the Product Owner and the Development Team participate in the Sprint Planning. There is nothing to do for the Scrum Master.


 Correct False

 True


The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.


Question 41 of 87

41. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

How does Definition of “Done” help the Scrum Team? Select three most applicable items.


 Correct DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

 Correct DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

 Correct DoD ensures artifact transparency

 

 DoD helps to calculate velocity of the Scrum Team

 DoD helps in inspection and adaptation

 

DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

DoD ensures artifact transparency


Question 42 of 87

42. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

How frequently should scrum users inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal?


As frequently as possible

Correct Frequently, but it should not get in the way of the work

After the Daily Scrum

At the Sprint Review


Scrum users must frequently inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal to detect undesirable variances. Their inspection should not be so frequent that inspection gets in the way of the work. Inspections are most beneficial when diligently performed by skilled inspectors at the point of work.


Question 43 of 87

43. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What happens during the Sprint? Select three answers.


Correct Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team as more is learned

Correct Quality goals do not decrease

Correct No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal


 Sprint scope is defined at the Sprint Planning and cannot be changed

 The Sprint Goal is changed frequently to reflect the status of the remaining work


During the Sprint:


No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal;

Quality goals do not decrease; and,

Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team as more is learned.


Question 44 of 87

44. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Who is responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum? Select the best choice.


 The Scrum Team

Correct The Scrum Master

 The Product Owner

 The Scrum Master and the Product Owner

 The Development Team

 

The Scrum Master is responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide. Scrum Masters do this by helping everyone understand Scrum theory, practices, rules, and values.


Question 45 of 87

45. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The Daily Scrum time-box depends on the size of the Development team.


Correct False

 True


The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event for the Development Team of any size.


Question 46 of 87

46. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What is Scrum?


A software development methodology which is intended to improve software quality.

Correct A framework within which people can address complex adaptive problems, while delivering valuable products.

A sequential design process, used in software development processes, in which progress is seen as flowing steadily downwards.


Question 47 of 87

47. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the three main qualities the team model in Scrum is designed to optimize?


Correct Productivity

Competence

Correct Creativity

Responsibility

Correct Flexibility ( F C P )

Agility

The team model in Scrum is designed to optimize flexibility, creativity, and productivity.


Question 48 of 87

48. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What should be taken into account for the Definition of “Done”? Select the two most appropriate items.


    Experience of the Product Owner

 Correct Conventions, standards and guidelines of the Organization

Definition of "Done" of other Scrum Teams working on other products

Advice of the Scrum Master

 Correct Definition of "Done" of other Scrum Teams working on the same Product

 

If the definition of “done” for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If “done” for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “done” appropriate for the product. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working on the system or product release, the development teams on all of the Scrum Teams must mutually define the definition of “Done.”


Question 49 of 87

49. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Other people than the Scrum Team can attend the Sprint Planning in order to provide technical or domain advice.


Correct True

 False


The Development Team may also invite other people to attend in order to provide technical or domain advice.


Question 50 of 87

50. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Select the five Scrum Values.


Agility

Correct Courage

Correct Commitment

Correct Respect

Correct Focus

Correct Openness ( CC For )

Effectiveness

Self-organization

 

The Scrum Guide recognizes the following Scrum Values: commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect.


Question 51 of 87

51. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What part of the capacity of the Development Team does Product Backlog refinement usually consume?


The Development Team is not authorized for Product Backlog refinement

Not more than 20%

Correct Not more than 10%

Not more than 5%


Product Backlog refinement usually consumes no more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team.


Question 52 of 87

52. Question

Category: Scrum Team

The Scrum Master does the following regarding the Daily Scrum (select all applicable variants):


Correct Ensures that the Development Team has the meeting

Correct Is responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum

Teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box

Correct If others are present at the Daily Scrum, ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting


The Scrum Master


Ensures that the Development Team has the meeting, but the Development Team is responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum.

Teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box.

If others are present at the Daily Scrum, ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.


Question 53 of 87

53. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What comprises Scrum (select four)?


Burn-down charts

Correct Roles

Correct Artifacts

Reports

Correct Events

Correct Rules  (RoA ER )


The Scrum framework consists of Scrum Teams and their associated roles, events, artifacts, and rules. Each component within the framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage. The rules of Scrum bind together the events, roles, and artifacts, governing the relationships and interaction between them.


Question 54 of 87

54. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Where can Scrum be used? Check all the applicable items.


ALL Correct :

 Development of software and hardware

 Development of products and enhancements

 Development and sustaining of Cloud and other operational environments

 Managing the operation of an organization

 Development of almost everything we use in our daily lives as individuals and societies

 Research and identifying of viable markets, technologies, and product capabilities

 

Scrum has been used to develop software, hardware, embedded software, networks of interacting function, autonomous vehicles, schools, government, marketing, managing the operation of organizations and almost everything we use in our daily lives, as individuals and societies.


Scrum has been used extensively, worldwide, to:


Research and identify viable markets, technologies, and product capabilities;

Develop products and enhancements;

Release products and enhancements, as frequently as many times per day;

Develop and sustain Cloud (online, secure, on-demand) and other operational environments for product use; and,

Sustain and renew products.


Question 55 of 87

55. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who participates in the Sprint Review? Select all applicable variants.


 Correct The Development Team

 Correct The Scrum Master

The Organization CEO

 Correct The Key Stakeholders

 Correct The Product Owner

 

During the Sprint Review, the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate about what was done in the Sprint. Based on that and any changes to the Product Backlog during the Sprint, attendees collaborate on the next things that could be done to optimize value.


Question 56 of 87

56. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Imagine you are a Scrum Master in a small Organization that tries to adopt Scrum. There are 10 developers and the Product Owner. How can they be divided into teams? Choose all applicable options:


 1 team of 10 people (because there is no reason to divide)

 2 teams of 6 and 4 people (because it is good to have a separate QA team)


Correct 2 teams of 6 and 4 people (after a short meeting the developers decided this is the best option)

Correct 3 teams of 4, 3 and 3 people (each team is cross-functional)

 

Number of people in a Development Team should be between 3 and 9. Each team should be cross-functional and self-organized.


Optimal Development Team size is small enough to remain nimble and large enough to complete significant work within a Sprint. Fewer than three Development Team members decrease interaction and results in smaller productivity gains. Having more than nine members requires too much coordination. The Product Owner and Scrum Master roles are not included in this count unless they are also executing the work of the Sprint Backlog.


Question 57 of 87

57. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What is the order of items in the Product Backlog?


The less clear items at the top

 Correct Less valuable and most unclear items at the bottom

The recently added items at the top

Alphabetical


The Product Owner is responsible for placing the most valuable and clear items at the top of the Product Backlog.


Question 58 of 87

58. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the three questions the Scrum Guide gives as an example that can be used at the Daily Scrum?


Correct Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal?

Correct What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

Correct What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

 Did I explain all the discovered issues I found yesterday to the Product Owner?

 Do I have complete understanding of the Sprint Backlog item I am working on?


The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Development Team and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Some Development Teams will use questions, some will be more discussion based. Here is an example of what might be used:


What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal?


Question 59 of 87

59. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What does Burn-down Chart show?


 Dependencies, start times and stop times for project tasks

 Hierarchy of tasks that comprise a project

 The evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project

Correct How much work remains till the end of the Sprint

 

Burn-down chart shows the evolution of remaining effort against time.


Question 60 of 87

60. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

If an item in the Sprint Backlog cannot be finished by the end of the Sprint (it turned out there is a lot more work to do than was estimated), the Sprint is cancelled.


Correct False

True


The Sprint is cancelled only in the case if the Sprint Goal became obsolete. If some work could not be done, the Sprint Backlog should be re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team.


Question 61 of 87

61. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What does  the word “development” mean in the context of Scrum? Select the best option.


Development of an operational environment for the Product

Software and hardware development

Correct Complex work that can include all the suggested options and even more

Research and identifying of viable markets, technologies, and Product capabilities

Product development, its releasing and sustaining


When the words “develop” and “development” are used in the Scrum Guide, they refer to complex work including software and hardware development, development and releasing of products and enhancements, development and sustaining product operational environments, research and identifying of viable markets and technologies, and even more.


Question 62 of 87

62. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

It is a good practice to have from time to time a special technical Sprint that consists only of tasks removing the technical debt without implementing any new functionality.


Correct False

 True

 

It is prohibited. The purpose of each Sprint is to deliver Increments of potentially releasable functionality that adhere to the Scrum Team’s current definition of “Done.”



Question 63 of 87

63. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is allowed to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint?


The Product Owner

The Scrum Master

 Correct The Development Team

The Scrum Team

The Development Team and the Product Owner

 

Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.



Question 64 of 87

64. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Who is responsible for managing the Product Backlog?


The Key Stakeholders

The Development Team

The Scrum Master

Correct The Product Owner

 

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.


Question 65 of 87

65. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What does Cone of Uncertainty show?


How much work remains till the end of the Sprint

Dependencies, start times and stop times for project tasks

Hierarchy of tasks that comprise a project

Correct How much is known about the Product over time

 

The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project


Question 66 of 87

66. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for monitoring progress toward high-level goals?


Correct The Product Owner

The Product Owner and The Development Team

The Scrum Master and The Development Team

The Scrum Master

The Development Team

The Scrum Team

 

The Product Owner tracks total work remaining at least every Sprint Review. The Product Owner compares this amount with work remaining at previous Sprint Reviews to assess progress toward completing projected work by the desired time for the goal. This information is made transparent to all stakeholders.


Question 67 of 87

67. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What could be a source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product?


Correct The Product Backlog

The CEO of the Organization

The Key Stakeholders

 

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that might be needed in the product and is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product.


Question 68 of 87

68. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the input to the Sprint Planning? Select four.


Feedback from the Organization CEO

Correct Past performance of the Development Team

Correct The latest product Increment

Correct The Product Backlog

Feedback from the Key Stakeholders

Correct Projected capacity of the Development Team during the Sprint

 

The input to the Sprint Planning is the Product Backlog, the latest product Increment, projected capacity of the Development Team during the Sprint, and past performance of the Development Team.




Question 69 of 87

69. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who create the increment?


Correct The Development Team


Question 70 of 87

70. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What belongs solely to the Development Team?


The Increment

The Definition of Done

The Product Backlog

 Correct The Sprint Backlog

 

Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.


Question 71 of 87

71. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is allowed to make changes in the Product Backlog? Select two options.


Correct The Product Owner

Correct The Development Team, but with permission of the Product Owner

 

 The Scrum Master

 Anyone

 The Key Stakeholders


The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for the Product Backlog. However, he or she can delegate some work related to product backlog management to the Development Team.


Question 72 of 87

72. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What is the essence of Scrum? Select the most appropriate option.


Correct A small team of people that is highly flexible and adaptive


 The Scrum Master and the Product Owner

 The Scrum Guide

 The Development Team


The essence of Scrum is a small team of people. The individual team is highly flexible and adaptive. These strengths continue operating in single, several, many, and networks of teams that develop, release, operate and sustain the work and work products of thousands of people. They collaborate and interoperate through sophisticated development architectures and target release environments.


Question 73 of 87

73. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the questions the Sprint Planning answers? Select two.


What new technologies could be used to speed up the Development Team velocity?

Who will be responsible for each item in the Sprint Backlog?

What is the size of the Technical Debt and how it could be removed?

 

 Correct How will the work needed to deliver the Increment be achieved?

 Correct What can be delivered in the Increment resulting from the upcoming Sprint?

 

Sprint Planning answers the following:


What can be delivered in the Increment resulting from the upcoming Sprint?

How will the work needed to deliver the Increment be achieved?


Question 74 of 87

74. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Check all the formal opportunities to inspect and adapt.


 Correct The Daily Scrum

 Correct The Sprint Review

The Sprint

 Correct The Sprint Planning

 Correct The Sprint Retrospective

 

Other than the Sprint itself, which is a container for all other events, each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something. These events are specifically designed to enable critical transparency and inspection.


Question 75 of 87

75. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What are the three pillars that uphold Scrum?


 Correct Transparency

 Correct Adaptation

Agility

 Correct Inspection  ( T A I )

Self-organization

Cross-functionality

 

Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. Three pillars uphold every implementation of empirical process control: transparency, inspection, and adaptation.


Question 76 of 87

76. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What happens when a Sprint is cancelled? Select three.


Correct At the Sprint Retrospective the Scrum Master determines who from the Development Team is responsible for cancelling the Sprint

Correct Any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed

If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it

Several top Product Backlog Items are taken into the Sprint Backlog to replace the obsolete items

Correct All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog


When a Sprint is cancelled, any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed. If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it. All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog.


Question 77 of 87

77. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the three most applicable characteristics of the Product Owner?


Correct Product Marketplace Expert

Correct Lead Facilitator of Key Stakeholder Involvement

Facilitator of Scrum events

Lead Scrum evangelist in the Organization

Correct Product Value Maximizer


Product Value Maximizer

Lead Facilitator of Key Stakeholder Involvement

Product Marketplace Expert


Question 78 of 87

78. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the time-box for the Daily Scrum?


Correct 15 minutes


 Not limited. Every Development Team member should have enough time to answer the three Main Questions.

 20 minutes

 25 minutes


The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event.


Question 79 of 87

79. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for the Product Backlog?


The Scrum Master and The Development Team

The Development Team

The Product Owner and The Scrum Master

Correct The Product Owner

The Product Owner and The Development Team

The Scrum Master


The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering.


Question 80 of 87

80. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog?


Correct The Development Team

 The Product Owner

 The Scrum Team

 The Scrum Master

 The Product owner and the Development Team

 The Scrum Master and the Development Team

 The Product owner and the Scrum Master

 

The Development Team is responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog. The Product Owner may influence the Development Team by helping it understand and select trade-offs, but the people who will perform the work make the final estimate.


Question 81 of 87

81. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for tracking the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal?


The Product Owner and the Development Team

The Scrum Master

The Scrum Team

The Product Owner

 

Correct The Development Team

 

At any point in time in a Sprint, the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog can be summed. The Development Team tracks this total work remaining at least for every Daily Scrum to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal. By tracking the remaining work throughout the Sprint, the Development Team can manage its progress.



Question 82 of 87

82. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Imagine the following situation. At the Sprint Retrospective meeting the Scrum Team identified some improvements that can be done. What should the Scrum Team do? Select the best option.


Assign responsible team members for every improvement. Check the progress at the next Retrospective.

Assign a responsible team member for at least one improvement. Check the progress at the next Retrospective.


Correct Make sure the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint includes at least one high priority process improvement.

Make sure the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint includes all the improvements.

 

The Sprint Backlog makes visible all the work that the Development Team identifies as necessary to meet the Sprint Goal. To ensure continuous improvement, it includes at least one high priority process improvement identified in the previous Retrospective meeting.




Question 83 of 87

83. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What are Product Backlog features? Select three.


When the final version of a product is rolled out, its Product Backlog is dismissed

Correct It is dynamic

Correct It is never complete

A Product Backlog could be closed when it contains no items to include into the next Sprint

Correct As long as a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists


A Product Backlog is never complete. The earliest development of it only lays out the initially known and best-understood requirements. The Product Backlog evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves. The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. As long as a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists.


Question 84 of 87

84. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Who is responsible for creation of the Definition of “Done”?


The Scrum Master

The Product Owner

The Scrum Team


Correct The Development Team


If the definition of “done” for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If “done” for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “done” appropriate for the product. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working on the system or product release, the development teams on all of the Scrum Teams must mutually define the definition of “Done.”


Question 85 of 87

85. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the characteristics of a Development Team? Select three most appropriate choices.


Having the Scrum Master as a part-time Developer in the Development Team

Having at least one test engineer in the Development Team

 

Correct  Scrum recognizes no titles for Development Team members

Correct  Scrum recognizes no sub-teams in the Development Team

Correct  Accountability belongs to the Development Team as a whole


Development Teams have the following characteristics:


They are self-organizing. No one (not even the Scrum Master) tells the Development Team how to turn Product Backlog into Increments of potentially releasable functionality;

Development Teams are cross-functional, with all of the skills as a team necessary to create a product Increment;

Scrum recognizes no titles for Development Team members, regardless of the work being performed by the person;

Scrum recognizes no sub-teams in the Development Team, regardless of domains that need to be addressed like testing, architecture, operations, or business analysis; and,

Individual Development Team members may have specialized skills and areas of focus, but accountability belongs to the Development Team as a whole.


Question 86 of 87

86. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Scrum recommends using only those Scrum components and rules which suit most for a particular project.


True

Correct False


Each component within the Scrum framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage.



Question 87 of 87

87. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What does Product Backlog management include? Select three most applicable items.


Correct Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs

Correct  Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next

Correct Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions


 Moving Product Backlog items into the Sprint Backlog

 Presenting Product Backlog items to the Key Stakeholders


 Product Backlog management includes:


Clearly expressing Product Backlog items;

Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions;

Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs;

Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next; and,

Ensuring the Development Team understands items in the Product Backlog to the level needed.


------

Dt: 09142020

-------------

Results

47 of 87 questions answered correctly


Your time: 00:31:54


You have reached 47 of 87 points, (54.02%)


Categories

Scrum Artifacts55%

Scrum Events53.33%

Scrum Team43.75%

Scrum Theory61.9%

Of course, you know many things about Scrum, but there are even more to learn.


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 


Online Test II : You have reached 87 of 87 points, (100.00%)


1. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What are the three pillars that uphold Scrum?


TAI

What are the three pillars that uphold Scrum?


 Inspection

 Agility

 Transparency

Correct

Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. Three pillars uphold every implementation of empirical process control: transparency, inspection, and adaptation.


Question 2 of 87

2. Question

Category: Scrum Team

The Scrum Master does the following regarding the Daily Scrum (select all applicable variants):


 If others are present at the Daily Scrum, ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting

 Ensures that the Development Team has the meeting

 Teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box

Correct

The Scrum Master


Ensures that the Development Team has the meeting, but the Development Team is responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum.

Teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box.

If others are present at the Daily Scrum, ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.


Question 3 of 87

3. Question

Category: Scrum Team

The Scrum Master is focused primarily on the Scrum Team and usually does not care about those outside the Scrum Team.


 False

  

Correct

The Scrum Master is a servant-leader for the Scrum Team. The Scrum Master helps those outside the Scrum Team understand which of their interactions with the Scrum Team are helpful and which aren’t. The Scrum Master helps everyone change these interactions to maximize the value created by the Scrum Team.


Question 4 of 87

4. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the time-boxes for the Sprint Review and the Sprint Retrospective?


Correct 4 and 3 hours respectively

 

 4 hour time-box for each

 3 hour time-box for each

 3 and 4 hours respectively

 

The Sprint Review is at most a four-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.

The Sprint Retrospective is at most a three-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.


Question 5 of 87

5. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for monitoring progress toward high-level goals?


Correct  The Product Owner

 

 The Scrum Master

 The Product Owner and The Development Team

 The Scrum Master and The Development Team

 The Scrum Team

 The Development Team

 

The Product Owner tracks total work remaining at least every Sprint Review. The Product Owner compares this amount with work remaining at previous Sprint Reviews to assess progress toward completing projected work by the desired time for the goal. This information is made transparent to all stakeholders.


Question 6 of 87

6. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The Daily Scrum time-box depends on the size of the Development team.


 False

Correct

The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event for the Development Team of any size.


Question 7 of 87

7. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who participates in the Sprint Review? Select all applicable variants.


Correct The Scrum Master

Correct The Development Team

Correct The Product Owner

Correct The Key Stakeholders

 

During the Sprint Review, the Scrum Team and stakeholders collaborate about what was done in the Sprint. Based on that and any changes to the Product Backlog during the Sprint, attendees collaborate on the next things that could be done to optimize value.


Question 8 of 87

8. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What is the Increment?


Correct  The sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during the Sprint and the value of the increments of all previous Sprints

  

The Increment is the sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during the Sprint and the value of the increments of all previous Sprints.


Question 9 of 87

9. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is allowed to make changes in the Product Backlog? Select two options.


Correct The Product Owner

Correct The Development Team, but with permission of the Product Owner


The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for the Product Backlog. However, he or she can delegate some work related to product backlog management to the Development Team.


Question 10 of 87

10. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

If an item in the Sprint Backlog cannot be finished by the end of the Sprint (it turned out there is a lot more work to do than was estimated), the Sprint is cancelled.


Correct False


The Sprint is cancelled only in the case if the Sprint Goal became obsolete. If some work could not be done, the Sprint Backlog should be re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team.


Question 11 of 87

11. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is allowed to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint?


 The Development Team

 Correct

Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.


Question 12 of 87

12. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Scrum recommends using only those Scrum components and rules which suit most for a particular project.


 False

 Correct

Each component within the Scrum framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage.


Question 13 of 87

13. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What is Scrum?


 A framework within which people can address complex adaptive problems, while delivering valuable products.

 Correct


Question 14 of 87

14. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Could the Product Owner and the Scrum Master be a part of the Development Team?


 Yes

 Correct

Yes. Scrum does not prohibit the Product Owner or the Scrum Master do development work. However, it is not the best practice because it could create a conflict of interest.


Question 15 of 87

15. Question

Category: Scrum Team

It is a good practice to have at least two Product Owners on big projects.


 False

Correct

The Product Owner is one person, not a committee, but the Product Owner may represent the desires of a committee in the Product Backlog.


Question 16 of 87

16. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Select the five Scrum Values.

 Focus

 Respect

 Commitment

 Courage

 Openness  ( CC FOR )

Correct

The Scrum Guide recognizes the following Scrum Values: commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect.


Question 17 of 87

17. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

It is a good practice to have from time to time a special technical Sprint that consists only of tasks removing the technical debt without implementing any new functionality.

 False

Correct

It is prohibited. The purpose of each Sprint is to deliver Increments of potentially releasable functionality that adhere < பின்பற்றுங்கள் > to the Scrum Team’s 

current definition of “Done.”


Question 18 of 87

18. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master serve the Organization? Select the three most appropriate answers.


 Working with other Scrum Masters to increase the effectiveness of the application of Scrum in the organization

 Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption

 Planning Scrum implementations within the organization

 Correct

The Scrum Master serves the organization in several ways, including:


Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption;

Planning Scrum implementations within the organization;

Helping employees and stakeholders understand and enact Scrum and empirical product development;

Causing change that increases the productivity of the Scrum Team; and,

Working with other Scrum Masters to increase the effectiveness of the application of Scrum in the organization.


Question 19 of 87

19. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What happens when a Sprint is cancelled? Select three.


 If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it

 Any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed

 All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog

 Correct

When a Sprint is cancelled, any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed. If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it. All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog.


Question 20 of 87

20. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Scrum is founded on


 Empiricism

 Correct

Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known.



21. Question

Category: Scrum Events

How long should the Sprint Planning be?


 Correct

 Not more than 8 hours


Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint.

There is no need to decompose all the Items in the Sprint Backlog. It can be done only for the first days of the Sprint.


22. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the time-box for the Daily Scrum?


 15 minutes

Correct

The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event.


Question 23 of 87

23. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment?


 The Sprint Goal

Correct

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment.

Question 24 of 87

24. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Check all the formal opportunities to inspect and adapt.


 The Sprint Retrospective

 The Sprint Planning

 The Sprint Review

 The Daily Scrum

Correct

Other than the Sprint itself, which is a container for all other events, each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something. These events are specifically designed to enable critical transparency and inspection.


Question 25 of 87

25. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the three questions the Scrum Guide gives as an example that can be used at the Daily Scrum?


 What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

 What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

 Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal?

Correct

The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Development Team and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Some Development Teams will use questions, some will be more discussion based. Here is an example of what might be used:


What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal?

 

Question 26 of 87

26. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What does Cone of Uncertainty show?


 How much is known about the Product over time

 Correct

The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project.


Question 27 of 87

27. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Definition of Done can be reviewed and adapted during each Sprint Retrospective. True or False?

 True

Correct

During each Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by improving work processes or adapting the definition of “Done”, if appropriate and not in conflict with product or organizational standards.


Question 28 of 87

28. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Scrum does not allow additional meetings that are not defined in Scrum.

 False

Correct

Scrum allows additional meetings if they facilitate achieving the Sprint Goal.


Question 29 of 87

29. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

It is normal to have a “hardening” Sprint to remove all technical debt and prepare the Product for upcoming release.

False

Correct

It is not normal. Development Teams deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint. This Increment is usable, so a Product Owner may choose to immediately release it. So, there is nothing to prepare. Each increment contains only “Done” functionality that could be released immediately.


Question 30 of 87

30. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

How does Definition of “Done” help the Scrum Team? Select three most applicable items.


 DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

 DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

 DoD ensures artifact transparency

Correct

DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

DoD ensures artifact transparency


Question 31 of 87

31. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Is it allowed to skip the Daily Scrum if there is nothing interesting to talk about?

 No

 Correct

Each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something. These events are specifically designed to enable critical transparency and inspection. Failure to include any of these events results in reduced transparency and is a lost opportunity to inspect and adapt.


Question 32 of 87

32. Question

Category: Scrum Events

In which meetings the Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate?

 The Sprint Review

Correct

The Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate only in the Sprint Review meeting. However, any member of the Scrum Team can interact with them any time.


Question 33 of 87

33. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Who is responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum? Select the best choice.

 The Scrum Master

 Correct

The Scrum Master is responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide. Scrum Masters do this by helping everyone understand Scrum theory, practices, rules, and values.


Question 34 of 87

34. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the Sprint Retrospective?

 It is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint

Correct

The Sprint Retrospective is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint.


Question 35 of 87

35. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog?

 The Development Team

 Correct

The Development Team is responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog. The Product Owner may influence the Development Team by helping it understand and select trade-offs, but the people who will perform the work make the final estimate.


Question 36 of 87

36. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What part of the capacity of the Development Team does Product Backlog refinement usually consume?

 Not more than 10%

Correct

Product Backlog refinement usually consumes no more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team.


Question 37 of 87

37. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who creates the increment?

 The Development Team

Correct

Only members of the Development Team create the Increment.


Question 38 of 87

38. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the three main qualities the team model in Scrum is designed to optimize?

 Productivity

 Flexibility

 Creativity ( PF C)

Correct

The team model in Scrum is designed to optimize flexibility, creativity, and productivity.


Question 39 of 87

39. Question

Category: Scrum Team

The Scrum Team consists of

 The Scrum Master

 The Product Owner

 The Development Team

Correct

The Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner, the Development Team, and a Scrum Master.


Question 40 of 87

40. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

All Development Teams working on the same Product should use the same Product Backlog.

 True

Correct

Multiple Scrum Teams often work together on the same product. One Product Backlog is used to describe the upcoming work on the product.



Question 41 of 87

41. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to (select three):

 Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements

 Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools

 Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work     ( I I C )

Correct

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to:

Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools;

Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements; and,

Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work.


Question 42 of 87

42. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The structure of the Daily Scrum is well-defined and constant. Every team member should answer the three main questions:


What did I do yesterday?

What will I do today?

Do I see any impediment?

 False

 Correct

There is no any prescribed structure. The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Development Team and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Some Development Teams will use questions, some will be more discussion based. It is still perfectly fine to use the questions, but other ways of conducting the meeting are also possible.


Question 43 of 87

43. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What belongs solely to the Development Team?

The Sprint Backlog

Correct

Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.


Question 44 of 87

44. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who is allowed to participate in the Daily Scrum?


 The Development Team

Correct

The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Development Team. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.


Question 45 of 87

45. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master help the Product Owner? Select the three most appropriate answers.


How does the Scrum Master help the Product Owner? Select the three most appropriate answers.

 Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management

 Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed

 Understanding product planning in an empirical environment

Correct

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:


Ensuring that goals, scope, and product domain are understood by everyone on the Scrum Team as well as possible;

Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management;

Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

Understanding product planning in an empirical environment;

Ensuring the Product Owner knows how to arrange the Product Backlog to maximize value;

Understanding and practicing agility; and,

Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed.


Question 46 of 87

46. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for tracking the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal?


 The Development Team

 Correct

At any point in time in a Sprint, the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog can be summed. The Development Team tracks this total work remaining at least for every Daily Scrum to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal. By tracking the remaining work throughout the Sprint, the Development Team can manage its progress.


Question 47 of 87

47. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, when must an adjustment be made?

As soon as possible to minimize further deviation

Correct

If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, and that the resulting product will be unacceptable, the process or the material being processed must be adjusted. An adjustment must be made as soon as possible to minimize further deviation.


Question 48 of 87

48. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The Daily Scrum always should take exactly 15 minutes. For example, if your team managed doing it in 5 minutes, you should spend 10 more minutes on some useful team activity like Product Backlog refinement, but not more.


 False

Correct

All events in Scrum are time-boxed. It means that every event has a maximum duration. However, the Scrum Guide does not require a minimal duration for any event. As Scrum Teams mature, they can do some events faster (e.g. the Sprint Planning or the Sprint Retrospective).


Question 49 of 87

49. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What is the Sprint Backlog?

 The Product Backlog items selected for this Sprint plus the plan for delivering them

Correct

The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal.


Question 50 of 87

50. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Select the two meetings in which people outside the Scrum Team are allowed to participate.

 The Sprint Planning

 The Sprint Review

Correct

The Development Team may invite other people to attend the Sprint Planning in order to provide technical or domain advice.

The Product Owner is responsible for inviting the Key Stakeholders to the Sprint Review meeting


Question 51 of 87

51. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Who is responsible for creation of the Definition of “Done”?

 The Development Team

Correct

If the definition of “done” for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If “done” for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “done” appropriate for the product. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working on the system or product release, the development teams on all of the Scrum Teams must mutually define the definition of “Done.”


Question 52 of 87

52. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for coping with incomplete artifact transparency?

 The Scrum Master

 Correct

The Scrum Master’s job is to work with the Scrum Team and the organization to increase the transparency of the artifacts. This work usually involves learning, convincing, and change.


Question 53 of 87

53. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

All the Scrum Teams working on the same product should have the same Sprint length.

 False

Correct

False. Scrum does not require having aligned Sprints for multiple teams.


Question 54 of 87

54. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What could be a source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product?

 The Product Backlog

Correct

The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that might be needed in the product and is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product.


Question 55 of 87

55. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal at the Sprint Planning?

 The Scrum Team

Correct

After the Development Team forecasts the Product Backlog items it will deliver in the Sprint, the Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal.


Question 56 of 87

56. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who participates in the Sprint Planning? Select three.

 The Development Team

 The Scrum Master

 The Product Owner

Correct

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.


Question 57 of 87

57. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for the Product Backlog?

 The Product Owner

Correct

The Product Owner is responsible for the Product Backlog, including its content, availability, and ordering.


Question 58 of 87

58. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the input to the Sprint Planning? Select four.

 Projected capacity of the Development Team during the Sprint

 Past performance of the Development Team

 The latest product Increment

 The Product Backlog

Correct

The input to the Sprint Planning is the Product Backlog, the latest product Increment, projected capacity of the Development Team during the Sprint, and past performance of the Development Team.


Question 59 of 87

59. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What is the order of items in the Product Backlog?

 Less valuable and most unclear items at the bottom

 Correct

The Product Owner is responsible for placing the most valuable and clear items at the top of the Product Backlog.


Question 60 of 87

60. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Other people than the Scrum Team can attend the Sprint Planning in order to provide technical or domain advice.

 True

Correct

The Development Team may also invite other people to attend in order to provide technical or domain advice.


Question 61 of 87

61. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the two essential features a Scrum Team should possess?

 It should choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team

 It should have all competencies needed to accomplish the work without depending on others not part of the team

Correct

Scrum Teams are self-organizing and cross-functional. Self-organizing teams choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team. Cross-functional teams have all competencies needed to accomplish the work without depending on others not part of the team.


Question 62 of 87

62. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What should be taken into account for the Definition of “Done”? Select the two most appropriate items.

 Conventions, standards and guidelines of the Organization

 Definition of "Done" of other Scrum Teams working on the same Product

Correct

If the definition of “done” for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If “done” for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “done” appropriate for the product. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working on the system or product release, the development teams on all of the Scrum Teams must mutually define the definition of “Done.”


Question 63 of 87

63. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Could the Sprint Planning be finished if only work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed to units of one day or less?

 Yes, if the remaining work is also estimated, maybe in bigger units

Correct

The Scrum Guide requires only the work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed by the end of the Sprint Planning, often to units of one day or less. However, the Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


Question 64 of 87

64. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Scrum is not a process or technique. True or False?

 True

 Correct

Scrum is not a process, technique, or definitive method. Rather, it is a framework within which you can employ various processes and techniques.


Question 65 of 87

65. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the result of the Sprint Review?

A revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint

 Correct

The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted overall to meet new opportunities.


Question 66 of 87

66. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What does Product Backlog management include? Select three most applicable items.

 Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions

 Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next

 Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs

Correct

Product Backlog management includes:


Clearly expressing Product Backlog items;

Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions;

Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs;

Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next; and,

Ensuring the Development Team understands items in the Product Backlog to the level needed.


Question 67 of 87

67. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What comprises Scrum (select four)?

 Events

 Roles

 Rules

 Artifacts

Correct

The Scrum framework consists of Scrum Teams and their associated roles, events, artifacts, and rules. Each component within the framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage. The rules of Scrum bind together the events, roles, and artifacts, governing the relationships and interaction between them.


Question 68 of 87

68. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What does Burn-down Chart show?


 How much work remains till the end of the Sprint

Correct

 Burn-down chart shows the evolution of remaining effort against time.


Question 69 of 87

69. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

The Sprint Backlog is created at the Sprint Planning. It is prohibited to add new work into the Sprint Backlog later by the Development Team.

 False

Correct

The Development Team modifies the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Development Team works through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal. As new work is required, the Development Team adds it to the Sprint Backlog.


Question 70 of 87

70. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who has the authority to cancel the Sprint?

The Product Owner

Correct

Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint, although he or she may do so under influence from the stakeholders, the Development Team, or the Scrum Master


Question 71 of 87

71. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.

 True

Correct

By the end of the Sprint Planning, the Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


Question 72 of 87

72. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What are Product Backlog features? Select three.

 It is dynamic

 It is never complete

 As long as a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists

Correct

A Product Backlog is never complete. The earliest development of it only lays out the initially known and best-understood requirements. The Product Backlog evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves. The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. As long as a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists.


Question 73 of 87

73. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

How frequently should scrum users inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal?

 Frequently, but it should not get in the way of the work

Correct

Scrum users must frequently inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal to detect undesirable variances. Their inspection should not be so frequent that inspection gets in the way of the work. Inspections are most beneficial when diligently performed by skilled inspectors at the point of work.


Question 74 of 87

74. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Where can Scrum be used? Check all the applicable items.


 Managing the operation of an organization

 Development and sustaining of Cloud and other operational environments

 Development of products and enhancements

 Development of software and hardware

 Development of almost everything we use in our daily lives as individuals and societies

 Research and identifying of viable markets, technologies, and product capabilities

Correct

Scrum has been used to develop software, hardware, embedded software, networks of interacting function, autonomous vehicles, schools, government, marketing, managing the operation of organizations and almost everything we use in our daily lives, as individuals and societies.


Scrum has been used extensively, worldwide, to:


Research and identify viable markets, technologies, and product capabilities;

Develop products and enhancements;

Release products and enhancements, as frequently as many times per day;

Develop and sustain Cloud (online, secure, on-demand) and other operational environments for product use; and,

Sustain and renew products.


Question 75 of 87

75. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Definition of “Done” is created during the first Sprint and remains unchanged until the Product release.

 False

Correct

False.  During each Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by adapting the definition of “Done” as appropriate


Question 76 of 87

76. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What is the essence of Scrum? Select the most appropriate option.

 A small team of people that is highly flexible and adaptive

Correct

The essence of Scrum is a small team of people. The individual team is highly flexible and adaptive. These strengths continue operating in single, several, many, and networks of teams that develop, release, operate and sustain the work and work products of thousands of people. They collaborate and interoperate through sophisticated development architectures and target release environments.


Question 77 of 87

77. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master serve the Development Team? Select the three most appropriate answers.

 Removing impediments to the Development Team’s progress

 Coaching the Development Team in self-organization and cross-functionality

 Helping the Development Team to create high-value products

 Correct

The Scrum Master serves the Development Team in several ways, including:

Coaching the Development Team in self-organization and cross-functionality;

Helping the Development Team to create high-value products;

Removing impediments to the Development Team’s progress;

Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed; and,

Coaching the Development Team in organizational environments in which Scrum is not yet fully adopted and understood.


Question 78 of 87

78. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the characteristics of a Development Team? Select three most appropriate choices.

 Scrum recognizes no sub-teams in the Development Team

 Scrum recognizes no titles for Development Team members

 Accountability belongs to the Development Team as a whole

 Correct

Development Teams have the following characteristics:


They are self-organizing. No one (not even the Scrum Master) tells the Development Team how to turn Product Backlog into Increments of potentially releasable functionality;

Development Teams are cross-functional, with all of the skills as a team necessary to create a product Increment;

Scrum recognizes no titles for Development Team members, regardless of the work being performed by the person;

Scrum recognizes no sub-teams in the Development Team, regardless of domains that need to be addressed like testing, architecture, operations, or business analysis; and,

Individual Development Team members may have specialized skills and areas of focus, but accountability belongs to the Development Team as a whole.


Question 79 of 87

79. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What are the Scrum Artifacts? Select all applicable items.

 Increment

 Product Backlog

 Sprint Backlog    ( I P S )

Correct

The Scrum artifacts are Product Backlog, Sprint Backlog and Increment.


Question 80 of 87

80. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the three most applicable characteristics of the Product Owner?

 Product Marketplace Expert

 Lead Facilitator of Key Stakeholder Involvement

 Product Value Maximizer

 Correct

Product Value Maximizer

Lead Facilitator of Key Stakeholder Involvement

Product Marketplace Expert


Question 81 of 87

81. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Imagine you are a Scrum Master in a small Organization that tries to adopt Scrum. There are 10 developers and the Product Owner. How can they be divided into teams? Choose all applicable options:

 2 teams of 6 and 4 people (after a short meeting the developers decided this is the best option)

 3 teams of 4, 3 and 3 people (each team is cross-functional)

Correct

Optimal Development Team size is small enough to remain nimble and large enough to complete significant work within a Sprint. Fewer than three Development Team members decrease interaction and results in smaller productivity gains. Having more than nine members requires too much coordination. The Product Owner and Scrum Master roles are not included in this count unless they are also executing the work of the Sprint Backlog


Question 82 of 87

82. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What happens during the Sprint? Select three answers.

 Quality goals do not decrease

 Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team as more is learned

 No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal

Correct

During the Sprint:


No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal;

Quality goals do not decrease; and,

Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team as more is learned.


Question 83 of 87

83. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Who is responsible for managing the Product Backlog?

 The Product Owner

Correct

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.


Question 84 of 87

84. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What does  the word “development” mean in the context of Scrum? Select the best option.

 Complex work that can include all the suggested options and even more

Correct

When the words “develop” and “development” are used in the Scrum Guide, they refer to complex work including software and hardware development, development and releasing of products and enhancements, development and sustaining product operational environments, research and identifying of viable markets and technologies, and even more.


Question 85 of 87

85. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Only the Product Owner and the Development Team participate in the Sprint Planning. There is nothing to do for the Scrum Master.

 False

 Correct

The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.


Question 86 of 87

86. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the questions the Sprint Planning answers? Select two.

 How will the work needed to deliver the Increment be achieved?

 What can be delivered in the Increment resulting from the upcoming Sprint?

Correct

Sprint Planning answers the following:


What can be delivered in the Increment resulting from the upcoming Sprint?

How will the work needed to deliver the Increment be achieved?


Question 87 of 87

87. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Imagine the following situation. At the Sprint Retrospective meeting the Scrum Team identified some improvements that can be done. What should the Scrum Team do? Select the best option.

 Make sure the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint includes at least one high priority process improvement.

 Correct

The Sprint Backlog makes visible all the work that the Development Team identifies as necessary to meet the Sprint Goal. To ensure continuous improvement, it includes at least one high priority process improvement identified in the previous Retrospective meeting.


------ 

Dt: 09142020

-------------


PSM I™ Preparation Quiz – Learning Mode

Mikhail Lapshin > Scrum Quizzes > PSM I™ Preparation Quiz – Learning Mode


Results

57 of 87 questions answered correctly


Your time: 3:00:00


You have reached 57 of 87 points, (65.52%)


Categories

Scrum Artifacts65%

Scrum Events56.67%

Scrum Team62.5%

Scrum Theory80.95%


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 

Dt: 09162020

-------------


2. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

How does Definition of “Done” help the Scrum Team? Select three most applicable items.


 * DoD ensures artifact transparency

 DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

 DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

Correct

DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

DoD ensures artifact transparency


Question 13 of 87

13. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who is allowed to participate in the Daily Scrum?

* The Development Team

  Correct

The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Development Team. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.


Question 18 of 87

18. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the three questions the Scrum Guide gives as an example that can be used at the Daily Scrum?


 Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal?

 What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

* What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

Correct

The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Development Team and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Some Development Teams will use questions, some will be more discussion based. Here is an example of what might be used:


What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal?


Question 20 of 87

20. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for monitoring progress toward high-level goals?

 * The Product Owner ( HLV G PO)

Correct

The Product Owner tracks total work remaining at least every Sprint Review. The Product Owner compares this amount with work remaining at previous Sprint Reviews to assess progress toward completing projected work by the desired time for the goal. This information is made transparent to all stakeholders.


25. Question

Category: Scrum Events

In which meetings the Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate?

 * The Sprint Review ( T S Rev )

 Correct

The Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate only in the Sprint Review meeting. However, any member of the Scrum Team can interact with them any time.


Question 29 of 87

29. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What does Cone of Uncertainty show?

* How much is known about the Product over time

 Correct

The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project.


Question 36 of 87

36. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master help the Product Owner? Select the three most appropriate answers.


Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed

 * Understanding product planning in an empirical environment

Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management

 Correct

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:


Ensuring that goals, scope, and product domain are understood by everyone on the Scrum Team as well as possible;

Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management;

Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

Understanding product planning in an empirical environment;

Ensuring the Product Owner knows how to arrange the Product Backlog to maximize value;

Understanding and practicing agility; and,

Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed.

Question 37 of 87

37. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the three main qualities the team model in Scrum is designed to optimize?


 Productivity

* Creativity 

 Flexibility  ( P F Cr )

Correct

The team model in Scrum is designed to optimize flexibility, creativity, and productivity.


Question 39 of 87

39. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to (select three):


 * Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools

Get feedback from the Key Stakeholders invited by the Product Owner

Get technical or domain advice from specialists invited by The Development Team or The Scrum Master

 * Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements

 * Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work

Correct

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to:


Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools;

Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements; and,

Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work.


Question 48 of 87

48. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What are the Scrum Artifacts? Select all applicable items.


 Increment

 Product Backlog

 Sprint Backlog   ( I P S )

Correct

The Scrum artifacts are Product Backlog, Sprint Backlog and Increment.


Question 49 of 87

49. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master serve the Organization? Select the three most appropriate answers.


* Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption

* Working with other Scrum Masters to increase the effectiveness of the application of Scrum in the organization

Mixing experienced developers and junior specialists across different Development Teams in the organization to speed up Scrum adoption

* Planning Scrum implementations within the organization

Making sure the key stakeholders are invited on all Scrum Reviews within organization

Correct ( No M's)

The Scrum Master serves the organization in several ways, including:


Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption;

Planning Scrum implementations within the organization;

Helping employees and stakeholders understand and enact Scrum and empirical product development;

Causing change that increases the productivity of the Scrum Team; and,

Working with other Scrum Masters to increase the effectiveness of the application of Scrum in the organization.


Question 51 of 87

51. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

The Sprint Backlog is created at the Sprint Planning. It is prohibited to add new work into the Sprint Backlog later by the Development Team.

 * False

Correct

The Development Team modifies the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Development Team works through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal. As new work is required, the Development Team adds it to the Sprint Backlog.


Question 60 of 87

60. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment?

 * The Sprint Goal

Correct

The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment.


Question 61 of 87

61. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What comprises Scrum (select four)?

* Rules

 Roles

 Artifacts

 Events       ( RARE  )

Correct

The Scrum framework consists of Scrum Teams and their associated roles, events, artifacts, and rules. Each component within the framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage. The rules of Scrum bind together the events, roles, and artifacts, governing the relationships and interaction between them.



Question 63 of 87

63. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What are Product Backlog features? Select three.

 It is never complete

 As long as a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists

 * It is dynamic

 Correct

A Product Backlog is never complete. The earliest development of it only lays out the initially known and best-understood requirements. The Product Backlog evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves. The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. As long as a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists.


Question 64 of 87

64. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Select the two meetings in which people outside the Scrum Team are allowed to participate.

 The Sprint Planning

 The Sprint Review

Correct

The Development Team may invite other people to attend the Sprint Planning in order to provide technical or domain advice.

The Product Owner is responsible for inviting the Key Stakeholders to the Sprint Review meeting


Question 65 of 87

65. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Scrum recommends using only those Scrum components and rules which suit most for a particular project.

 * False

 Correct

 Each component within the Scrum framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage.


Question 67 of 87

67. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for coping with incomplete artifact transparency?

 * The Scrum Team

Correct

The Scrum Master’s job is to work with the Scrum Team and the organization to increase the transparency of the artifacts. This work usually involves learning, convincing, and change.


Question 72 of 87

72. Question

Category: Scrum Events

How long should the Sprint Planning be?

* Not more than 8 hours

Correct

Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint.

There is no need to decompose all the Items in the Sprint Backlog. It can be done only for the first days of the Sprint.


Question 74 of 87

74. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What happens when a Sprint is cancelled? Select three.

* Any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed

     If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it

     All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog

 Correct

When a Sprint is cancelled, any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed. If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it. All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog.


Question 76 of 87

76. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What does Product Backlog management include? Select three most applicable items.

 Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions

 Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next

* Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs (O E O )

Correct

Product Backlog management includes:


Clearly expressing Product Backlog items;

Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions;

Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs;

Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next; and,

Ensuring the Development Team understands items in the Product Backlog to the level needed.


Question 79 of 87

79. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the result of the Sprint Review? ( SR  is AR PB)

* A revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint

Correct

The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted overall to meet new opportunities.


Question 86 of 87

86. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal at the Sprint Planning?

* The Scrum Team

Correct

After the Development Team forecasts the Product Backlog items it will deliver in the Sprint, the Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal.


Score : 62 out of 87 


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 

Dt : 09192020

-------------


Question 2 of 87

2. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What are the Scrum Artifacts? Select all applicable items.


* Increment

* Sprint Backlog

* Product Backlog

Correct

The Scrum artifacts are Product Backlog, Sprint Backlog and Increment.


Question 5 of 87

5. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master help the Product Owner? Select the three most appropriate answers.


 * Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management

     * Understanding product planning in an empirical environment

* Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed

Correct

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:


Ensuring that goals, scope, and product domain are understood by everyone on the Scrum Team as well as possible;

Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management;

Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

Understanding product planning in an empirical environment;

Ensuring the Product Owner knows how to arrange the Product Backlog to maximize value;

Understanding and practicing agility; and,

Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed.


Question 8 of 87

8. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is allowed to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint?

 * The Development Team

Correct

Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.


Question 15 of 87

15. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Who is responsible for managing the Product Backlog?

* The Product Owner

Ccorrect

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.


Question 27 of 87

27. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What happens when a Sprint is cancelled? Select three.

 All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog

 Any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed

 If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it

 ( A A I )

 Correct

When a Sprint is cancelled, any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed. If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it. All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog.


Question 28 of 87

28. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What comprises Scrum (select four)?


 Events

 Rules

 Artifacts

 Roles            ( ARR E )

Correct   ( No Burn-down charts &  Reports )

The Scrum framework consists of Scrum Teams and their associated roles, events, artifacts, and rules. Each component within the framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage. The rules of Scrum bind together the events, roles, and artifacts, governing the relationships and interaction between them.


Question 30 of 87

30. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What should be taken into account for the Definition of “Done”? Select the two most appropriate items.


* Conventions, standards and guidelines of the Organization

 * Definition of "Done" of other Scrum Teams working on the same Product

 Correct

If the definition of “done” for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If “done” for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “done” appropriate for the product. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working on the system or product release, the development teams on all of the Scrum Teams must mutually define the definition of “Done.”

 

 

Question 40 of 87

40. Question

Category: Scrum Events

In which meetings the Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate?

 * The Sprint Review

 Correct

The Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate only in the Sprint Review meeting. However, any member of the Scrum Team can interact with them any time.


uestion 43 of 87

43. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

How does Definition of “Done” help the Scrum Team? Select three most applicable items.

X DoD helps in inspection and adaptation

      *DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

      *DoD ensures artifact transparency

 * DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning


Correct


DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

DoD ensures artifact transparency


Question 45 of 87

45. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What does Product Backlog management include? Select three most applicable items.


 * Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs

* Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions

* Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next

X Moving Product Backlog items into the Sprint Backlog

Correct

Product Backlog management includes:


Clearly expressing Product Backlog items;

Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions;

Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs;

Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next; and,

Ensuring the Development Team understands items in the Product Backlog to the level needed


Question 47 of 87

47. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Could the Sprint Planning be finished if only work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed to units of one day or less?

* Yes, if the remaining work is also estimated, maybe in bigger units

Correct

The Scrum Guide requires only the work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed by the end of the Sprint Planning, often to units of one day or less. However, the Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


Question 56 of 87

56. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the three main qualities the team model in Scrum is designed to optimize?

 Flexibility

 Creativity

 Productivity PF Cr

 Correct

The team model in Scrum is designed to optimize flexibility, creativity, and productivity.


Question 57 of 87

57. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the time-boxes for the Sprint Review and the Sprint Retrospective?

* 4 and 3 hours respectively

Correct

The Sprint Review is at most a four-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.

The Sprint Retrospective is at most a three-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.


Question 68 of 87

68. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the result of the Sprint Review?

* A revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint

 Correct

The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted overall to meet new opportunities.


uestion 69 of 87

69. Question

Category: Scrum Events

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to (select three):


* Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work

  * Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools

X Get technical or domain advice from specialists invited by The Development Team or The Scrum Master

 * Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements

Correct

The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to:


Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools;

Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements; and,

Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work.


Question 70 of 87

70. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the three questions the Scrum Guide gives as an example that can be used at the Daily Scrum?


   * What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

   * Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal?

* What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

X Do I have complete understanding of the Sprint Backlog item I am working on?

Correct

The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Development Team and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Some Development Teams will use questions, some will be more discussion based. Here is an example of what might be used:


What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal?



Question 71 of 87

71. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What does Cone of Uncertainty show?


 X How much work remains till the end of the Sprint

* How much is known about the Product over time

 Correct

The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project.


Question 81 of 87

81. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal at the Sprint Planning?

X The Scrum Master

* The Scrum Team

Correct

After the Development Team forecasts the Product Backlog items it will deliver in the Sprint, the Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal.


------


PSM I™ Preparation Quiz – Learning Mode

Results 66 of 87 questions answered correctly


Your time: 16:42:10


You have reached 66 of 87 points, (75.86%)


Categories

Scrum Artifacts85%

Scrum Events66.67%

Scrum Team75%

Scrum Theory80.95%

Of course, you know many things about Scrum, but there are even more to learn.


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 

Dt: 0922020

------------


PSM I™ Preparation Quiz – Learning Mode

 

Question 3 of 87

3. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the three main qualities the team model in Scrum is designed to optimize?

*  Flexibility

* Productivity

X Responsibility

* Creativity     P F Cr

 Correct

The team model in Scrum is designed to optimize flexibility, creativity, and productivity.


Question 5 of 87

5. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Could the Sprint Planning be finished if only work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed to units of one day or less?

* Yes, if the remaining work is also estimated, maybe in bigger units

Correct

The Scrum Guide requires only the work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed by the end of the Sprint Planning, often to units of one day or less. However, the Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


Question 6 of 87

6. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What happens during the Sprint? Select three answers.

* No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal

* Quality goals do not decrease

* Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team as more is learned

X Sprint scope is defined at the Sprint Planning and cannot be changed

X The Sprint Goal is changed frequently to reflect the status of the remaining work

Correct

During the Sprint:


No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal;

Quality goals do not decrease; and,

Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team as more is learned.


Question 6 of 87

6. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is responsible for coping with incomplete artifact transparency?

X The Development Team

* The Scrum Master

Correct

The Scrum Master’s job is to work with the Scrum Team and the organization to increase the transparency of the artifacts. This work usually involves learning, convincing, and change.


Question 13 of 87

13. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

What does Cone of Uncertainty show?


X How much work remains till the end of the Sprint

*  How much is known about the Product over time

 Correct

The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project.


Question 16 of 87

16. Question

Category: Scrum Team

How does the Scrum Master help the Product Owner? Select the three most appropriate answers.

X  Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption

* Understanding product planning in an empirical environment

* Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management

* Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed

Correct

The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:


Ensuring that goals, scope, and product domain are understood by everyone on the Scrum Team as well as possible;

Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management;

Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

Understanding product planning in an empirical environment;

Ensuring the Product Owner knows how to arrange the Product Backlog to maximize value;

Understanding and practicing agility; and,

Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed.


Question 22 of 87

22. Question

Category: Scrum Team

What are the three most applicable characteristics of the Product Owner?

* Product Marketplace Expert

* Product Value Maximizer

X  Facilitator of Scrum events

* Lead Facilitator of Key Stakeholder Involvement

 Correct

Product Value Maximizer

Lead Facilitator of Key Stakeholder Involvement

Product Marketplace Expert


23. Question

Category: Scrum Events

How long should the Sprint Planning be?


 X Not more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team

 *  Not more than 8 hours

 Correct

Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint.

There is no need to decompose all the Items in the Sprint Backlog. It can be done only for the first days of the Sprint.


Question 28 of 87

28. Question

Category: Scrum Events

In which meetings the Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate?

* The Sprint Review

 X The Sprint Retrospective

 X The Sprint Planning

 Correct

The Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate only in the Sprint Review meeting. However, any member of the Scrum Team can interact with them any time.

Question 33 of 87

33. Question

Category: Scrum Theory

Select the five Scrum Values.


 * Openness

 * Courage

 * Respect

 * Focus

X Effectiveness

* Commitment ( OFC CR )

 Correct

The Scrum Guide recognizes the following Scrum Values: commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect.


Question 36 of 87

36. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the time-boxes for the Sprint Review and the Sprint Retrospective?


* 4 and 3 hours respectively

X 3 and 4 hours respectively

Correct

The Sprint Review is at most a four-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.

The Sprint Retrospective is at most a three-hour meeting for one-month Sprints.


46. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

Who is allowed to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint?

* The Development Team

X The Development Team and the Product Owner

 Correct

Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.


Question 48 of 87

48. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What are the three questions the Scrum Guide gives as an example that can be used at the Daily Scrum?

* What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

X Do I have complete understanding of the Sprint Backlog item I am working on?

* What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

* Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal?

 Correct

The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Development Team and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Some Development Teams will use questions, some will be more discussion based. Here is an example of what might be used:


What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal?

Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal?


Question 51 of 87

51. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

What are the Scrum Artifacts? Select all applicable items.

X The list of removed impediments

 * Increment

 * Sprint Backlog

 * Product Backlog

Correct

The Scrum artifacts are Product Backlog, Sprint Backlog and Increment.


Question 52 of 87

52. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who is allowed to participate in the Daily Scrum?

X The Product Owner

X The Scrum Master

* The Development Team

Correct

The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Development Team. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.


Question 53 of 87

53. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What is the result of the Sprint Review?

 * A revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint

Correct

The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted overall to meet new opportunities.


Question 58 of 87

58. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Could the Sprint Planning be finished if only work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed to units of one day or less?

* Yes, if the remaining work is also estimated, maybe in bigger units

X No, all items in the Sprint Backlog should be decomposed to units of one day or less by the end of the Sprint Planning

Correct

The Scrum Guide requires only the work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed by the end of the Sprint Planning, often to units of one day or less. However, the Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


Question 62 of 87

62. Question

Category: Scrum Team

Who is responsible for managing the Product Backlog?

Correct The Product Owner

X The Development Team

 Correct

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.


Question 66 of 87

66. Question

Category: Scrum Artifacts

How does Definition of “Done” help the Scrum Team? Select three most applicable items.


 * DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

 * DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

 * DoD ensures artifact transparency

X DoD helps in inspection and adaptation

Incorrect

DoD is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

DoD guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

DoD ensures artifact transparency


Question 71 of 87

71. Question

Category: Scrum Events

What happens when a Sprint is cancelled? Select three.

* Any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed

X Several top Product Backlog Items are taken into the Sprint Backlog to replace the obsolete items

* All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog

* If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it

Correct

When a Sprint is cancelled, any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed. If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it. All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog.



Question 84 of 87

84. Question

Category: Scrum Events

Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal at the Sprint Planning?


X The Product Owner

* The Scrum Team

 Correct

After the Development Team forecasts the Product Backlog items it will deliver in the Sprint, the Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal.



PSM I™ Preparation Quiz – Learning Mode

Mikhail Lapshin > Scrum Quizzes > PSM I™ Preparation Quiz – Learning Mode

Results

67 of 87 questions answered correctly


Your time: 07:20:38


You have reached 67 of 87 points, (77.01%)


Categories

Scrum Artifacts75%

Scrum Events66.67%

Scrum Team81.25%

Scrum Theory90.48%

Of course, you know many things about Scrum, but there are even more to learn.


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 


Dt: 09222020

------------


PSM I™ Preparation Quiz – Real Mode

Mikhail Lapshin > Scrum Quizzes > PSM I™ Preparation Quiz – Real Mode

Results

71 of 80 questions answered correctly


Your time: 00:43:44


You have reached 71 of 80 points, (88.75%)


Categories

Scrum Artifacts90%

Scrum Events85.19%

Scrum Team85.71%

Scrum Theory94.74%

Great!


You passed the mock PSM I exam. Now you are better prepared for the real one!


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 


www.Volkerdon.com/

Scrum Master preparation course and exam simulator :

Dt: 09232020

-------------

1. The Product ower is the owner of the Product Backlog?

Correct  : True


2. The scrum team gathers for the sprint planning meeting. the product owner has some stories but the team 

finds that the stories do not provide enough information to make a forecast. the next immediate step is 


Correct : The developement team makes it transparent that they cannot make a forecast with insufficient information and 

negotiates with the product owner on refining the stories to a ready state


3. The product backlog refinement should not take more than 10% of the product owner's time

False 


4. The product owner is responsibile for the defenition of "Done"

False  ( Development Team)


5. At the end of a sprint, the new Increment must be "Done", which means it mus be in useable condition and meet the scrum

team's definition of "Done". When should increment be shipped?

Correct 

When it makes sense


X When the increment is shippable

X When the increment is free of defects 

X After the each sprint

 

6. Choose all activities which are the responsbilities of the developement team in Scrum :

X Prioritize the product backlog

Provide Estimates

X Turn the sprint backlog itesm into an increments

Make technical decisions 

Create timeline for burndown chart

X


7. Which of the following is true about the sprint review? ( Choose 2 answers )

  Correct It is 4 hours in one month sprint.

* Correct Stakeholders must attend this event ( Stakeholder is not needed to sprint review)


8. In Scrum, an increment is valuable when it.......(Select all correct answers) 

* Correct : Reduce long-term operational costs

Correct : Increase customer satisfaction


X Is delivered ontime

X It has all the features that the product owner expected.


9. Which role in scrum does represent interests of the stakeholders and ensures the value of 

completed work?

Correct Product owner


10. Choose one best answer.Scrum is not.......

Correct A Software development process


11. Select all that apply. Who must praticipate at the Daily Scrum?

Development Team


12. From the scrum guide we know, that the product backlog lists all features, functions,

requiremenst, enhancements, and fixes that consistute the changes to be made to the product 

in future release. When should the product backlog items be refined?

* Choose 2 answers.

* Correct During the sprint, if they have not been refined in the previous sprints.

* Correct In one or two preceding sprints.


13. According to the scrum guide, what should be the frequesncy of inspection in scrum? Select all that apply

Correct In Every even withing the sprint

Correct Frequently, as decided by the team, but not getting in the way to work.


14. Select all activities where the scrum master serves the development team

Helping to create high-value products

Correct :  

Removing impediments to the Development Team’s progress

Option : Helping the Development Team as the team leader

Facilitating scrum events as requested or needed.

Coaching the team in organization environments in which scrum is not yet fully adopted and understood`


old Answer : Coaching the Development Team in self-organization and cross-functionality


15. Ater scrum implementation, the scrum team ensures the exception of technical debt

Correct False

 

16. Which of the following can be consider for odering the product backlog?

Correct Importance

X User stories 


17. A scrum team is in the process of defining product backlog items. the scrum master notices that the development team is

not using user story format to capture the backlog items. The scrum master should

Correct 

Let the team decide the format of product backlog items.

X Correct the team's behaviour by coaching them about user stories.

X Add a business analayst with knowledge writing user stories....


18. The development team is free to change its engineering and testing practices whenever they want.

Correct True.


19. The scrum team uses the value points to order the product backlog. what is the benefits of this method?

*Correct Makes the ordering more transparent


X Value points are not allowed in scrum


21. The scrum master as a servant leader is in service to which of the following?

Correct The organisation and the Scrum team


22. The scrum event for the process improvement is ....( according to the scrum Guide )

Correct Sprint Retrospective

X Sprint review


24. Scrum is software development methodology

False


25. From the scrum Guide : The Product Backlog refinement is the act of ... to the items in the product backlog.

* Correct Adding detail, estimates, anad order

 

26. Which two statements are true about the sprint backlog

Correct

The Sprint backlog is a plan with enough detail that changes in progress can be understood in the daily scrum

The Sprint backlog makes visible all of the work that the develoment team identifies as necessary to

meet the spring goal.


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 


www.Volkerdon.com/

Scrum Master preparation course and exam simulator :

Dt: 09232020

-------------

01. What is the resason why the daily scrum is held at the same time and same Place?

Correct 

To reduce complexity and Overhead


02. 


03. 


04. 


05. 


06. 


07. 


08. 


09.


10.


11. 


12. 


13. 


14. 


15. 


16. 


17. 


18. 


19.


20.


21. 


22. 


23. 


24. 


25. 


26. One of the member of the development team often has conflicts with entire

team. These conflicts cause issues to progress. Who is responsible for removing this issue?

* Correct Development Team 

X Product Owner

X Scrum Master


27. There is a single product backlog for multiple scrum teams

Correct True


28. Three Pillars of Scurm are :

Correct

Transparency, Inspection, adaptation ( TAI )


29. When more scrum teams are added to a project that works on single product,

the productivity of the original scrum teams mostly likely will increase

Correct

False


30. What are some examples of product backlog management techniques where a scrum master can coach the product owner and the development team

Choose ALL answers that apply.

* Correct Creating a common standard that defines the preferred level of descripiton and transparency each product backlog item should

meet before introducing them in sprint planning. The Team can then use this standard and guideline to decompose the items.

 

x In addition to using value, a product owner can chose input from the development team on ordering the items based on 

their technial coherence.  ( Acceptance / இணக்கத்தைப் )


( * )  Technique like wiriting the items in the form of user stories and their acceptance tests.


X - Choosing a tool to manage the product backlog.


31. How should a product backlog item to be refined before its development begin? Choose 2 answers)

Correct : To be checked : In a way that its clear enough for Dev Team

Correct : In a way that it can be "Done" in the timeboxed duration of one Sprint


X   All the task required from completing it should be identified.

X   It should be clear which tester is responsible for each task.



32. Which of the following might be discussed in a sprint restrospective? 

Correct 

The definition of "Done"


33. The scrum master is the role in scrum. one of the responsibilities for the scrum master is to find, 

track and help remove different obstacles. But who supports the scrum master in removing obstacles? choose all correct answeres from the following 

Correct 

C The project Manager / PO 

X The senior management

X The senior member of the Dev Team

C Development team


34. Select 2 true statements aboout scrum

Correct Scrum is a framework for developing and maintaining complex products

* Correct Scrum is base on empirical process control theory


35. From the following answers, chose one which is not a prioritisation technique?

Correct :

X Kano analysis - Prioritisation technique

Kano analysis Definition :  Is a quality measurement tool which is used to determine which requirements are important. ... Kano analysis can help you rank requirements for different customers to determine which have the highest priority. Kano analysis is a tool which can be used to classify and prioritize customer needs.

X Planning Poker - Prioritisation technique

Priority poker is a game for collaboratively prioritizing items, be they features, backlog estimations, goals 

 x User story mapping -  Prioritisation technique

 

* Correct Prodcut Backlog Ordering - Is NOT Prioritisation technique

 

36. How are product backlog itesm selected in scaled scrum?

Development teams pull in itesm in agreement with the product owner


37. Scrum as a framework increases the transparency of ....( Select one answer)

X Technical ability of team to create product increment

Information on real progress

Correct Both


38. 

Hardening sprints are helpful for dfect management and integration 

Correct 

False

* Hardening sprints is false


39. which of the following is a valid service from the scrum master to ther product owner?

****** Correct : Helping the Product Owner find techniques for managing the Product Backlog


40. From the following answers, how shoul developers deal with system, security or non-functional freatures

Correct

Incorporate them into every Increment​


X - Incorporate them in the hardening sprint


41. The scrum  team begins the first sprint. what is main activities for the development team during

this sprint? select all correct answers choose only one best answer

* Correct : Turn the product backlog itesm it selects into the sprint backlog to an increment of 

potentially releasable product functionality.


42. During the daily scrum, a team member says he doesn't know when his task will be completed .

what is the right action from the scrum team?

Correct 

The development team should collaborate to plan alternative steps such as pairing the member with someone else to 

eliminate the risk of not meeting the sprint goal


X The scrum master should mentor the team member on how to estimate the task


43. Who assigns tasks for developers?

Correct 

Developers themselves


44. Scrum team are working on the same product. Due to this each team should have their definiton of "Don".

Correct

False


45. What type of process control is scrum?

Correct

Empirical 

 

46. Developers sign up to own (individually) sprint backlog items at the sprint planning

Correct : False


47. How many weeks are required to release increment based on the following information:- 240 points

release backlog - 3 -week per sprint - 45 points velocity per sprint?


Correct 18 Weeks

X 12 Weeks

X 16 weeks​

X 6 weeks


45 points are velocity for 1 Sprint ( 3 Weeks). It means that velocity for 1 week is 15 points (45/3 = 15) 

There are 240 points to complete resele 240 points / 15 points ( 1 week) =16weeks. 

But the duration of scrum is 3 weeks and the increment will be ready only after the thrid week of the

sprint. So the correct answer is 18 week.


48. According to the scrum guide, what happens to the incomplete product backlog 

items when the sprint is over?

Correct

They would be re-estimated and moved back to the product backlog


49. What does the team use in the scrum, to reduce the likelihood of not meeting big commitments?

Correct 

Timeboxking, so the events cannot exceed a predetermined time box


50. The purpose of the daily scrum for the developers is to inform the product ownere of the progress.

Correct False


51. Due to high season in organisation, the product owner doesn't spend enough time to maximise the value of the 

product and doesn't attend mandatory events. which of the following options is the best response from the scrum master?

Correct

Train the Product Owner why its important for her/him to spend enough time on the project


X Bring up the issue in the sprint retrospective.


52. As we know from the Scrum guide this role is responsbile for managing the product backlog in the scrum

Correct 

The product owner

 

 53. In the middle of the sprint the development team realise they are not able to complet all sprint backlog items.

 what is the best action for the PO to reslove this issue?

 Correct

Help the developers adjust their work and meet the sprint goal


54. As we know from the scrum guide this role is responsible for managing the progress of work during a sprint

Correct The development team


55. Which of the following is the LEAST productive way for the scrum master to improve the development Teams

communications with the PO?

Correct answer for lease productive way is :

Act as a go-between for them 


56. If there are 35 developers for a scrum project, how should they be divided into teams?

Correct Developers should decide 

X They dont have to be divided


57. From the following answers choose the best. the most correct description of the sprint backlog is :

Correct

The Sprint backlog is the set of prodcut backlog itesm selected for the sprint, plus a plan 

for delivering the product increment and realising the sprint goal.


58. According to the scrum guide, the scrum is based on....type of process

Correct

Empirical


60. Which role in scrum should know the most about the release and product requirements? 

Correct  : The Product Owner

X The scrum master


61. Who is responsible for maximising the value of work the development team performs?


X The development Team

Correct 

The Product Owner


62. In what ways does the product ownere manage the value of the product? ( choose 2 answers) 

* Correct Product Backlog Ordered

  Correct Customer feedback via frequent releases


63. The PO has doubts about the quality of the definition of "Done". what shol sh/he do?

* Correct increase the product quality by adaption of the definition of "Done" in the next  Sprint retrospective.


64. Which statement can be considered as an increment?

* Correct A few new features in a uasble state that are added to those delivered in the 

previous sprints.


65. The benefits of having a solid product vision are ( Choose 3 answers)

Correct

It gives an overall direction to the sprints

It makes it easier to inspect the incremental progress of the product

It helps the team stay focused and make better decisions.


66. In a scrum team, if the scrum master is also a developer, then

Correct

He must participate in the daily scrum


67. During the sprint, SM's role is to do which 2 of the following

Correct

Facilitate inspection and adaptation opportunities as reqeuested or needed

Helping the Development Team to create high-value products


68. This role or these roles are responsible to change the Sprint backlog in the middle of the scprint?

Correct

The Development team


69. The sprint may be cancelled when.....

Correct

The sprint goal doesn't make sense anymore.


70. How much of the sprint backlog should be defined during the sprint planning meeting?

Correct

Just enough, so the development team can forecast what it can do, and to start the first several days of the sprin


X All of the potential work


71. This is the role of scrum master in the sprint retrospective

Correct Peer Team member


72. From the following answers chose one. In scrum, by transparency we mean ........

Correct : Significant aspects of the process must be visible to those responible for the outcome


X The whole process should be visible to any.

X The process should be visible and understood by each stakeholder



73. A servant leadership role includes

Correct Schielding team members from interruptions


74. The Sprint review is an event that requires`

Correct Stakeholders active participation

X Only inspection and adaption activities.


75. One of the member of the Development team is requested by the stake holder ( ONe of the manager of the compamy)

to help them with an urgent and important task outside the sprint goal. The team member set aside the sprint work

for the day and instead helped with this request. wich statemment describes the team member action?

Correct

The team member did not live by the scrum value of focus.

 

76. The Team may decrease the technical debt by .....

Correct

Improving the deifinition of "Done"


77. According to the scrum guide, .....are purposes of the sprint retrospective ( Select all acorrect answers )


X Inspect how the last sprint went with regards to people, relatonsips, process, and tools

Correct


78. Higher ordered Product backlog itesm are usually clearer and more detailed than lower ordered ones. 

How should a product backlog item be refined when it is located at the top? (Choose 2 answers)

Correct

In a way that it can be "Done" in the timeboxed duration of one sprint.

IN a way that it's clear enough for the developers.


X IT should be clear which developer is responsible for it.


79. This role is scrum is responsible for updating remaining work during the sprint

Correct

The Development team

X The scrum team


80. Which of the following statements is true?

* Correct  Scrum Master is a management position. A person with scrum experience and a coaching style

of servant leadership is a good fit.

 Trus SM - MP (mgmnt position )- SL (Servent Leadership )


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 

Dt:09262020

-----------

05. Who create the sprint goals?

Correct

The scrum Team

X the Scrum master


06. From the following answers, how shoul developers deal with system, security or non-functional freatures

Correct Incorporate them into every Increment​


13. from the following answers choose the common outcomes of daily scrums

Correct The scrum master identifies new impediment

Correct Everyone is clear on the next steps towards the sprint goal

X The impediments are discussed and possible solutions select

X the prodcut owner is informed of the progress.


Impediments are pointed out in daily scrum, but we don't discuss them. Each developer informs everyone about tasks they will

handle in the next 24hours, which is how the team progress towards the goal.


16. This role or these roles are responsible to change the sprint backlog in the middle of the sprint?

* Correct The Development Team


25. Wich of the following scrum event is the most important opportunity for capturing leassons learned?

Correct

Sprint Retrospective


30. Who decides the duration of the sprint?

* Correct Scrum Team   < DOS - ST >

X Scrum Master 


37. The product backlog refinement shouldn't take more than 10% of the product owner's time?

Correct : False


46. According to the scrum guide, what should be the frequency of inspection in scrum? Select all that apply

Correct  (3 Answers )

* Correct A. As needed by the product owner

X B. In every event within the scprint

  Correct C. As planned in the sprint planning

  Correct D. Frequently, as decided by the team, but not getting in the way of work.

A, C, D

 

48. Scrum is container for other techniques and methodologies

Correct 

Yes


51. Which of the following is a valid service from the Scrum Master to the Product Owner?

Correct

Helping the Product Owner find techniques for managing the Product Backlog.


X Planning scrum implementations within the organizaton


52. According to the scrum guide, a self-organized team......

Correct

Managing their work ot reach a common a goal


55. Which of the following can be Considered for ordering the Product backlog?

Correct Importance

X Risk


56. During the sprint zero, the product owner must .....


Correct : All answers are incorrect because there is no sprint zero in scrum


X Prepare the product backlog for the whole project


X Prepare the product backlog for the next few sprints


X Communicate with the customer and understand the requirements


61. The scrum master as a servant leader is in service to which of the following?

Correct 

The organization and the scrum team


63. According to the scrum guide empiricism provides

* Correct Frequent Opportunities to discuss different possibilities

* Correct Frequenc opportunities to make informed decisions, reducing risk

X Frequent opportunities to get information using which uncertainty can be completely eliminated.

66. After scrum implementation, the scrum team ensure the exception of technical debt

Correct 

False


67. Who is responsbile for maximising the value of the work the development team performs?

Correct 

The Product Owner


68. How an organization can help the scrum team to work efficiently and productively?

X By Checking every day the development teams activity

X By providing the Product owner required and valuable information about the product.

Correct : An organization must change members of the team at least every 4 sprints.

X Setting the vision and strategy to guide the overall direction of the organization


69. Choose all activities which are the responsibilities of the development team in scrum

Correct Prioritize the Product Backlog

Correct Provide Estimates

Correct Make technical decisions


* X Trun the sprint backlog items into an increment

X Create timeline for burndown chart


72. Imagine you are a scrum master. There are 10 professionals (devlopers and QAs) and the product owner. How should

you distribute people between development teams? Choose all applicable answers :

Correct

2 teams of 6 and 4 people ( Decision made afte a short meeting and teams are self-organzining)

3 teams of 4, 3 and 3 people ( each team is cross-functional)


73. An Organization has decided to adopt scrum. what happens if they tailor the scrum terminology to match their current environment? ( Choose 3 answers )

Correct The change might not be obvious to everyone, and some benefits may be lost.

* Correct The change might not be obvious to everyone, and therefore very little change happen.

Correct  Management may feel less enthusiastic about the change.


76. During the sprint, the scurm master's role is to do which two of the following:

Correct Facilitate inspection and adaptation opportunities as requested or needed

Correct Helping the development team to create high-value products

------ 76% scored required 85% to pass

------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 

Dt.09262020 - II

-----------------


13. In Scrum, product owner is accountable for.....


* Correct Creating and sustaining a Product backlog that maximises value and represents the needs of the Stakeholders.


X Refining the top level poduct backlog itesm until they are ready to be handover to the development team


X Describing an increment at the sprint planning and making sure that the development team delivers it by the end of the sprint.


16 The team may decrease the technical debt by....

Correct 

Improving the definition of "Done"


The scrum team begins the first sprint. what is the main activities for the development team during 

this sprint? select all correct answers

Correct

Turn the product backlog items its selects into the sprint backlog to an

increment of potentially releasable product functinality.


18. At the sprint review, the stakeholders notice that product development is going very slow,

the product progress is not very visible and lacked transparency. In general, stakeholders can't understand

what the team is doing and not sure about the value of the product. whos is responsible for this?

Correct

The product owner


28. When a product backlog item or an increment"done" means. which o is described as "done", everyone must understand

what "Done" means . which of the following describes the definition of "done"? choose 2 answers

Correct Helps ensure increment is releasable

Correct Increases transparency


36. Who creates the sprint goal? 

Correct The scrum Team ******** SG Vs ST

X The product owner

X The development team


40. Who decides the duration of the sprint?

X Scrum master

C Scrum team


41. According to the scrum guide, the product backlog item "ready" for selection in a 

sprint plannning meeting.......

* Correct When it can be "Done" within one sprint *******


X when it meets the criteria in the definition of "Ready"

X  When all tasks required for completing it are identified.


45. From the scrum guide : The product backlog refinement is the act of ... to the 

items in the product backlog.

Correct

Adding detail, estimates, and order


51. The product owner is responsible for the definition of "done"

* Correct ans. False


60. Which statements are coorect about a sprint backlog items that was not finished until the endo of the sprint? 

Choose 2 answers

* Correct It will be moved to the Product backlog

* Correct  It won't be demonstrated at the sprint review meeting


X It will be demonstrated to the stakeholder but pointed out that its not complet yet


---------------- Scored 70% need 85% to pass


----------------


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 

PSM 1 | Exam Preparation | Part 1

https://deepeshdarshan.wordpress.com/2019/10/29/psm-1-exam-preparation-part-1/

1. Who is allowed to make changes in the Product Backlog ?


Options:


The Key Stakeholders

The Product Owner

The Development Team, but with permission of the Product Owner

Anyone

The Scrum Master

Ans: 2 & 3


The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for the Product Backlog. However, he or she can delegate some work related to product backlog management to the Development Team.


2. Who is responsible for tracking the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal ?


Options:


The Scrum Master

The Product Owner and the Development Team

The Development Team

The Scrum Team

The Product Owner

Ans: 3


At any point in time in a Sprint, the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog can be summed. The Development Team tracks this total work remaining at least for every Daily Scrum to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal. By tracking the remaining work throughout the Sprint, the Development Team can manage its progress.


3. What is Scrum ?


Options:


A sequential design process, used in software development processes, in which progress is seen as flowing steadily downwards.

A framework within which people can address complex adaptive problems, while delivering valuable products.

A software development methodology which is intended to improve software quality.

Ans: 2


4. What are the formal opportunities to inspect and adapt ?


Options:


The Sprint

The Sprint Planning

The Daily Scrum

The Sprint Retrospective

The Sprint Review

Ans: 2, 3, 4 & 5


Other than the Sprint itself, which is a container for all other events, each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something. These events are specifically designed to enable critical transparency and inspection.


5. The Scrum Master does the following regarding the Daily Scrum (select all applicable variants)


Options:


Teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box.

Ensures that the Development Team has the meeting.

Is responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum.

If others are present at the Daily Scrum, ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.

Ans: 1, 2 & 4


The Scrum Master


Ensures that the Development Team has the meeting, but the Development Team is responsible for conducting the Daily Scrum.

Teaches the Development Team to keep the Daily Scrum within the 15-minute time-box.

If others are present at the Daily Scrum, ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.

6. The Daily Scrum always should take exactly 15 minutes. For example, if your team managed doing it in 5 minutes, you should spend 10 more minutes on some useful team activity like Product Backlog refinement, but not more.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


All events in Scrum are time-boxed. It means that every event has a maximum duration. However, the Scrum Guide does not require a minimal duration for any event. As Scrum Teams mature, they can do some events faster (e.g. the Sprint Planning or the Sprint Retrospective).


7. Who has the authority to cancel the Sprint ?


Options:


The Scrum Master

The Product Owner and the Scrum Master

The Product Owner

The Development Team

The Key Stakeholders

Ans: 3


Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel the Sprint, although he or she may do so under influence from the stakeholders, the Development Team, or the Scrum Master.


8. What should be taken into account for the Definition of “Done”? Select the two most appropriate items.


Options:


Advice of the Scrum Master

Conventions, standards and guidelines of the Organization

Experience of the Product Owner

Definition of “Done” of other Scrum Teams working on the same Product

Definition of “Done” of other Scrum Teams working on other products

Ans: 2 & 4


If the definition of “done” for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If “done” for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “done” appropriate for the product. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working on the system or product release, the development teams on all of the Scrum Teams must mutually define the definition of “Done.”


9. Select a time-box for each Scrum event.


Options:


Sprint Planning – 8 hours or less

Sprint Review – 4 hours or less

Daily Scrum – 15 minutes

Sprint Retrospective – 3 hours or less

Sprint Planning – 4 hours or less

Sprint Review – 8 hours or less

Daily Scrum – 15 minutes

Sprint Retrospective – 3 hours or less

Sprint Planning – 4 hours or less

Sprint Review – 3 hours or less

Daily Scrum – 15 minutes

Sprint Retrospective – 8 hours or less

Sprint Planning – 15 minutes

Sprint Review – 3 hours or less

Daily Scrum – 4 hours or less

Sprint Retrospective – 8 hours or less

Ans: 1


Sprint Planning is time-boxed to a maximum of eight hours for a one-month Sprint. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event for the Development Team to synchronize activities and create a plan for the next 24 hours.

Sprint Review is a four-hour time-boxed meeting for one-month Sprints. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.

Sprint Retrospective is a three-hour time-boxed meeting for one-month Sprints. For shorter Sprints, the event is usually shorter.


10. Select the five Scrum Values.


Options:


Effectiveness

Focus

Commitment

Openness

Courage

Self-organization

Respect

Agility

Ans: 2, 3, 4, 5 & 7


The Scrum Guide recognizes the following Scrum Values: commitment, courage, focus, openness and respect.


11. Where can Scrum be used? Check all the applicable items.


Options:


Development of products and enhancements

Development of almost everything we use in our daily lives as individuals and societies.

Research and identifying of viable markets, technologies, and product capabilities

Managing the operation of an organization

Development of software and hardware

Development and sustaining of Cloud and other operational environments

All of the above

Ans: 7


Scrum has been used to develop software, hardware, embedded software, networks of interacting function, autonomous vehicles, schools, government, marketing, managing the operation of organizations and almost everything we use in our daily lives, as individuals and societies.


Scrum has been used extensively, worldwide, to:


Research and identify viable markets, technologies, and product capabilities;

Develop products and enhancements;

Release products and enhancements, as frequently as many times per day;

Develop and sustain Cloud (online, secure, on-demand) and other operational environments for product use; and,

Sustain and renew products.

12. Who is allowed to change the Sprint Backlog during the Sprint ?


Options:


The Scrum Team

The Development Team and the Product Owner

The Development Team

The Scrum Master

The Product Owner

Ans: 3


Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.


13. If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, when must an adjustment be made ?


Options:


The deviations should be discussed at the Daily Scrum and then an adjustment must be made

After clarifying all the details with the Product Owner

As soon as possible to minimize further deviation

After Scrum Master approval

Ans: 3


If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, and that the resulting product will be unacceptable, the process or the material being processed must be adjusted. An adjustment must be made as soon as possible to minimize further deviation.


14. It is normal to have a “hardening” Sprint to remove all technical debt and prepare the Product for upcoming release.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


It is not normal. Development Teams deliver an Increment of product functionality every Sprint. This Increment is usable, so a Product Owner may choose to immediately release it. So, there is nothing to prepare. Each increment contains only “Done” functionality that could be released immediately.


15. What are the Scrum Artifacts? Select all applicable items.


Options:


Increment

The list of removed impediments

Product Backlog

Sprint Backlog

The Sprint Goal

Ans: 1, 3 & 4


16. Who is responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog ?


Options:


The Development Team

The Scrum Team

The Product owner and the Development Team

The Product Owner

The Scrum Master

The Scrum Master and the Development Team

The Product owner and the Scrum Master

Ans: 1


The Development Team is responsible for all estimates in the Product Backlog. The Product Owner may influence the Development Team by helping it understand and select trade-offs, but the people who will perform the work make the final estimate.


17. Who creates the increment ?


Options:


The Scrum Team

The Development Team

The Scrum Master

The Product Owner

The Development Team and The Product Owner

Ans: 2


18. Imagine you are a Scrum Master in a small Organization that tries to adopt Scrum. There are 10 developers and the Product Owner. How can they be divided into teams? Choose all applicable options:


Options:


1 team of 10 people (because there is no reason to divide)

2 teams of 6 and 4 people (because it is good to have a separate QA team)

2 teams of 6 and 4 people (after a short meeting the developers decided this is the best option)

3 teams of 4, 3 and 3 people (each team is cross-functional)

Ans: 3 & 4


Optimal Development Team size is small enough to remain nimble and large enough to complete significant work within a Sprint. Fewer than three Development Team members decrease interaction and results in smaller productivity gains. Having more than nine members requires too much coordination. The Product Owner and Scrum Master roles are not included in this count unless they are also executing the work of the Sprint Backlog.


19. What are the three most applicable characteristics of the Product Owner ?


Options:


Product Value Maximizer

Lead Facilitator of Key Stakeholder Involvement

Product Marketplace Expert

Lead Scrum evangelist in the Organization

Facilitator of Scrum events

Ans: 1, 2 & 3


20. What could be a source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product ?


Options:


The Key Stakeholders

The CEO of the Organization

The Product Backlog

Ans: 3


The Product Backlog is an ordered list of everything that might be needed in the product and is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the product.


21. During the Sprint Planning meeting, the Development Team selects a number of Product Backlog Items, which when “Done”, will meet the Sprint Goal. What best describes the Definition of Done? Select all answers that apply.


Options:


Ensures transparency

It provides a checklist of what needs testing

It specifies that it means for the Increment to be complete and releasable

It is created by the Product Owner to ensure quality standards are fulfilled

It makes it easier for the Scrum Master to track the progress of work

Different teams working on the same Product will have different Definitions of Done

Ans: 1 & 3


Typical exam question where you need to spend two minutes just to read the whole question. The purpose of the Definition of Done is to create transparency so that everybody understands what “Done” means.


22. During the Sprint Planning meeting, the Development Team selects a number of Product Backlog Items from the Product Backlog for the Sprint. How should Product Backlog Items be selected if multiple teams work on the same Product ?


Options:


Items are selected in agreement with the Product Owner.

The Product Owner should create separate Product Backlogs for each team.

The Product Owner selects the Items.

Items are distributed in an equal manner

Ans: 1


In this case, the collaboration with the Product Owner is necessary. Remember that the Items are pulled by the Development Team (and not assigned to the Development Team).


23. Who decides if and when to release the Product Increment ?


Options:


Stakeholders

Scrum Team

Product Owner

Development Team

Scrum Master

Ans: 3


24. When is most appropriate for the Scrum Team to adapt the Definition of Done ?


Options:


Never. The Definition of Done is only adapted by the development organization.

Before the next Sprint starts

Before the first Sprint

During the Sprint Retrospective

Ans: 4


Please pay attention to the words “adapt”. This means that the Definition of Done already exists and only needs to be changed. The Sprint Retrospective is the only event where to Scrum Guide indicates that  Definition of Done could be changed. See the section “Sprint Retrospective”  within the Scrum Guide.


25. Development Teams deliver a “done” Increment of product functionality every Sprint. What does “done” mean ?


Options:


Ready for integration tests.

All the work the development team does until it is satisfied.

A list of criteria defined by the product owner to ensure quality.

Ready for the final user or customer.

The work is completed according to the Definition of Done.

Ans: 4 & 5


26. A company wants to adopt Scrum but with some adaptations which better fit the existing structures. What will most likely happen if they do so ?


Options:


Some benefits of Scrum will be lost.

Not much will eventually change.

Management will be less resistant to change.

Ans: 1, 2 & 3


So the idea is the following: if the Scrum rules are modified, it will be easier for an organization to adopt it (as it does not need to change much). But some of the benefits of Scrum will be lost and probably not much will change, as the old habits will kick in.


Scrum has some rules that must be followed. If it is hard for a company to adopt Scrum, it is because the company does not want to change in the first place.


27. The product is built by multiple Scrum Teams. When should their work be integrated into one Product Increment? Select the most appropriate answer.


Options:


Every Sprint.

Only when the product owner decides to release the product.

Every sprint but only when the sprint goal is not put in danger.

In the hardening sprint.

The scrum teams are self organizing and can decide when to do that.

Ans: 1


When multiple teams work on the same Product, the same rules apply. At the end of the Sprint, the Increment must be “Done,” which means it must integrate the work of all teams and be in a usable condition.


28. The Product Owner is not using User Stories to describe the Product Backlog Items in the Product Backlog. What is an appropriate reaction from the Scrum Master ?


Options:


Rewrite the Items as User Stories.

It is fine. User Stories are not mandatory in Scrum.

Ask the Development Team to work with the Product Owner.

Coach the Product Owner in using User Stories.

Ans: 2


The role of the Scrum Master is to coach the Product Owner, but User Stories are not mandatory.


29. The purpose of the Sprint Planning meeting is to produce a “Done”, usable, and potentially releasable Product Increment.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


A “done”, usable, and potentially releasable product Increment is created during the entire Sprint, not during the Sprint Planning meeting.


30. Scrum dictates that each Scrum Team should have a Scrum Master and a Product Owner.


True. Their involvement and availability for the Scrum Team can have an impact on the results.

False. The Scrum Master serves the organization, not the Scrum Team.

False. The Product Owner can delegate the responsibilities to the Development Team.

True. The Scrum Master and Product Owner must be dedicated to only one Scrum Team.

Ans: 1


The Scrum Guide clearly states that “the Scrum Team consists of a Product Owner, the Development Team, and a Scrum Master.” What the Scrum Guide does not state is their availability or dedication to the team. Which means that a Scrum Master or a Product Owner can be part of multiple Scrum Teams at the same time. It is important to note that the Scrum Master and Product Owner are roles, not persons. A person can have different roles.


31. Scrum recommends using only those Scrum components and rules which suit most for a particular project.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


Each component within the Scrum framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage.


32. The Scrum Team consists of


Options:


The Scrum Master

The Key Stakeholders

The Development Team

The Product Owner

Ans: 1, 3 & 4


33. How does the Scrum Master help to the Product Owner? Select the three most appropriate answers.


Options:


Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed

Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management

Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption

Understanding product planning in an empirical environment

Introducing cutting edge development practices

Ans: 1, 2 & 4


The Scrum Master serves the Product Owner in several ways, including:


Ensuring that goals, scope, and product domain are understood by everyone on the Scrum Team as well as possible;

Finding techniques for effective Product Backlog management;

Helping the Scrum Team understand the need for clear and concise Product Backlog items;

Understanding product planning in an empirical environment;

Ensuring the Product Owner knows how to arrange the Product Backlog to maximize value;

Understanding and practicing agility; and,

Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed.

34. It is a good practice to have from time to time a special technical Sprint that consists only of tasks removing the technical debt without implementing any new functionality.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


It is prohibited. The purpose of each Sprint is to deliver Increments of potentially releasable functionality that adhere to the Scrum Team’s current definition of “Done.


35. How does the Scrum Master serve the Development Team? Select the three most appropriate answers.


Options:


Coaching the Development Team in self-organization and cross-functionality

Helping the Development Team as the team leader

Removing impediments to the Development Team’s progress

Helping the Development Team to create high-value products

Adding or removing developers from the Development Team in accordance with team velocity changes

Ans: 1, 3 & 4


The Scrum Master serves the Development Team in several ways, including:


Coaching the Development Team in self-organization and cross-functionality;

Helping the Development Team to create high-value products;

Removing impediments to the Development Team’s progress;

Facilitating Scrum events as requested or needed; and,

Coaching the Development Team in organizational environments in which Scrum is not yet fully adopted and understood.

36. What does Burn-down Chart show ?


Options:


How much work remains till the end of the Sprint

The evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project

Dependencies, start times and stop times for project tasks

Hierarchy of tasks that comprise a project

Ans: 1


37. How frequently should scrum users inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal ?


Options:


As frequently as possible

Frequently, but it should not get in the way of the work

After the Daily Scrum

At the Sprint Review

Ans: 2


Scrum users must frequently inspect Scrum artifacts and progress toward a Sprint Goal to detect undesirable variances. Their inspection should not be so frequent that inspection gets in the way of the work. Inspections are most beneficial when diligently performed by skilled inspectors at the point of work.


38. Definition of Done can be reviewed and adapted during each Sprint Retrospective. True or False ?


Options:


True

False

Ans: 1


During each Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by improving work processes or adapting the definition of “Done”, if appropriate and not in conflict with product or organizational standards.


39. Could the Sprint Planning be finished if only work planned for the first days of the Sprint is decomposed to units of one day or less ?


Options:


Yes, if the remaining work is also estimated, maybe in bigger units

No, all items in the Sprint Backlog should be decomposed to units of one day or less by the end of the Sprint Planning

Ans: 1


40. What is the Increment ?


Options:


The sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during the Sprint.

The sum of all the Product Backlog items completed during the Sprint and the value of the increments of all previous Sprints.

All “Done” items in the Sprint Backlog.

All items in the Sprint Backlog that could be released regardless of whether the Product Owner decides to actually do it.

Ans: 2


41. The Scrum Master is focused primarily on the Scrum Team and usually does not care about those outside the Scrum Team.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


The Scrum Master is a servant-leader for the Scrum Team. The Scrum Master helps those outside the Scrum Team understand which of their interactions with the Scrum Team are helpful and which aren’t. The Scrum Master helps everyone change these interactions to maximize the value created by the Scrum Team.


42. What are the two essential features a Scrum Team should possess ?


Options:


It should have all competencies needed to accomplish the work without depending on others not part of the team.

It should choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team.

It should use tools, processes and techniques approved by the Organization.

It should be flexible enough to complete all the work planned for the Sprint even if some team members are on vacation.

Ans: 1 & 2


Scrum Teams are self-organizing and cross-functional. Self-organizing teams choose how best to accomplish their work, rather than being directed by others outside the team. Cross-functional teams have all competencies needed to accomplish the work without depending on others not part of the team.


43. What are Product Backlog features ?


Options:


It is never complete

It is dynamic

As long as a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists

When the final version of a product is rolled out, its Product Backlog is dismissed

A Product Backlog could be closed when it contains no items to include into the next Sprint

Ans: 1, 2 & 3


A Product Backlog is never complete. The earliest development of it only lays out the initially known and best-understood requirements. The Product Backlog evolves as the product and the environment in which it will be used evolves. The Product Backlog is dynamic; it constantly changes to identify what the product needs to be appropriate, competitive, and useful. As long as a product exists, its Product Backlog also exists.


44. Who participates in the Sprint Planning ?


Options:


The Development Team

The Product Owner

The Scrum Master

The Key Stakeholders

The Team Manager

Ans: 1, 2 & 3


The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.


45. What are the three questions the Scrum Guide gives as an example that can be used at the Daily Scrum ?


Options:


Did I explain all the discovered issues I found yesterday to the Product Owner ?

What did I do yesterday that helped the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal ?

What will I do today to help the Development Team meet the Sprint Goal ?

Do I see any impediment that prevents me or the Development Team from meeting the Sprint Goal ?

Do I have complete understanding of the Sprint Backlog item I am working on ?

Ans: 2, 3 & 4


46. Scrum does not allow additional meetings that are not defined in Scrum.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


Scrum allows additional meetings if they facilitate achieving the Sprint Goal.


47. What are the three main qualities the team model in Scrum is designed to optimize ?


Options:


Responsibility

Productivity

Competence

Creativity

Flexibility

Agility

Ans: 2, 4 & 5


48. The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to:


Options:


Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools

Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work

Get technical or domain advice from specialists invited by The Development Team or The Scrum Master

Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements

Get feedback from the Key Stakeholders invited by the Product Owner

Ans: 1, 2 & 4


49. Is it allowed to skip the Daily Scrum if there is nothing interesting to talk about ?


Options:


Yes

No

Ans: 2


Each event in Scrum is a formal opportunity to inspect and adapt something. These events are specifically designed to enable critical transparency and inspection. Failure to include any of these events results in reduced transparency and is a lost opportunity to inspect and adapt.


50. How does Definition of “Done” help the Scrum Team ? Select three most applicable items.


Options:


It is used to assess when work is complete on the product Increment

It guides the Development Team in knowing how many Product Backlog items it can select during a Sprint Planning

It ensures artifact transparency

It helps to calculate velocity of the Scrum Team

It helps in inspection and adaptation

Ans: 1, 2 & 3


51. How does the Scrum Master serve the Organization ? Select the three most appropriate answers.


Options:


Making sure the key stakeholders are invited on all Scrum Reviews within organization

Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption

Planning Scrum implementations within the organization

Working with other Scrum Masters to increase the effectiveness of the application of Scrum in the organization

Mixing experienced developers and junior specialists across different Development Teams in the organization to speed up Scrum adoption

Ans: 2, 3 & 4


The Scrum Master serves the organization in several ways, including:


Leading and coaching the organization in its Scrum adoption;

Planning Scrum implementations within the organization;

Helping employees and stakeholders understand and enact Scrum and empirical product development;

Causing change that increases the productivity of the Scrum Team; and,

Working with other Scrum Masters to increase the effectiveness of the application of Scrum in the organization.

52. What are the questions the Sprint Planning answers ? Select two.


Options:


What new technologies could be used to speed up the Development Team velocity?

Who will be responsible for each item in the Sprint Backlog?

What can be delivered in the Increment resulting from the upcoming Sprint?

How will the work needed to deliver the Increment be achieved?

What is the size of the Technical Debt and how it could be removed?

Ans: 3 & 4


53. All the Scrum Teams working on the same product should have the same Sprint length.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


Scrum does not require having aligned Sprints for multiple teams.


54. Who is responsible for monitoring progress toward high-level goals ?


Options:


The Development Team

The Product Owner

The Product Owner and The Development Team

The Scrum Master and The Development Team

The Scrum Master

The Scrum Team

Ans: 2


The Product Owner tracks total work remaining at least every Sprint Review. The Product Owner compares this amount with work remaining at previous Sprint Reviews to assess progress toward completing projected work by the desired time for the goal. This information is made transparent to all stakeholders.


55. Could the Product Owner and the Scrum Master be a part of the Development Team ?


Options:


Yes

No

Ans: 1


Yes, if they are also executing the work of the Sprint Backlog.


56. Imagine the following situation. At the Sprint Retrospective meeting the Scrum Team identified some improvements that can be done. What should the Scrum Team do ? Select the best option.


Options:


Make sure the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint includes all the improvements.

Make sure the Sprint Backlog for the next Sprint includes at least one high priority process improvement.

Assign responsible team members for every improvement. Check the progress at the next Retrospective.

Assign a responsible team member for at least one improvement. Check the progress at the next Retrospective.

Ans: 2


The Sprint Backlog makes visible all the work that the Development Team identifies as necessary to meet the Sprint Goal. To ensure continuous improvement, it includes at least one high priority process improvement identified in the previous Retrospective meeting.


57. What provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment ?


Options:


The Product Owner

The Sprint Goal

The Sprint Backlog

The Scrum Master

Ans: 2


The Sprint Goal is an objective set for the Sprint that can be met through the implementation of Product Backlog. It provides guidance to the Development Team on why it is building the Increment.


58. The Daily Scrum time-box depends on the size of the Development team.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


The Daily Scrum is a 15-minute time-boxed event for the Development Team of any size.


59. What are the characteristics of a Development Team ? Select three most appropriate choices.


Options:


Accountability belongs to the Development Team as a whole

Scrum recognizes no sub-teams in the Development Team

Having the Scrum Master as a part-time Developer in the Development Team

Scrum recognizes no titles for Development Team members

Having at least one test engineer in the Development Team

Ans: 1, 2 & 4


Development Teams have the following characteristics:


They are self-organizing. No one (not even the Scrum Master) tells the Development Team how to turn Product Backlog into Increments of potentially releasable functionality;

Development Teams are cross-functional, with all of the skills as a team necessary to create a product Increment;

Scrum recognizes no titles for Development Team members, regardless of the work being performed by the person;

Scrum recognizes no sub-teams in the Development Team, regardless of domains that need to be addressed like testing, architecture, operations, or business analysis; and,

Individual Development Team members may have specialized skills and areas of focus, but accountability belongs to the Development Team as a whole.

60. Definition of “Done” is created during the first Sprint and remains unchanged until the Product release.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


During each Sprint Retrospective, the Scrum Team plans ways to increase product quality by adapting the definition of “Done” as appropriate.


61. Other people than the Scrum Team can attend the Sprint Planning in order to provide technical or domain advice.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 1


62. What does the word “development” mean in the context of Scrum? Select the best option.


Options:


Product development, its releasing and sustaining

Software and hardware development

Development of an operational environment for the Product

Research and identifying of viable markets, technologies, and Product capabilities

Complex work that can include all the suggested options and even more

Ans: 5


When the words “develop” and “development” are used in the Scrum Guide, they refer to complex work including software and hardware development, development and releasing of products and enhancements, development and sustaining product operational environments, research and identifying of viable markets and technologies, and even more.


63. What is the Sprint Backlog ?


Options:


The Product Backlog items selected for this Sprint plus the plan for delivering them

The Product Backlog items selected for this Sprint

The Product Backlog items selected for this Sprint plus the Team Backlog items

The plan for delivering Product Backlog items

Ans: 1


The Sprint Backlog is the set of Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product Increment and realizing the Sprint Goal.


64. What happens when a Sprint is cancelled ? Select three.


Options:


Any completed and “Done” Product Backlog items are reviewed

If part of the work is potentially releasable, the Product Owner typically accepts it

All incomplete Product Backlog Items are re-estimated and put back on the Product Backlog

Several top Product Backlog Items are taken into the Sprint Backlog to replace the obsolete items

At the Sprint Retrospective the Scrum Master determines who from the Development Team is responsible for cancelling the Sprint

Ans: 1, 2 & 3


65. What is the order of items in the Product Backlog ?


Options:


Alphabetical

The less clear items at the top

Less valuable and most unclear items at the bottom

The recently added items at the top

Ans: 3


The Product Owner is responsible for placing the most valuable and clear items at the top of the Product Backlog.


66. Who is responsible for creation of the Definition of “Done” ?


Options:


The Product Owner

The Development Team

The Scrum Team

The Scrum Master

Ans: 2


If the definition of “done” for an increment is part of the conventions, standards or guidelines of the development organization, all Scrum Teams must follow it as a minimum. If “done” for an increment is not a convention of the development organization, the Development Team of the Scrum Team must define a definition of “done” appropriate for the product. If there are multiple Scrum Teams working on the system or product release, the development teams on all of the Scrum Teams must mutually define the definition of “Done.”


67. Who is responsible for crafting the Sprint Goal at the Sprint Planning ?


Options:


The Product Owner

The Scrum Team

The Scrum Master

The Development Team

The Key Stakeholders

Ans: 2


After the Development Team forecasts the Product Backlog items it will deliver in the Sprint, the Scrum Team crafts a Sprint Goal.


68. Who is allowed to participate in the Daily Scrum ?


Options:


The Product Owner

The Scrum Master

The Development Team

The Key Stakeholders

Ans: 3


The Daily Scrum is an internal meeting for the Development Team. If others are present, the Scrum Master ensures that they do not disrupt the meeting.


69. What is the result of the Sprint Review ?


Options:


Common understanding of progress toward the Sprint Goal and how progress is trending toward completing the work in the Sprint Backlog

Common understanding of what can be delivered in the Increment and how will the work needed to deliver the Increment be achieved

A list of improvements that the Scrum Team will implement in the next Sprint

A revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint

Ans: 4


The result of the Sprint Review is a revised Product Backlog that defines the probable Product Backlog items for the next Sprint. The Product Backlog may also be adjusted overall to meet new opportunities.


70. What part of the capacity of the Development Team does Product Backlog refinement usually consume ?


Options:


The Development Team is not authorized for Product Backlog refinement

Not more than 10%

Not more than 20%

Not more than 5%

Ans: 2


71. Who is responsible for coping with incomplete artifact transparency ?


Options:


The Development Team

The Product Owner

The Scrum Master

The Scrum Team

Ans: 3


The Scrum Master’s job is to work with the Scrum Team and the organization to increase the transparency of the artifacts. This work usually involves learning, convincing, and change.


72. All Development Teams working on the same Product should use the same Product Backlog.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 1


73. What comprises Scrum (select four) ?


Options:


Roles

Artifacts

Burn-down charts

Reports

Events

Rules

Ans: 1, 2, 5 & 6


The Scrum framework consists of Scrum Teams and their associated roles, events, artifacts, and rules. Each component within the framework serves a specific purpose and is essential to Scrum’s success and usage. The rules of Scrum bind together the events, roles, and artifacts, governing the relationships and interaction between them.


74. What is the input to the Sprint Planning (Select four) ?


Options:


The Product Backlog

The latest product Increment

Projected capacity of the Development Team during the Sprint

Past performance of the Development Team

Feedback from the Organization CEO

Feedback from the Key Stakeholders

Ans: 1, 2, 3 & 4


75. Select the two meetings in which people outside the Scrum Team are allowed to participate.


Options:


The Daily Scrum

The Sprint Planning

The Sprint Review

The Sprint Retrospective

Ans: 2 & 3


76. In which meetings the Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate ?


Options:


The Sprint Planning

The Sprint Retrospective

The Sprint Review

The Daily Scrum

Ans: 3


The Key Stakeholders are allowed to participate only in the Sprint Review meeting. However, any member of the Scrum Team can interact with them any time,


77. What is the Sprint Retrospective ?


Options:


It is a meeting where the Development Team synchronizes activities and creates a plan for the next 24 hours

It is an opportunity for the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted during the next Sprint

It is the key inspect and adapt meeting

It is a meeting to inspect the Increment and adapt the Product Backlog if needed

Ans: 2


78. What does Product Backlog management include? Select three most applicable items.


Options:


Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs

Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions

Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next

Moving Product Backlog items into the Sprint Backlog

Presenting Product Backlog items to the Key Stakeholders

Ans: 1, 2 & 3


Product Backlog management includes:


Clearly expressing Product Backlog items;

Ordering the items in the Product Backlog to best achieve goals and missions;

Optimizing the value of the work the Development Team performs;

Ensuring that the Product Backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the Scrum Team will work on next; and,

Ensuring the Development Team understands items in the Product Backlog to the level needed.

79. Which of the following is the result of the Sprint Planning meeting ? select two answers.


Options:


Sprint Goal

Product Vision

Definition of Done

Product Increment

Sprint Backlog

Ans: 1 & 5


80. What is the purpose of the Sprint Review meeting ? Select the most appropriate answer.


Options:


To make a demonstration of the Product where the entire organization can attend and give feedback.

To allow the Scrum Team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements.

To inspect the Sprint outcome and figure out what to do next.

To evaluate the performance of the Scum Team and to take corrective measures if necessary.

Ans: 3


------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 

PSM 1 | Exam Preparation | Part 2

https://deepeshdarshan.wordpress.com/2019/10/29/psm-1-exam-preparation-part-2/

1. What belongs solely to the Development Team ?

Options:


The Definition of Done

The Sprint Backlog

The Product Backlog

The Increment

Ans: 2


Only the Development Team can change its Sprint Backlog during a Sprint. The Sprint Backlog is a highly visible, real-time picture of the work that the Development Team plans to accomplish during the Sprint, and it belongs solely to the Development Team.


2. The Sprint Backlog is created at the Sprint Planning. It is prohibited to add new work into the Sprint Backlog later by the Development Team.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


The Development Team modifies the Sprint Backlog throughout the Sprint, and the Sprint Backlog emerges during the Sprint. This emergence occurs as the Development Team works through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the Sprint Goal. As new work is required, the Development Team adds it to the Sprint Backlog.



REPORT THIS AD


3. What happens during the Sprint ? Select three answers.


Options:


No changes are made that would endanger the Sprint Goal

Scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team as more is learned

Quality goals do not decrease

Sprint scope is defined at the Sprint Planning and cannot be changed

The Sprint Goal is changed frequently to reflect the status of the remaining work

Ans: 1, 2 & 3


4. If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, when must an adjustment be made ?


Options:


As soon as possible to minimize further deviation.

The deviations should be discussed at the Daily Scrum and then an adjustment must be made.

After clarifying all the details with the Product Owner.

After Scrum Master approval.

Ans: 1


If an inspector determines that one or more aspects of a process deviate outside acceptable limits, and that the resulting product will be unacceptable, the process or the material being processed must be adjusted. An adjustment must be made as soon as possible to minimize further deviation.



REPORT THIS AD


REPORT THIS AD


5. The structure of the Daily Scrum is well-defined and constant. Every team member should answer the three main questions:


What did I do yesterday?

What will I do today?

Do I see any impediment?

Options:


False

True

Ans: 1


There is no any prescribed structure. The structure of the Daily Scrum is set by the Development Team and can be conducted in different ways if it focuses on progress toward the Sprint Goal. Some Development Teams will use questions, some will be more discussion based. It is still perfectly fine to use the questions, but other ways of conducting the meeting are also possible.


6. Scrum is not a process or technique.


Options:


False

True


REPORT THIS AD


Ans: 2


Scrum is not a process, technique, or definitive method. Rather, it is a framework within which you can employ various processes and techniques.


7. Scrum is founded on


Options:


Empirical criticism

Empiricism

Common sense

Kanban system

Ans: 2


Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known


8. Who is responsible for tracking the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal ?


Options:


The Product Owner

The Development Team

The Scrum Master

The Scrum Team

The Product Owner and the Development Team


REPORT THIS AD


Ans: 2


At any point in time in a Sprint, the total work remaining in the Sprint Backlog can be summed. The Development Team tracks this total work remaining at least for every Daily Scrum to project the likelihood of achieving the Sprint Goal. By tracking the remaining work throughout the Sprint, the Development Team can manage its progress.


9. Is it a good practice to have at least two Product Owners on big projects ?


Options:


False

True

Ans: 1


The Product Owner is one person, not a committee, but the Product Owner may represent the desires of a committee in the Product Backlog.


10. Only the Product Owner and the Development Team participate in the Sprint Planning. There is nothing to do for the Scrum Master.


Options:


False

True

Ans: 1


The work to be performed in the Sprint is planned at the Sprint Planning. This plan is created by the collaborative work of the entire Scrum Team.


11. Who is responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum? Select the best choice.


Options:


The Product Owner

The Scrum Master

The Scrum Master and the Product Owner

The Scrum Team

The Development Team

Ans: 2


The Scrum Master is responsible for promoting and supporting Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide. Scrum Masters do this by helping everyone understand Scrum theory, practices, rules, and values.


12. What does Cone of Uncertainty show ?


Options:


Hierarchy of tasks that comprise a project

Dependencies, start times and stop times for project tasks

How much is known about the Product over time

How much work remains till the end of the Sprint


REPORT THIS AD


Ans: 3


The Cone of Uncertainty describes the evolution of the amount of uncertainty during a project.


13. What are the three pillars that uphold Scrum ?


Options:


Inspection

Self-organization

Transparency

Adaptation

Agility

Cross-functionality

Ans: 1, 3 & 4


Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory, or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. Three pillars uphold every implementation of empirical process control: transparency, inspection, and adaptation.


14. What is the essence of Scrum ? Select the most appropriate option.



REPORT THIS AD


Options:


A small team of people that is highly flexible and adaptive

The Scrum Master and the Product Owner

The Scrum Guide

The Development Team

Ans: 1


The essence of Scrum is a small team of people. The individual team is highly flexible and adaptive. These strengths continue operating in single, several, many, and networks of teams that develop, release, operate and sustain the work and work products of thousands of people. They collaborate and interoperate through sophisticated development architectures and target release environments.


15. If an item in the Sprint Backlog cannot be finished by the end of the Sprint (it turned out there is a lot more work to do than was estimated), the Sprint is cancelled.


Options:


False

True

Ans: 1


The Sprint is cancelled only in the case if the Sprint Goal became obsolete. If some work could not be done, the Sprint Backlog should be re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team.


16. The Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


Options:


False

True

Ans: 2


By the end of the Sprint Planning, the Development Team should be able to explain to the Product Owner and Scrum Master how it intends to work as a self-organizing team to accomplish the Sprint Goal and create the anticipated Increment.


17. Who’s responsible for Gantt Charts in Scrum ?


Options:


No one

The Scrum Master

The Development Team

The project manager

Ans: 1


Gantt Chart is not a Scrum artifact and not compatible with the framework.



REPORT THIS AD


18. Which statements are correct about Product Backlog refinement ? (Choose 2 answers)


Options:


It should be done right before the Sprint Planning

The Scrum Master should facilitate it

It shouldn’t take more than 10% of the Development Team’s time

Multiple teams may participate

Ans: 3 & 4


If multiple teams are working on the project, they will participate in the refinement as well. Refinement can take any amount of time from the Product Owner but not more than 10% of the capacity of the Development Team.Refinement is a continuous activity not limited to a certain time during the Sprint. The Scrum Master only facilitates the meetings as requested or required; not by default.


19. The Product Owner has doubts about the quality of the definition of “Done”. What should she / he do ?


Options:


Adjust the definition of “Done” immediately

Adjust the definition of “Done” at the end of the Sprint

Ask the company QA department to investigate the issue

Point it out in the next Sprint Retrospective

Ans: 4


The Development Team is responsible for the definition of “Done” rather than the Product Owner. So, if the Product Owner doubts the quality of the definition of “Done”, he/she can discuss it with the team on the next Sprint Retrospective, so that if they agree, it would be adjusted for the next Sprint.


20. Which Scrum artifacts are ordered ?


Options:


Only the Product Backlog

None

Both the Product Backlog and Sprint Backlog

Only the Sprint Backlog

Ans: 3


The Product Backlog is ordered (prioritized) based on the business value.The items in the Sprint Backlog follow the same order they had in the Product Backlog, therefore, are prioritized.


21. Which of the following describe the definition of “Done” ? (choose 2 answers)



REPORT THIS AD


Options:


Helps increase velocity

Increases transparency

Ensures everything is documented

Helps ensure the Increment is releasable

Ans: 2 & 4


Definition of “Done” increases transparency because everyone knows what it means by “Done”. It includes everything required for creating something usable by the end users (potentially releasable).


22. Pick 4 activities that are the responsibility of the Development Team.


Options:


Using Story Point estimations

Provide estimates

Break down epic user stories into smaller ones

Design software

Make technical decisions

Volunteer for tasks

Ans: 1, 2, 3 & 6


Designing the software is part of the development and should be done by the developers. They are self-organized and make technical decisions and volunteer for tasks (assign them to themselves). Estimation is the responsibility of the developers because they are the people who will develop the item.



23. Which of the following is a valid service from the Scrum Master to the Product Owner?


Options:


Helping the Product Owner find techniques for managing the Product Backlog

Act as a proxy when the Product Owner is not available to the team

Helping the Product Owner order the Product Backlog items in order to maximize value

Act as the middleman between the Product Owner and the Development Team, as requested or required

Ans: 1


24. When does inspection occur ?


Options:


When the Product Owner finds necessary

Frequently, but not so often that gets in the way of work

All the time

At the Sprint Review

Ans: 2


25. When is it time for integrating the solution ?


Options:


Before releasing the Increment

At the end of the Sprint

During the Sprint

At the end of the project

Ans: 3


Integration is part of the development of each item and a step in a normal definition of “Done”. Agile projects use continuous integration to make the output potentially releasable.


26. Which role is responsible for managing the Development Team ?


Options:


Team leader

Development Team

Product Owner

Scrum Master

Scrum Team


REPORT THIS AD


Ans: 2


The Development Team is self-organized and manages itself instead of receiving orders.


27. The Sprint Backlog makes visible all of the work the …. identifies as necessary to meet the Sprint Goal. (Fill in the blank)


Options:


Development Team

Scrum Team

Product Owner

Scrum Master

Ans: 1


This is up to the developers to identify how to accomplish the goal. After all, they are the technical people in the project.The question is about the Sprint Backlog tasks, rather than items.


28. Who monitors the remaining work of the Product Backlog ?


Options:


The Development Team

​The Scrum Master

​The Product Owner

​The Scrum Team


REPORT THIS AD


Ans: 3


The Product Owner is responsible for measuring the progress of the project and tracking the remaining work in the Product Backlog.The Development Team is responsible for measuring the progress of the Sprint and tracking the remaining work in the Sprint Backlog.


29. Who can change the Sprint Backlog in the middle of the Sprint ?

Options:


Only the Scrum Master​

Only the Development Team

​Only the Product Owner

​The Scrum Team

Ans: 2


The Product Backlog items selected for the Sprint do not change but the Sprint Backlog also contains tasks and tasks evolve through the Sprint. The Development Team owns the Sprint Backlog and only they can change the Sprint Backlog. This is sometimes done based on the input from the Product Owner.


30. What type of process control is Scrum ?



REPORT THIS AD


Options:


Traditional

​Adaptive

​Empirical

​Modern

Ans: 3


Scrum is empirical; based on the real-world experiences.


31. Who assigns tasks to the developers ?


Options:


The Product Owner​

The Scrum Master​

The project manager​

Developers themselves

Ans: 4


The developers take responsibility for doing the tasks themselves and the Development Team ensures that all tasks are done properly. Remember that they are self-organized. When items are “Done”, the Product Owner checked them but this is focused on the item rather than individuals; all developers are accountable for the team’s outputs.


32. How should developers deal with non-functional features ?


Options:


Incorporate them into every Increment​

Incorporate them before the release​

Incorporate them in the hardening Sprint​

Incorporate them in the integration Sprint

Ans: 1


Non-functional features are usually part of the Definition of Done and should be considered for every Product Backlog item and every Increment. Sometime, some non-functional features that address a very particular part of the software can be added as separate items in the Product Backlog.All Sprints are the same. There’s no Sprint zero, hardening Sprint, release Sprint, integration Sprint, etc


33. Which of the following is a prerequisite for starting the Sprint Planning meeting ?


Options:


Having the Product Backlog items cleared and assigned to developers​

Having the items at the top of the Product Backlog small enough to fit in one Sprint​

Having the requirements specified and completely reflected in the Product Backlog​

None


REPORT THIS AD


Ans: 4


We prefer to have “ready” items at the top of the Product Backlog before Sprint Planning, which is done through Product Backlog refinement. However, nothing stops our flow of Sprints. For example, we do not delay the Sprint because the items are not ready. In such cases, the “unready” items would be selected for the Sprint and refined during the Sprint.”Ready” items are those that are clear and small enough to fit into one Sprint.


34. Which of the following refers to the average amount of work done per Sprint ?


Options:


Capacity​

Velocity​

Burn-down rate​

Performance

Ans: 2


Velocity is the amount of work (usually in “story points”) done per Sprint. For example, 200 story points per Sprint.


35. A company has three products. Which two of the following are acceptable way of forming Scrum teams ?



REPORT THIS AD


Options:


There can be one Product Owner for each product​

There should be one Product Owner for each product​

There can be a single Product Owner for all products​

There should be a single Product Owner for all products

Ans: 1 & 3


When there’s one product, there should be only one Product Owner, even if the product is large and there are many Development Teams. However, when there are multiple products, there are two options:a) considering them separate and have a Product Owner for each of them) have only one Product Owner for all of them and develop them like a larger project to ensure compatibility.


36. When forming multiple Scrum teams, which two of the following are the most important considerations ?


Options:


Having proper size in each team​

Having an effective mixture of skill in each team to avoid dependencies​

Having a mixture of senior and junior developers in each team​

Having enough skills for the technical layer designated to the each team


REPORT THIS AD


Ans: 1 & 2


All teams should be cross-functional with 3 to 9 members.


37. If it’s not possible to complete the Sprint Backlog, who would try to resolve it ?


Options:


The Development Team​

The Scrum Master​

The Development Team and the Product Owner

The Product Owner​

The Scrum Team

Ans: 3


First of all, it’s OK of the Sprint Backlog is not complete until the end of the Sprint. However, we would try to complete it if it’s possible. When the developers find out they are behind schedule they will ask the Product Owner for help and the two roles together will adjust the work (tasks), or reorder the times to make sure the highest value will be created at the end of the Sprint.


38. Teams A and B work on two different projects. Team A has 8 members, and a velocity of 600. Team B has 6 members, and a velocity of 500. Which team has a higher performance ?


Options:


Team B​

Team A​

It depends

Ans: 3


The provided information is not enough. Velocity is defined locally and it’s not possible to compare one team’s velocity with the other.


39. Which of the following does NOT apply to/suit Scrum ?


Options:


Static requirements​

Based on empirical process control​

Difficult to master​

Process framework used to address complex product

Ans: 1


Agile is all about depending on adaptation, instead of predictive (static, upfront) plan and design.


40. The Product Owner is using burn-up charts instead of burn-down charts. What would be your response as the Scrum Master ?


Options:


There’s nothing wrong with it.​

Burn-up charts are used in traditional methods, and should be replaced by burn-down charts.

Ans: 1


Burn-down charts are very common for tracking and representing progress, but they are not mandatory and the Product Owner can use other tools/techniques as well.


41. Which element helps when working inside timeboxes ?


Options:


Limiting work-in-progress​

Using Sprint Review​

Using Product Backlogs​

Using Sprint Retrospective

Ans: 1


When working inside timeboxes, it’s better to limit work-in-progress and get items done before going to the next ones; otherwise chances would be high that the team ends up with many in-progress items and not enough “Done” items at the end of the Sprint.Limiting workin-progress is a lean concept that avoids waste.


42. Which statement is least accurate about the definition of “Done” ?


Options:


It may evolve during the project​

It’s created by the Product Owner​

It may vary depending on the project​

It may be defined by the development organization

Ans: 2


The definition of “Done” can be prepared in the development organization and used in all projects as a minimum. If additional content is required for the definition or it’s not prepared in the organization level, the Development Team would be responsible for preparing it.The definition of “Done” can evolve during the project as more is learned. It’s also dependent on the project and its environment.


43. The Product Backlog is reordered by the stakeholders at the Sprint Review meeting.


Options:


True

​False

Ans: 2


Only the Product Owner can order the Product Backlog. This can be influenced by other stakeholders but the Product Owner always has the final say.


44. When multiple teams are working on the same product, who should make sure that their outputs can be integrated into one Increment ?


Options:


The developers​

The developers and the Product Owner​

The Product Owner​

The Scrum Master

Ans: 1


It’s up to the developers to find their way and ensure that their outputs will create an integrated Increment that is potentially releasable.


45. Which of the following is a way of decreasing technical debt ?


Options:


Hiring an external auditor​

Improving the definition of “Done”​

Having hardening Sprints

Ans: 2


There’s usually room for improving the definition of “Done”. A good definition will let less technical debt pass on to the next Sprints.Technical debt is minor shortcomings in the code that makes it less than “good enough” and therefore creates risks in the future. It usually decreases velocity in the future (because the team has to fix the shortcomings) and as some of the debt might remain in the final product, the maintenance cost will increase as well.Another Agile way of reducing technical debt is continuous refactoring.


46. Which of the following is the shortest timebox in a two-week Sprint ?


Options:


Sprint Retrospective​

Sprint Planning​

Sprint Review

Ans: 1


These are the durations in a two-week Sprint:- Sprint Planning: 4 hours- Sprint Review: 2 hours- Sprint Retrospective: 1.5 hours.


47. What’s the optimal length of a Sprint ?


Options:


Short enough to minimize risk​

One week​

Two weeks​

One month

Ans: 1


We prefer shorter Sprints as long as we can produce enough output. Shorter Sprints reduce the risk to the business.


48. The Product Owner is responsible for preparing the Sprint Goal before the Sprint Planning.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


The Sprint Goal is prepared during the Sprint Planning by the whole Scrum Team.


49. The Scrum Master is a participant in Sprint Retrospective.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 1


All team members participate and try to find ways for improvement.


50. All interactions between the stakeholders and the Development Team should be through the Product Owner.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


The interactions can be through the Product Owner or during the Sprint Review. Other interactions are discouraged as they distract the developers.


51. Which of the following is not allowed in Scrum ?


Options:


Refactoring

Hardening Sprints​

Velocity tracking​

Release planning

Ans: 2


Hardening Sprints are not allowed because the subject of hardening should be continuously address throughout normal Sprints. All Sprints are the same in Scrum. Other options are not described in the framework but are good practices recommended for Scrum projects.


52. All work that the developers should do originate from the Product Backlog


Options:


True

False

Ans: 1


Everything they do is identified by decomposing the Product Backlog items.


53. It is OK for the items at the bottom of the Product Backlog not to be as clear as those at the top.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 1


Items at the bottom of the Product Backlog won’t be developed soon, so, there’s no need to spend too much time making them clear and add details; that would be some kind of upfront planning. Not that the items do not go to the bottom of the backlog because they are not clear or do not have enough detail; the only basis for order of items is the business value. When the item does not have enough detail and starts to go to the top of the Product Backlog, it should be refined by adding more detail.


54. Scrum should be tailored for the project.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


Unlike methodologies, the Scrum “framework” is not tailored because it’s already limited to the essentials. Even the terms should not change let along adding or removing elements such as roles and events. However, you need to add many practices and techniques to the framework.


55. Our velocity was 250 at the end of the 6th Sprint. It has become 275 at the end of the 11th Sprint. Therefore, we’re creating more value now, compared to the past.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


Velocity and value are not related directly. Value is the benefit to cost ratio. Since we start with the most important items first, those remained for the 11th Sprint are expected to have less value compared to those delivered at the 6th Sprint.


56. Which of the following roles can set the definition of “Done” ?


Options:


The Scrum Team​

The Scrum Master​

The Development Team

The Product Owner

Ans: 3


The development organization may have a definition of “Done” composed for all projects in which case the team will use it as a minimum. Otherwise, the Development Team would be responsible for composing the definition of “Done”. When multiple teams are working on the same product, there can be more than one definition of “Done”, as long as they all have the minimums required by the development organization and can create an integrated Increment.


57. When should the Product Backlog items be refined ? (choose 2 answers)


Options:


Before the Sprint in which the item is supposed to be developed​

The business analysts do it before it is time to develop the item

​During the Sprint, if they have not been refined in the previous Sprints

Ans: 1 & 3


Product Backlog refinement is a continuous activity. When an item is at the top of the backlog, which means it will be developed in the near future, more refinements are usually needed to make sure it is clear and contains just enough details (not all possible details). It’s preferred to have the items that will be selected in the Sprint Backlog completely refined before Sprint Planning; however, it’s OK to have more refinement done during the development. Remember that there’s no such thing as Sprint 0 and there’s no time between two Sprints that can be spent on something such as refinement. The team is also cross-functional and does the a-z of the work needed for each item, including refinement; they don’t use people from other parts of the company.


58. Which of the following is designed to synchronize multiple teams working on the same product ?


Options:


Daily Scrum​

Sprint Planning​

Weekly status report​

Scrum-of-scrums

Ans: 4


Daily Scrum is for synchronizing inside a team and Scrum-of-Scrums is for synchronizing multiple teams working on the same product. When the Daily Scrum is over, one representative from each team goes to a higher level daily stand-up to discuss the issues among teams. Note: scrum.org has recently introduced its scaled Scrum framework called Nexus. It doesn’t have a scrum-of-scrum as described here, while there might still be some questions about it in the exam.


59. Only the Product Owner has the authority to cancel a Sprint. However, the Development Team is trying to convince the Product Owner that the Sprint should be cancelled. What’s the right response from the Scrum Master ?


Options:


It is OK​

The Scrum Master should stop this, because the Development Team does not have the authority to influence Sprint cancellation​

The Scrum Master should encourage the Product Owner to discuss it with the customer first​

The Scrum Master should be involved in making this decision

Ans: 1


Only the Product Owner can cancel a Sprint and the final decision belongs to him/her. However, this decision can be influenced by the customer, developers and Scrum Master.


60. Which statement is correct when the developers are working in the middle of the Sprint ?


Options:


The Sprint Backlog would be frozen​

No user acceptance tests will be conducted until the end of the Sprint​

The scope may be clarified as more is learned

Ans: 3


During the Sprint, the Product Backlog items in the Sprint Backlog would not be added or removed but as more is learned, the scope may be clarified and re-negotiated between the Product Owner and Development Team. This is mainly focused on the interpretation of the Product Backlog items and the tasks created by decomposing them.


61. The Sprint Review is the only time when stakeholder feedback is captured.

Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


The Sprint Review is probably the most important opportunity for capturing feedback but adaptation is not limited to that. The Product Owner is constantly in contact with the stakeholders to identify new Product Backlog items or to refine them.


62. Which of the following is the most important opportunity for capturing lessons learned ?


Options:


Sprint Retrospective​

Sprint Planning​

Sprint Review​

Daily Scrum

Ans: 1


Lessons learned are always captured but the main purpose of Sprint Retrospective is capturing and planning for lessons learned.


63. Which of the following best describes transparency ?

Options:


The whole process should be visible to everyone.​

The process should be visible, and understood by key stakeholders.​

The whole process should be visible to stakeholders.​

Significant aspects of the process must be visible to those responsible for the outcome.

Ans: 4


Transparency is about visibility and doesn’t contain understanding; even though we’d better try our best to create the right understanding too but that’s another story. The “whole process” might be too much for some stakeholders; “significant aspects” is enough, as we treat most things in Agile environments.


64. It’s up to the Development Team to decide which Scrum events are needed during the Sprint.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


All Scrum events are necessary; they should never be removed.


65. The purpose of the Daily Scrum is for the developers to inform the Product Owner of the progress.

Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


The main purpose of Daily Scrum is synchronization of the developers.


66. The Product Owner doesn’t spend enough time on the project. Which of the following options is the best response from the Scrum Master ?

Options:


Nominate a proxy Product Owner​

Train the Product Owner why it’s important for her/him to spend enough time on the project​

Bring up the issue in the Sprint Retrospective​

Send the Product Owner to a proper training​

Inform the Product Owner’s functional manager

Ans: 2


The Scrum Master is responsible to train and coach team members on a proactive way and convince them to do the right thing. All other options are either reactive or not self-organized.


67. It’s allowed to have team leaders when there are many developers working on a complex project.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 2


No extra roles and titles are recognized in Scrum because it blocks self-organization, collaboration and accountability.


68. How can we ensure that the performance requirements are addressed in the solution ? (Choose 2 answers)


Options:


Add them to the definition of “Done”

Add them as items to the Product Backlog​

Add a performance tester to the team​

Use hardening Sprints to improve performance

Ans: 1 & 2


Performance, like security, scalability and maintainability is a non-functional feature. Non-functional features are normally added to the definition of “Done” because they apply to all functional features. For some non-functional features, such as performance, it’s possible to create non-technical, independent items in the Product Backlog. This is usually done when we have to make an improvement in the previously done features.


69. How complete should the Sprint Backlog be at the end of the Sprint Planning meeting ?


Options:


Complete enough to show the work for the next few days.​

It depends on the preference of the Product Owner.​

The Sprint Backlog should be complete at the end of the Sprint Planning.

Ans: 1


Not all tasks are identified in the Sprint Planning; just enough to show what the development team is going to do in the next few days. The rest of the tasks will be created during the Sprint.


70. What happens when the Product Backlog is not clear enough at Sprint Planning ?


Options:


Nothing; the Sprint would be planned anyway.​

The Sprint would be cancelled, and the next one will start as soon as enough items at the top of the Product Backlog are clear.​

The Sprint Planning would be delayed, until enough refinement is done on the items at the top of the Product Backlog.​

The Sprint Planning would be extended, to have the items refined before adding them to the Sprint Backlog.

Ans: 1


We prefer to have “ready” items at the top of the Product Backlog before Sprint Planning, which is done through Product Backlog refinement. However, nothing stops our flow of Sprints, for example, we do not delay the Sprint because the items are not ready. In such cases, the “unready” items would be selected for the Sprint anyway and refined during the Sprint. “Ready” items are those that are clear and small enough to fit into one Sprint.


71. What is management’s role in Scrum ?


Options:


To provide the necessary environment and support needed as defined by the Scrum

Guide by providing insights and resources that help the Scrum Teams improve.​

Identifying and removing people that are performing poorly.​

Monitoring skill levels of the Development Team.​

Monitoring the Development Team’s velocity.

Ans: 1


Getting the support from the business side helps facilitates the changes that fosters empiricism, self-organization, bottom-up intelligence, and intelligent release of software.


72. What would likely happen if management only changed the organization’s current terminology to fit Scrum without the proper understanding and support of the Scrum as defined in the Scrum Guide ?


Options:


Very little change will happen as the vocabulary in Scrum is specifically defined for implementing Scrum.​

The organization may not realize the real benefits of Scrum as there would be no real change on the way the teams work.​

Organizations may feel less stressed as the vocabulary would remain familiar to management.​

All answers apply.

Ans: 4


The the defined terminology in Scrum was selected, designed, and defined specifically for supporting the Scrum Framework. Understanding the differences between traditional methods and the Scrum Framework will help move teams in the right direction in Scrum adoption.


73. In order to start the first Sprint, Scrum only requires a Product Owner with enough ideas, a Development Team to execute on those ideas, and a Scrum Master to guide the process.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 1


In complex domains, you are only able to know the outcomes in hindsight. Empiricism, from which Scrum was founded on, asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. New knowledge will emerge as work is being done.


74. Which Scrum Value is impacted by trust ?


Options:


Respect​

Courage​

Commitment​

Openness​

Focus​

All of the above

Ans: 6


Without trust, team members will have difficulties acting and behaving in the ways that reflect the Scrum values and how effective they apply empiricism.


75. Doing your best and helping other Scrum Team members demonstrates which of the following ?


Options:


Value of Commitment​

Increased Revenue​

Increased Profit​

Maximizing utilization​

High Performance

Ans: 1


People personally commit to achieving the goals of the Scrum Team by doing their best and helping others.


76. Peter, a Project Manager, has raised concerns about your Scrum Team’s productivity and progress towards the objectives. Which is the best way to respond to Peter’s concerns ?


Options:


Share the Product Backlog, the projections towards the release dates and ensure that Peter has access.​

Show the Profit & Loss (P&L) report.​

Share the current impediments.​

Share the last stakeholder status report prepared by the Scrum Master.

Ans: 1


One of the key pillars that support the empirical process control is Transparency. Transparency will help manage stakeholder expectations and allow the teams to effectively adapt if and when needed.


77. If burndown charts are used to visualize progress, what does a trendline through a release burndown chart indicate ?


Options:


When all work will be completed so the Scrum Team can start work on a new Product Backlog.​

When the project will be over if the Product Owner removes work that is equal in effort to any new work that is added.​

When the work remaining is projected to be completed if nothing changes on the Product Backlog or Development Team.​

The evolution of the return of investment on the project.

Ans: 3


The trendline is based on the team’s average velocity and the projective completion to zero is based on the team’s velocity. The burndown chart is a helpful tool for Development Teams to self-manage BUT it is not mandatory as the teams will decide the best way to manage their own progress and promote transparency.


78. What is a good way for a Scrum Team to ensure that security concerns are addressed and transparent ?


Options:


Add Security Sprints to resolve security concerns when needed.​

Have the Scrum Team create Product Backlog items for each concern and/or add security concerns to the definition of “Done”.​

Create a separate backlog for security items and only work on the items when a specialist becomes available.​

Delegate the work to an external team.

Ans: 2


79. Technical Debt can lead to false assumptions about the current state of the system and the Increment reviewed at the end of the Sprint.


Options:


True

False

Ans: 1


When technical debt occurs, the system will become more unstable as development progresses and code is added resulting in future work being slowed down. So it’s important to understand how technical debt can impact transparency.


80. At the eighth Sprint Review, the stakeholders are upset that the product being built is not what they expected and will incur additional costs that was not planned for. What may have led to this ?


Options:


The Scrum Master has not been reporting on the progress of the Scrum Team. The Product Owner has not been managing the Development Team’s tasks effectively. The Development Team has not been improving their velocity.​

The Scrum Master has not ensured that the project is transparent. The Product Owner has not made the stakeholders aware of the progress of the project. The stakeholders have not been attending the Sprint Reviews.​

The Scrum Master has not been attending the Daily Standup. The Product Owner has not been using the Gantt chart correctly. The Stakeholders has not been invited to the Sprint Retrospectives.

Ans: 2



----


© Sumanta Boral 2016 349

S. Boral, Ace the PMI-ACP®

 exam, DOI 10.1007/978-1-4842-2526-4

Mock Exam I

1. The Managing Director (MD) of the organization stops by the task board of the

team and makes a suggestion of an important feature that the development team

should deliver in the current iteration. What should the development team do?

A. Since it is coming from the MD, it must be done at any cost. So drop an item

of equal size from the backlog.

B. Say yes to the MD and then ask the team members to work overtime to

achieve their target.

C. Ask the product owner so that he can discuss the value and priorities with

the MD.

D. Ignore it, the MD will most likely forget what he said a few weeks later.

2. A newly formed development team is working on Sprint zero. In terms of doing

the following activities, which is false?

A. Team completes the entire architecture and high-level design for the project,

leaving out the low-level design.

B. Develop the detailed project plan.

C. Deliver a few stories.

D. All of the above.

3. Who makes the final call on priority order in the Product Backlog?

A. The Development Team

B. The Scrum Master

C. The Product Owner

D. Someone in senior leadership like the MD or the CEO

■ Mock Exam I

350

4. With respect to the roles on a Scrum team, choose the odd one out?

A. Scrum Master

B. Product Owner

C. Development Team

D. Project Manager

5. The Development Team is expected to have all the skills needed to:

A. Complete the project by the given deadline and budget shared upfront with

the sponsor.

B. Do analysis and development work, but leave out all forms of testing since

that is handled by another specialized team.

C. Turn the Product Backlog items into potentially shippable product

increments.

D. Master all state-of-the-art technology practices and tools available.

6. What is the main way that a Scrum Master contributes to maximizing the

productivity in the development team?

A. By maintaining a risk-adjusted Product Backlog in priority order.

B. By making sure hygiene is maintained on meeting – agendas, start & end

times, capturing and sending out minutes, etc.

C. By facilitating Development Team decisions and removing impediments.

D. By providing news about the newest technology trends in the market.

7. All of the following are Scrum artifacts except:

A. Product backlog

B. Gantt chart

C. Sprint backlog

D. Burndown chart

8. During an estimation session each team member is asked to provide an estimate.

Which of the following is correct?

A. The team member provides estimates for only the story that will be assigned

to him.

B. The developer provides a development estimate, the analyst provides an

analysis estimate and the tester does his part. Ultimately all the estimates

are aggregated.

C. The team members provide a relative estimate in units of ideal days.

D. Participation of a team member is voluntary as the Scrum Master can fillin

wherever necessary.

■ Mock Exam I

351

9. A project stakeholder wants to have a look at how the Agile team is progressing in

the middle of an iteration. As a member of the Agile team, you can guide him to:

A. The most recent weekly status report.

B. The sprint backlog.

C. The defect log.

D. The combined burnup and burndown charts.

10. XP teams take collective ownership of code. For such a team, _______ and

_______ are the key.

A. Definition of done and pair programming.

B. Trust and collaboration.

C. Velocity and co-location.

D. Onsite customer and test-driven development.

11. Barry is a team member currently in a sprint planning session. After hearing

about the requirement from the product owner, he estimates the amount of effort

required by taking account that he will be working on this story and nothing else.

He assumes that he will not face any interruptions. Which unit of estimate is he

using?

A. Story points

B. T-shirt sizes

C. Ideal days

D. Either A or C

12. What is the primary role of a Product Owner?

A. The PO is basically a project manager who balances scope, time, cost and

risk.

B. Maximizing the Return on Investment (ROI) of the software developed.

C. People management for the Team.

D. Avoiding distracting and keeping stakeholders at bay.

13. Which of the two ceremonies are executed after all development for a sprint and

beginning of the next one?

A. Sprint review and sprint retrospective

B. Sprint review and sprint planning

C. Daily stand-up and sprint review

D. Sprint retrospective and sprint planning

■ Mock Exam I

352

14. Kanban board is an example of:

A. Toyota production system

B. Information refrigerator

C. High-tech and low-touch system

D. Information radiator

15. What happens during a Sprint Review?

A. Review of what the team could do more or less off during the next sprint.

B. Figure out the scope for the next sprint.

C. End of the sprint demo for everyone to solicit feedback on the work done in

the sprint.

D. It is an opportunity to brainstorm and do a root cause analysis of work items

that could not get done.

16. How do we know when a sprint isover?

A. When all items in the sprint goal have met their definition of done.

B. When the Product owner accepts all the work that was committed in the

sprint planning meeting.

C. When the timebox expires.

D. None of the above.

17. While inspecting a release burndown chart, it is observed that the bar graph

moves below its X-axis. Choose the best conclusion.

A. This is normal. Scope could have gotten added by the product owner.

B. This is normal. The developers would have underestimated the complexity

of the story.

C. This is abnormal and indicates poor data quality being plotted on the

burndown chart. The bar graph can touch the X-axis, but not go below it.

D. This is abnormal. The team should have completed what was committed by

them.

18. Under what condition can a sprint be abnormally terminated?

A. When the PO determines that it no longer makes sense to carry on with a

sprint.

B. The team has overcommitted and the sprint scope is too large to be

achieved.

C. A production defect needs to be addressed by priority.

D. There is another project for which some analysis needs to be completed by

the SME’s in the current team.

■ Mock Exam I

353

19. During a planning session, the product owner and the team sit down together

and sort the stories from the backlog into must-have, should-have, couldhave and won’t-have. The must-haves top the chart and along with those a

few should-haves get selected for implementation during the iteration. Which

prioritization technique did the team follow?

A. Kano model analysis.

B. Weighted prioritization technique.

C. Simple ranking technique.

D. MoSCoW.

20. In Agile vocabulary. a spike is a:

A. Sudden increase in the quantum of work received.

B. Sudden increase in the quantum of risks.

C. Sudden increase in the resource demand.

D. A task that the team undertakes to experiment on a hypothesis or a new

technology.

21. Fill in the blanks for the following Agile principle.

Build projects around _______ individuals. Give them the environment and

_______ they need and ________ them to get the job done.

A. cross-functional, training, trust

B. empowered, support, believe

C. self-motivated, support, believe

D. motivated, morale boost, trust

22. An XP team realizes that a story is more complex than estimated earlier and so

it cannot be completed in the current iteration. Which option should the team

exercise?

A. At the next daily stand-up, propose that the “definition of done” condition

be relaxed to allow the partially completed story to look close to being

completed.

B. Extend the iteration by 3–4 days, as you cannot let the team’s velocity go

down.

C. Discard the code and put the story back to the backlog for future

prioritization and implementation in a successive sprint.

D. Keep the code commented so it does not do any harm and tell the customer

you will pick up and complete in the next iteration.

■ Mock Exam I

354

23. Some teams use a hardening sprint ahead of a release to:

A. Train the operations team so that they can support the product post-release.

B. Complete some of the final tasks related to productionizing of the code.

C. Perform acceptance testing for all the previous sprints that were part of the

release.

D. Ask all programmers to check-in all the code in version control.

24. An Agile team is using relative sizing to estimate for stories on the backlog. What

are the most common units of estimates used?

A. Days / weeks / months

B. Story points

C. Ideal days

D. Either B or C

25. Bill has worked hard over the last few days and finds that the build is broken

because Richard has checked in code without properly unit testing it. It will

mean that Bill will have to wait until Richard comes back and fixes the issue. Bill

is furious at Richard and he makes statements like, “I know Richard. He is always

careless and doesn’t bother how others get affected by his actions.”

Which stage of conflict do you think is reflected in Bill’s language?

A. Level 1: Problem to Solve

B. Level 2: Disagreement

C. Level 3: Contest

D. Level 5: World War

26. The two highest levels of conflict are Level 4: Crusade where there is hardly any

direct speaking terms and Level 5: World war where the conflict is escalated to a

level that is beyond repair and resolutions.

As a manager encountering the situation, which are the best approaches you will

follow to resolve conflicts?

A. For Level 4: use shuttle diplomacy until the intensity of the conflict is

lowered and team members can be brought into a table discussion. For

Level 5: separate the team members such that they do not cause harm to

each other or to the environment.

B. For Level 4: use problem solving to get to the bottom of the issue. For Level

5: ask one party to compromise on a stand that they have rigidly held.

C. For level 4: separate the team members such that they do not cause harm to

each other or to the environment. For Level 5: bring in a third party and take

the two team members to battle out in the court.

D. For Level 4: remind the two members that they need to collaborate and

reach consensus, even if that means that they will have to sacrifice. For Level

5: avoid the situation since nothing can be done about it.

■ Mock Exam I

355

27. What is the formula for Risk severity? And how do you expect risks to change

during a project?

A. Risk severity = Risk probability + Risk impact. We expect risks to be highest

at the beginning and decrease over time.

B. Risk severity = Risk probability x Risk impact. We expect risks to be highest

at the beginning and decrease over time.

C. Risk severity = Risk probability x Risk impact. We expect risks to be lowest at

the beginning and increase over time.

D. Risk severity = Risk probability x Risk impact. We expect risks to be highest

at the beginning and remain static until the project is over.

28. The product owner is not able to commit enough time for the Scrum team. He is

however, very supportive and leading the cause for the project. Who could be the

best choice of a proxy user?

A. Technical lead of the project who knows the ins and outs of the product.

B. UX designer because they have close proximity to the business and knows

how the UI is expected to behave.

C. A business analyst reporting to the product owner since she will be able

to articulate the user stories in plain business language that is free from

technical jargon.

D. A customer care representative who interacts with the real users on a daily

basis and resolves support tickets.

29. Which is the odd line out of the following?

A. Responding to change over following a plan.

B. Customer collaboration over contract negotiation.

C. Customer interactions over processes and tools.

D. Working software over comprehensive documentation.

30. A reflection workshop is also called:

A. Sprint review

B. Sprint retrospective

C. Backlog grooming session

D. None of the above

■ Mock Exam I

356

31. Richard joins as an Agile coach and observes that there are a few Scrum teams

working on a single product that is used by financial planners. The teams are

struggling to arrive at a common “definition of done.” What should Richard do?

A. Richard should give each development team freedom to choose their

definition of done. Reconcile differences only during the hardening sprint.

B. Richard should give each development team freedom to choose their

definition of done, as far as there is convergence and common ground at the

time of integration such that the product is potentially releasable.

C. Richard should ignore the situation. It’s too messy too get involved in dayto-day work of the development.

D. Richard should get hands-on, laying out the definition of done himself and

teach all development teams how to follow them.

32. Agile teams use personas thatare imaginary user roles to provide a real-life flavor

of the users interacting with the system. While building a persona, which of the

following relevant information should they include?

A. Age and gender

B. Educational and Professional background

C. A name and a picture

D. All of the above

33. Agile teams practice value-based delivery. While determining and delivering

value, who are we targeting?

A. Users

B. Developers

C. Product owners

D. Testers

34. Alistair Cockburn has introduced the Crystal family of methodologies, which

consists of Crystal clear, Crystal yellow, crystal red, crystal maroon. What are the

core differences between them?

A. From left to right, they denote progressively increasing complexity of

projects.

B. From left to right, they denote progressively increasing criticality of projects.

C. From left to right, they denote progressively increasing size of teams working

on projects.

D. All of the above.

■ Mock Exam I

357

35. A team hires you as an Agile coach to see if the team’s efficiency could be

enhanced and the velocity improved.What could be your recommendation to

improve velocity?

A. Have the team commit to fewer stories every sprint, so the probability of

getting them completed in time are more.

B. Reduce the daily-stand-up meetings from 15 to 10 minutes.

C. Suggest bringing in the business representative to sit together with the

development team.

D. Compare velocities of similar projects running in the same organization and

present them to the team.

36. Barry joined as an Agile coach and he wants to improve the way the team

conducts retrospective meetings. He states that there are 5 stages for effective

retrospectives. They follow the sequence of:

A. Set the Stage, Gather Data, Generating Insights, Decide What to Do,

Wrap up.

B. Set the Stage, Generating Insights, Gather Data, Decide What to Do,

Wrap up.

C. Set the Stage, Decide What to Do, Generating Insights, Gather Data,

Wrap up.

D. Set the Stage, Gather Data, Decide What to Do, Generating Insights,

Wrap up.

37. The Scrum team owns the sprint burndown chart. What is the primary

significance of the chart?

A. Use as a base for weekly status report for senior management.

B. An Agile team is characterized with information radiators on team walls. A

sprint burndown chart is a relevant artifact for putting up on the team wall.

C. Team can view their daily progress and adapt based on the situation.

D. Keep other stakeholders at bay. Those who are interested in knowing the

status can view the sprint burndown chart and not bother the development

team.

38. The acronym TIMWOOD is used to describe the 7 wastes in Lean. The letters T,

M and D stand for:

A. Transport, Machine, Defects

B. Turnaround time, Motion, Defects

C. Transport, Machine, Deliberate

D. Transport, Motion, Defects

■ Mock Exam I

358

39. The Japanese words Muda, Kanban and Kaizen respectively mean:

A. Waste, signboard, continuous improvement

B. Waste, billboard, continuous integration

C. Improvement, signboard, continuous removal of waste

D. None of these

40. A new team member Billy, fresh from college, joins the team and sees that at

every workstation two developers are sitting next to each other. One of them is

typing code and the other is looking on and giving some suggestions at times.

Billy thinks that privacy could be lost and discusses this with his mentor. His

mentor explains that the team is following XP methodology and are involved in

___________.

A. Sharing best practices sitting next to each other.

B. Pair programming.

C. One is coding and the other is deciding on test cases based on the code

written.

D. Coaching session for coding skills.

41. The ___________ is also called “the voice of the customer”?

A. Development manager

B. Scrum Master

C. Product Owner

D. Sponsor

42. An Agile team is in its formative stage. One of the first few things that they want to

do is determine the length of an iteration. Which is the most important factor to

make this decision?

A. Determine the estimate of the longest story, convert from story points to

man-days and then choose the iteration size to accommodate that.

B. Look up historical data from other projects and teams.

C. Discuss with project stakeholders on how long they can go without

demonstrating progress or giving feedback.

D. Follow guidelines from the Scrum Master since he is the most seasoned player

in the team and has had a varied experience running Scrum teams elsewhere.

43. The commitments made by the product owner to the team include the following

EXCEPT?

A. Bring a prioritized list of features from the backlog to the planning meeting.

B. Clarify requirements as and when asked by the team.

C. Resist any temptation of changing scope midway through a sprint.

D. Mandatorily attend every daily-standup meeting.

■ Mock Exam I

359

44. The product owner creates an elevator speech to articulate the vision of a

product to the Agile team and its stakeholders. The elevator speech is expected to

contain all of the following attributes EXCEPT:

A. Who is the target customer?

B. What is the key benefit that the customer will get by using the product?

C. Location and the technology where the product will be developed and tested.

D. What differentiates it from its competitors?

45. All the following are Agile methodologies EXCEPT:

A. Test-driven development

B. Feature-driven development

C. Extreme Programming

D. Scrumban

46. Who is responsible for prioritization of stories, epics and features in the product

backlog?

A. Product owner

B. Product owner with inputs gathered from the team

C. ScrumMaster

D. Development team

47. The Scrum team has committed for a sprint goal. Midway during the sprint, the

team discovers that there are some new tasks that need to be done before the

committed stories are completed. However, given the time constraint, the team

feels it cannot be done. What are the things the team should do now?

A. Abandon the sprint.

B. Bring it up during the daily-standup and then discuss proactively with the

product owner.

C. Hope for the best and let the stakeholders know during the sprint review

that some stories were not completed.

D. Find someone to blame.

48. The marketing team is looking for firm commitments from an Agile team based

on the estimates that came out of the Affinity estimation session held by the

team. What could possibly be wrong in that approach?

A. Affinity estimation is a very quick estimation technique used for release

planning and generally precision of estimates is not the goal.

B. The marketing team should direct all their requirements to the product

owner and not approach the Agile team directly.

C. Agile estimates are relative measure of size. They should not be treated as

commitments.

D. A and C.

■ Mock Exam I

360

49. At the time of release planning, an epic was estimated to have 13 story points.

However, during iteration planning, when the epic was broken down into stories

and tasks, the sum of the estimates came to about 15 story points. Choose the

most appropriate option below.

A. This is likely to happen as the estimates don’t necessarily add up.

B. This is likely to happen as the estimates are done by different people at

different times.

C. This is likely to happen as the estimates are less accurate at a release level.

D. This is a mistake, as it appears that somewhere there was a scope creep, that

is, addition of 2 story points.

50. All the following could belong to the definition of done of a team EXCEPT:

A. Code has been checked into version control.

B. Code has passed through the integration test cases and regression suite.

C. Acceptance test cases have passed.

D. Daily Scrum meetings have been attended.

51. An Agile team is coming together for the first time. They have no prior experience

working together, but would like to estimate an initial velocity to target.All the

following options are possible EXCEPT:

A. Use historical values as the working environment and the technology used is

the same as a previous project.

B. Run an iteration and observe the velocity.

C. Make a forecast by breaking stories into tasks and see what fits.

D. Use the velocity from any arbitrary project team. The level of accuracy does

not matter since the team is new.

52. During a series of conflicts, you get to hear one party blaming the other by

generalizing statements like, “They are always late - no surprises in that,” “He

has forgotten to check-in the file and again! Careless as ever!” Referring to Lea’s

conflict model, which stage do you think the team members are in?

A. Problem to solve.

B. Arbitration.

C. Crusade.

D. World war.

53. Which of the following statements is not true?

A. Higher the IRR the better, higher the BCR the better.

B. Higher the IRR the better, lower the payback period the better.

C. Higher the NPV the better, higher the IRR the better.

D. Higher the NPV the better, higher the payback period the better.

■ Mock Exam I

361

54. Leaving low-priority requirements at a high level, but sufficiently detailing out

the high priority (and immediate) ones is called ________.

A. Incremental development.

B. Progressive elaboration.

C. Version control.

D. Continuous improvement.

55. Retrospectives can be held:

A. After an iteration.

B. After a release.

C. After an unexpected and a significant event in the project.

D. Any of the above.

56. What does the acronym MMF stand for?

A. Maximum Marketable Feature

B. Minimal Marketable Feature

C. Maximum Measurable Feature

D. Must-have and Marketable Function

57. Which of the following do you NOT expect to see on an information radiator for

an Agile team?

A. Gantt chart

B. Task board

C. Burnup chart

D. Velocity trends

58. For an emergency reason Richard, the product owner could not make it to the

sprint planning meeting. Who do you think could be in a position to play his role

for the time being?

A. The self-organized team.

B. The development manager.

C. The Scrum Master.

D. The CEO who is closely aligned to the project.

59. Which of the following statements is false?

A. Agile projects do just-in-time planning.

B. Agile projects balance progress and flexibility.

C. Agile projects do not require a PMO.

D. Agile projects value collaboration over documentation.

■ Mock Exam I

362

60. Team A has a velocity of 20 story points and Team B has 40 story points over a

3-week iteration. What does this mean?

A. Team B is twice more efficient than Team A.

B. Team B has double the capacity (team size) than Team A.

C. Team B is more mature, uses sophisticated tools and achieves more in the

same time.

D. Nothing. Velocity of two teams cannot be compared.

61. The three levels of active listening are:

A. Level I - Internal Listening, Level II - Focused Listening, Level III - Global

Listening.

B. Level I - Focused Listening, Level II - Internal Listening, Level III - Global

Listening.

C. Level I - Internal Listening, Level II - Global Listening, Level III - Focused

Listening.

D. Varies based on the circumstances.

62. An Agile team has an average velocity of 25. During a sprint planning session,

they have come up with estimates for a list of stories in priority order as follows:

Story 1 estimate of 12 story points

Story 2 estimate of 3 story points

Story 3 estimate of 8 story points

Story 4 estimate of 5 story points

Story 5 estimate of 2 story points

Story 6 estimate of 1 story points

Story 7 estimate of 1 story points

What is the choice that the team makes?

A. Choose stories 6, 7,5,2,4 and split the larger ones 1 and 3 so that maximum

number of stories can be accommodated.

B. A team’s velocity is subject to change. Also estimates are not absolute.

Choose all stories and complete whatever is possible. After all, customer will

be pleasantly surprised if the team overachieves.

C. Club stories that are dependent on each other and deliver them together.

D. Choose stories 1,2,3,5 – the highest priority ones that add up to the team’s

velocity.

■ Mock Exam I

363

63. After the story writing workshop the team has come up with a set of 80 story

cards that need to be very quickly estimated such that the release plan can be

built. The product owner is interested in getting this completed in less than 2

hours. Which estimation technique is best suited for this purpose?

A. Work breakdown structure or bottom-up estimation.

B. Planning Poker.

C. Affinity estimation.

D. Delphi.

64. The DEEP acronym is used to describe the characteristics of a product backlog.

The acronym stands for

A. Detailed Appropriately, Estimated, Emergent, Prioritized.

B. Detailed Appropriately, Economic, Emergent, Prioritized.

C. Defined properly, Estimated, Emergent, Prioritized.

D. Defined properly, Estimated, Enlisted, Probabilistic.

65. Passing of acceptance test cases is an example of:

A. Definition of ready

B. Definition of done

C. Collective ownership

D. Teamwork

66. The INVEST acronym is used to describe the characteristics of user stories. The

letters I, V and S in the acronym stands for:

A. Interesting, Verifiable, Small

B. Independent, Validatable, Small

C. Independent, Valuable, Specific

D. None of the above

67. Agile releases could be one of:

A. Feature-driven or Date-Driven.

B. Date-driven or Priority-driven.

C. Team-driven or feature-driven.

D. Both release dates and constituent features are variable and negotiated on

the fly.

■ Mock Exam I

364

68. Sarah is joining an Agile team. On the first day she observes that the team has

a task board that contains lots of sticky notes denoting tasks in various stages

of progress. She is confused about the small numbers written next to column

headers of the task board and asks her manager Jane about their significance.

Jane explains that the numbers depict:

A. Velocity for each column in the task board.

B. Number of resources assigned for each column in the task board.

C. WIP limit.

D. Maximum number of escaped defects allowed per column.

69. XP programmers are required to continuously submit their code into the code

repository and run a 10-minute build to assess whether anything has broken or

not as a result of the newly made changes. This practice is called:

A. Continuous integration.

B. Continuous improvement.

C. Version control.

D. Informative team space.

70. The Lean team has understood the benefits of creating value stream maps. After

a bit of effort they prepared a value stream map and proceeds to calculate the

cycle time for each step and the total lead time to handover value to the business

user. What is the most important next step?

A. Continuously improve on process efficiencies.

B. Amplify learning.

C. Identify non-value added activities and eliminate them.

D. Organize daily stand-up meetings.

71. The project steering board is having a meeting to evaluate and select one of the

two projects being presented by their sponsors.

Project A has IRR of 6% and requires an investment of 100K USD

Project B has IRR of 7.5% and requires an investment of 150K USD

Which project should be chosen and what is the opportunity cost?

A. Project A, 100K USD

B. Project A, 150K USD

C. Project B, 100K USD

D. Project B, 150K USD

■ Mock Exam I

365

72. The ________ is best placed to author user stories.

A. Development team since they know the technical intricacies of the features.

B. Customer or business representative because they can articulate business

requirements in plain language (no technical jargon).

C. The project manager because he knows what it takes to balance scope, time

and cost.

D. The tester since the acceptance test cases needs to be written at the back of

the story card.

73. When is it okay for a team to extend an iteration by 4–5 days to complete what

they promised?

A. Use a groupdecision-making technique and agree at a daily stand-up

meeting.

B. Once the Scrum Master approves.

C. Iteration length should not be changed.

D. Instead of extending the iteration, think of ‘crashing’ the iteration by putting

in more resources or requesting overtime and weekend work.

74. As per Alistair Cockburn, Shu-Ha-Ri is a learning technique that is applied to

software development methodologies. The words Shu Ha Ri means:

A. Follow the rule, break the rule and be the rule respectively.

B. Break the rule, follow the rule and be the rule respectively.

C. Be the rule, break the rule and follow the rule respectively.

D. Follow the rule, be the rule and break the rule respectively.

75. 5 Why’s is an example of a/an:

A. Estimation technique

B. Retrospective technique

C. Conflict resolution technique

D. Facilitation technique

76. In the situational leadership model, the different leadership styles in ascending

order of team maturity are as follows:

A. Selling, Telling, Supporting, Delegating

B. Telling, Delegating, Participating, Selling

C. Delegating, Directing, Coaching, Supporting

D. Telling, Selling, Participating, Delegating

■ Mock Exam I

366

77. Value stream mapping is a technique that has its origin in Lean. Why do we use

value stream mapping?

A. Without a visualized workflow, conversations with the customers are difficult.

B. To identify and eliminate wastes in the process.

C. To charter the future roadmap.

D. To energize the development team.

78. Active listening consists of all the following EXCEPT:

A. Paying attention to the nonverbal signs of the speaker.

B. Providing feedback on what is understood.

C. Interrupting the speaker to express your personal views and perspectives.

D. Deferring judgment.

79. User stories have enough requirements that serve as a reminder to the team

and they can converse to drill down to the specifics during coding. How do the

developers confirm that the requirement is met?

A. Discuss with the users, write down the acceptance test cases behind the

card. and execute them.

B. There is always more chances, so the team can make assumptions, demo

them. and incorporate feedback later.

C. Developers expect the product owner to maintain a checklist separately.

D. Since the user stories are not sufficient, developers need to augment with

comprehensive documentation behind the scenes.

80. User stories should be valuable to ________.

A. The development team

B. The Agile coach

C. The organization

D. The user or customer

81. The different stages of Test-Driven Development are

1) Red - when the test cases fail.

2) Green - when the test cases succeed with barely minimum code.

3) Refactor - when the code is evolved by considering design patterns, code

quality etc.

What is the right sequence?

A. Green, Red, Refactor.

B. Red, Refactor, Green.

C. Red, Green, Refactor.

D. None of the above as the blue stage is missing.

■ Mock Exam I

367

82. XP teams conduct spike tasks. The product owner realizes that there is no direct

value to the customer in conducting such tasks, but yet permits them in the

iteration backlog because:

A. Through spikes teams are able to gain knowledge of an unknown technology.

B. Through spikes teams are able to prove a hypothesis.

C. Through spikes teams are able to mitigate a risk.

D. All of the above.

83. With respect to size, which is the correct order?

A. Epic, theme, story, task.

B. Story, feature, theme, subtask.

C. Story, task, subtask, feature.

D. Epic, feature, subtask, theme.

84. The Scrum Master in a team plays the following roles EXCEPT:

A. Servant leader

B. Shepherd

C. Line manager

D. Bulldozer of impediments

85. In Scrum who takes the responsibility to prioritize stories?

A. Scrum Master.

B. Product owner with the help of the whole team.

C. Exclusively product owner.

D. Whoever is knowledgeable about the stories.

86. The product owner is looking at the backlog, shuffling priorities, adding more

epics and features. and removing some that are no longer necessary. The task he

is doing is called:

A. Backlog grooming

B. Product roadmap creation

C. Project charter creation

D. Backlog review

87. An Agile team consists of the following attributes:

A. Self-organized

B. Generalized specialist

C. Multilingual

D. A and B

■ Mock Exam I

368

88. ________ is a unit of estimates for user stories.

A. Velocity

B. Weeks

C. Story points

D. Work breakdown structure

89. A persona is:

A. A real customer or user.

B. Imaginary representation of a user role.

C. Any stakeholder who can provide system requirements.

D. A business analyst or a domain specialist.

90. Regarding ideal days and calendar days, all of the following statements are

correct EXCEPT:

A. Calendar days are the usual days at work and includes interruptions like

breaks and meetings.

B. Ideal days are the days of work minus the interruptions like breaks and

meetings.

C. Calendar days are valid units of estimate in Agile, since the definition of

ideal days varies from one developer to another.

D. Ideal days are valid units of estimate in Agile, since the worth of work done

on a calendar day varies from one developer to another.

91. Spot the statement that is incorrect as per the Agile Manifesto:

A. Individuals and interactions over processes and tools

B. Customer collaboration over vendor management

C. Working software over comprehensive documentation

D. Responding to change over following a plan

92. Which of the following could be the biggest cause for failure in an Agile project?

A. Lack of availability of the customer to collaborate closely with the team.

B. A distributed team.

C. Some team members who are not yet well versed in devops practices.

D. Resources that have fractional allocation to multiple projects at the same time.

93. You get to see all of the following practices in a, XP team except:

A. Continuous build and integration.

B. Checking in code into a single repository.

C. Onsite customer facilitating daily stand-up meetings.

D. Test-driven development.

■ Mock Exam I

369

94. Which of the following statements regarding technical debt is false?

A. The quantum of technical debt can be measured by counting the number of

days of effort required to address it.

B. Technical debt can be introduced at any time, during initial development,

during maintenance and enhancements.

C. XP teams continuously refactor code to reduce technical debt.

D. All of the above are true.

95. PMI®

’s code of ethics applies to:

A. PMI®

 members.

B. PMI®

 certification seekers.

C. PMI®

 volunteers and chapter members.

D. A, B and C.

96. When should individual development team members signup for implementing a

particular story?

A. At the time of estimation, when they are submitting the estimates.

B. Once the sprint goal has been agreed at the end of the planning meeting.

C. During the daily stand-up meeting.

D. At the last responsible moment and based on capacity of the team. All items

are owned by the entire development team.

97. The Agile team has started working on an iteration. On the third day, a business

representative comes up to you and requests another feature to be included in

the same iteration. What should the Agile team do?

A. Accommodate the feature since otherwise the business representative will

not accept the iteration results.

B. Accommodate the feature since otherwise the business representative will

escalate that the team is not adaptable to change.

C. Accommodate the feature by putting it into the product backlog and asking

the product owner to check its ROI relative to other stories in the backlog.

D. Accommodate the feature as it is a small change and self-organized team

knows how to manage last-minute requirements.

■ Mock Exam I

370

98. An Agile team is working on the software for life-saving medical equipment. The

product has already been in the market for about 2 months, when the product

team detects a defect in the software that could be fatal to the patients being

monitored. Fixing the product and rolling out the solution to all the clients who

have purchased the product will be very costly and affect the balance sheets

badly. What is the most important thing that the company should do?

A. Wait and watch, as the clients have not discovered the defect and have not

been affected.

B. Since it is software for a life-saving medical apparatus, immediately warn all

clients and stop their use.

C. Immediately sanction a project to fix the software and roll out to all clients.

This is estimated to take 4–5 months.

D. Wait for the next planned release that is 6 months away and prioritize this

production defect fix over anything else.

99. To eliminate duplication in code, the word DRY is used. It stands for ________:

A. Don’t repeat yourself.

B. Don’t refactor your code.

C. Do review your product.

D. None of the above.

100. Agile teams do emergent architecture and design. At the end of every iteration,

they deliver ________.

A. Shippable product increment.

B. Vertical slice of the cake.

C. A and B.

D. Horizontal slice of the cake.

101. An Agile team is currently reviewing the proposals submitted by prospective

vendors. The outcome of the review is to shortlist and award the contract to the

vendor that is considered best to work on the project. Harry, a member of the

team comes to know that BigFive Consulting Company, which is owned by his

relative, has also bid for the project. In this situation Harry should:

A. Keep it to himself and patiently see what goes on.

B. Keep it to himself and recommend the rest of the team to go with BigFive

Consulting Company since you know them all and trust their capabilities.

C. Disclose it and stay out of the seller selection process.

D. Pass on some insider information to BigFive, so that they are at an advantage

during the negotiation process.

■ Mock Exam I

371

102. Which of the following is not an attribute of a product backlog?

A. Prioritized

B. Large

C. Detailed appropriately

D. Measurable

103. The Agile team is sitting together in a room. Harry asks a quick question

on the build configuration and Sally responds where Harry could find it. In

between, Richard, who was busy writing code, overhears and cautions that the

configuration file at that location has an issue and Harry should use the one

at an alternate location. Harry was able to get what he needed in no time and

continued with his tasks. This type of communication between co-located teams

is called?

A. Verbal communication.

B. Osmotic communication.

C. Information radiators.

D. Informal communication.

104. On the back of the story card the acceptance test cases are found. Who specifies

the acceptance test cases?

A. Customer

B. The whole team

C. Test manager

D. Scrum Master

105. Which of the following represents the richest and most effective mode of

communication in a team?

A. Recorded webinar

B. Video conferencing

C. Audio conferencing

D. Face-to-face meeting accompanied by a whiteboard session.

106. To launch a product in a foreign country, one needs to pay a facilitation

fee required by the municipal department to get the required no objection

certificate. Going by PMI®

’s code of ethics and professional conduct, one should:

A. Not pay the fee since it amounts to bribe and violates the code.

B. Pay the fee.

C. Check with the legal team whether the fee is justifiable and ethical and then

decide.

D. Revoke the decision to launch the product in a country that asks for such

a fee.

■ Mock Exam I

372

107. Harry and Sally have been fighting for a while on the proposed design options.

Harry thinks Sally’s option will be very difficult to implement and will cost lots of

money upfront. Sally thinks that isn’t the case as some basic components could be

reused from the existing code. She also thinks that Harry is stubborn and refusing

to listen to her justifications. Both approaches askyou to resolve the conflict. You

think that both Harry and Sally have positive intent, so you ask Sally to present a

small prototype that demonstrates her design. You also ask Harry to be patient

and be attentive to what Sally demonstrates and all constructive feedback should

be registered. The conflict resolution technique you followed was:

A. Problem Solving

B. Avoiding

C. Compromising

D. Forcing

108. In a planning poker session, the cards used to provide estimates are numbered as:

A. T-shirt sizes S, M, L, XL, XXL, etc.

B. Odd number 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, etc.

C. Fibonacci series like 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, etc.

D. Arithmetic progression like 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, etc.

109. Richard has recently joined company ABC as a senior designer. While working

on the project, he faintly recollects that he had seen such a design solution in

his ex-company. So he calls up his old buddy and asks him to email the design

document from his previous company to his personal id. Is this action correct?

A. Yes, since Richard is reusing the design that saves time and cost.

B. Yes, since Richard is showing his prowess in networking.

C. No, since this is a violation of intellectual rights and unethical.

D. No, since he should have not still been speaking terms with colleagues in his

ex-company.

110. Which of the following activities does a servant leader NOT do?

A. Remove impediments.

B. Reiterate the vision of the project.

C. Come up with a detailed project plan at the end of the planning poker

session.

D. Help in logistics and facilitation.

■ Mock Exam I

373

111. A team determines its velocity to be 30 story points in a 3-week iteration.

Given that there are 300 stories in the backlog, how long will the project take to

complete?

A. 30 weeks.

B. 30 weeks provided the scope remains unchanged during this period.

C. 30 weeks provided the scope doesn’t change and the estimates don’t

change.

D. 30 weeks provided the scope, estimates and the velocity of the same remains

constant.

112. Richard is tasked with evaluating a few proposal received from vendors. One of

the vendors met Richard over lunch to explain their value proposition and also

handed over a small token of appreciation for Richard’s time. Going by the gift

and entertainments policy in the company, Richard should:

A. Deny the gift from the vendor and tell him that his proposal will be rejected

for trying to bribe him.

B. Accept the gift because it is not expensive.

C. Accept the gift as it is not inappropriate, disclose it in the organization and

continue to fairly assess rest of the proposals.

D. Call up his manager before leaving the meeting to let him decide whether

the gift should be accepted or denied.

113. Which of the following conflict resolution techniques results in a lose-lose

outcome?

A. Problem Solving

B. Avoiding

C. Compromising

D. Forcing

114. Which of the following conflict resolution technique results in a win-lose

outcome?

A. Problem Solving

B. Avoiding

C. Compromising

D. Forcing

■ Mock Exam I

374

115. A team consumes the data produced by the software written by another team.

The ‘producer’ team will be ready on Day 8, but to be on the safe side, the

‘receiver’ team inserts a buffer of 3 days and plans a start on Day 11. These 3 days

between systems are called?

A. Management reserve

B. Feeding buffer

C. Backup

D. Dependency adjustments

116. Planning poker technique is NOT:

A. An estimation technique

B. A group decision-making technique

C. A variation of the Wideband Delphi technique

D. A sprint retrospective technique

117. The Agile team is during the second last stage of the retrospective meeting where

the action items are being decided. Who will take ownership of the action items?

A. The whole team

B. The product owner

C. The Scrum Master

D. Whoever raised the topic in the first place

118. In MoSCoW prioritization technique, ‘S’ and ‘C’ standfor:

A. Should have, could have

B. Shouldn’t have, could have

C. Should have, couldn’t have

D. Shouldn’t have, couldn’t have

119. An Agile coach is tasked on suggesting ways to enhance the velocity of the team.

Which of the following is not an option he states?

A. Remove non-value added tasks from the team.

B. Refactor code and remove technical debt.

C. Ask the customer to stay aloof and not interfere with the team at work.

D. Invest behind devops tools for version control, continuous build and

integration.

120. Which of the following will not help a distributed team?

A. A kickoff meeting at the beginning of the project.

B. Sensitivity and awareness of cultural diversity of the team in multiple locations.

C. Rotations of the team members if travel budget permits.

D. Making teams sit in groups of specialism, like the BA’s together, developers

together, testers together.

© Sumanta Boral 2016 375

S. Boral, Ace the PMI-ACP®

 exam, DOI 10.1007/978-1-4842-2526-4

Mock Exam II

1. ___________ is the minimum set of features in a product that the users can start

using and get benefit without waiting for more.

A. Delighters

B. Story maps

C. Walking skeleton

D. MMF

2. During value-based prioritization of user stories, Wiegers’ technique considers

all the following aspects except

A. Cost

B. Risk

C. Value

D. Testability

3. Which of the following is part of Agile Manifesto?

A. Contract negotiation over following a plan

B. Working software over comprehensive documentation

C. Process and tools over individuals and interactions

D. Responding to change over processes and tools

4. In the 100-point method for prioritization of user stories:

A. Each participant is given a set of 100 stories to prioritize.

B. Participants are given 100 minutes to sort out the prioritization of a list of

stories.

C. Participants are given 100 points that they can randomly allocate to stories

based on their perceived importance to them.

D. Each participant is asked to pick the 4 most important stories and asked to

divide 100 points between them.

■ Mock Exam II

376

5. Which of the following best describes the value of all the future cash inflow and

outflow in today’s value by factoring in the rate of interest?

A. Net Present Value

B. Discounted value

C. Payback value

D. Future value

6. As per the Lean philosophy all of the following are categorized as wastes except:

A. Defects

B. Transport

C. Overprocessing

D. Communication that lacks richness

7. A senior executive appoints a product owner for an Agile team. He explains that

the key responsibility of the product owner is to:

A. Make sure that the Agile team is operating efficiently and effectively.

B. ROI is maximized during every iteration.

C. Team has a sustainable pace and is not getting burned out.

D. The number of escaped defects reaching the customer is as minimal as

possible.

8. While analyzing a risk, the team came up with the following figure. Probability

= 65%, Impact = $1000$, Frequency = once in a week. What is the severity of this

risk?

A. $65

B. $650

C. 0.65

D. 0.00065

9. As per Pareto’s 80/20 principle:

A. 80% of the defects are removed in the last 20% of the time left on the project.

B. 80% of the users use 20% of the features in the product.

C. 80% of the system errors can be removed by resolving 20% of the defects.

D. 80% of the work in the team is done by 20% of the team members.

■ Mock Exam II

377

10. A servant leader:

A. Is aware of his and his team member’s emotions and controls them.

B. Is an expert in people management and lays down ground rules that the

team members must obey.

C. Is attentive to the needs of the team and helps to remove impediments.

D. Monitors and controls affairs of the project by using a lot of metrics that the

team needs to capture and plot on a daily basis.

11. What is the Internal Rate of Return (IRR)?

A. It is a metric that is used to calculate the amount of an investment.

B. It is a metric that is used to calculate the profitability of an investment.

C. It is a metric that is used to determine whether the source of return is from

internal or external sources.

D. It is a metric that is used to compare prevailing interest rates.

12. What is the purpose of a risk burndown graph?

A. Track risk impact over iterations.

B. Track risk probability over iterations.

C. Track risk severity over iterations.

D. Track risk frequency over iterations.

13. Stakeholder management is important for an Agile team because:

A. Having stakeholders that engage and participate in the project is a critical

success factor.

B. Without that there is likely going to be scope creep.

C. They need to be plotted on a power-interest grid.

D. They need to be plotted on an engagement assessment matrix.

14. Which of the following practices if followed persistently and continuously

increases the quality of the product?

A. Information radiators

B. Verification and validation

C. Affinity estimation technique

D. BART analysis

■ Mock Exam II

378

15. Sidky has defined SAMI (Sidky Agile Maturity index) that has five evolutionary

stages of Agile maturity in an organization. In the right sequence, they are as

follows:

A. Collaborative, engaging, integrated, adaptive, encompassing.

B. Collaborative, evolutionary, integrated, adaptive, encompassing.

C. Integrated, collaborative, evolutionary, adaptive, encompassing.

D. Collaborative, evolutionary, integrated, encompassing, adaptive.

16. Choose the most correct response:

A. Two projects A and B have IRR -5% and -12% respectively. While catering for

a budget cut, Project B is likely to get the axe and not Project A.

B. IRR is the interest rate in which NPV of cash flows is equal to zero.

C. ROI of all projects is higher if Agile is used instead of waterfall.

D. Both A and B.

17. An Agile team is busy working with the product owner to shuffle the product

backlog items based on value and risk severities that were identified so far. The

team provides the inputs, but the product owner has the last say on the decisions

made and keeps the accountability. The resulting list is called ___________:

A. Risk register

B. A DEEP backlog

C. Risk-adjusted product backlog

D. Iteration backlog

18. What are the three parameters of the Agile triangle?

A. Value, quality, constraints

B. Cost, time, scope

C. Value, cost, customer satisfaction

D. Value, cost, quality

19. On the branch of a decision tree, you see a decision has a 60% chance of earning

a $1000 profit, but also a 40% chance of a $2000 loss. What is the EMV of this

branch on the decision tree?

A. -$200 (loss)

B. $600 (profit)

C. -$800 (loss)

D. None of the above

■ Mock Exam II

379

20. The Agile team has just completed the sprint review and the feedback on the

product increment was mostly positive, but a few new features have been called

out. What do you think the team should do first after the review meeting?

A. Start implementation for the new features requested.

B. Update the backlog and estimate for the new features requested.

C. Complete stories that were left out in the sprint.

D. Spend time to reflect on currently used processes and how they can be

improved in the retrospective meeting.

21. Bill is a Java programmer and joins an Agile team that uses XP. He is new to Agile,

so he tries to find out the way of working that is prevalent on the team. He is

explained that the code is integrated:

A. Finally, before the planned release date.

B. Many times a day, almost after every check-in.

C. Every Monday, Wednesday and Friday.

D. Once in an iteration when it has been reviewed and unit tested.

22. A product owner decides that the amount of risks in the project has escalated

so much that it does not seem feasible to continue with the project. There is no

visibility of profitability in sight. Termination of such a project is which kind of

risk response?

A. Avoid

B. Mitigate

C. Transfer

D. Accept

23. A user story reads: As a borrower of a book from the library, I would prefer to

search a book quickly.

The user story is not good because:

A. It doesn’t seem to be specific or valuable from the borrower’s standpoint.

B. It does not quantify what ‘quickly’ means. Without a response time it’s

difficult to measure.

C. It is not estimable since the acceptance criteria is not specified.

D. It is too small and not detailed enough.

■ Mock Exam II

380

24. The 4th stage of a retrospective is “Decide what to do.” As a part of this stage:

A. Action items are added to the product backlog and the product owner is

asked to determine the ROI and priority.

B. The Scrum Master takes notes and allocates them to whoever is best skilled

to carry out the action items.

C. The retrospective leader starts the “Helped, Hindered, Hypothesis” activity

to determine if the retrospective itself was useful.

D. Team members self-volunteer to take specific actions from the next sprint itself.

25. Which of the following is the best Agile team?

A. An Agile team with specialists.

B. An Agile team that avoids conflicts.

C. An Agile team that collaborates and self-organizes continuously.

D. An Agile team that has no one to blame if things go wrong.

26. During sprint execution, Wilson notices that a story was missed and needs to be

implemented. What would he do?

A. Quickly estimate, design. and complete the implementation, even if that

means working overtime.

B. Ask the product owner to add the story to the product backlog for future

prioritization and planning.

C. Pick up the item during the retrospective to determine the root cause of why

the item was missed during the planning stage.

D. Extend the iteration deadline to accommodate the missed story.

27. By maintaining a constant iteration length, the team:

A. Establishes an operating rhythm.

B. Creates a predictive delivery schedule where the scope is variable.

C. Allows the team to measure a trend of their velocity, thereby improving

future projections.

D. All of the above.

28. During an iteration planning meeting, the product owner has just read out a

story and provided some initial set of clarifications. The team is now going to use

planning poker to estimate the story. The estimates produced in round one looks

like 1, 2, 3, 2 and 8. What should happen now?

A. Go with 2 since maximum people voted for it.

B. Take the average of the 5 estimates.

C. Take the worst case 8 as the estimate.

D. Have the team members who voted for 1 and 8 explain their rationale and

repeat the voting round.

■ Mock Exam II

381

29. One of the core practices in XP is ‘Small releases’. Following are the advantages

except:

A. Deliver value early and quickly.

B. Mitigate risks of a ‘big-bang’ integration.

C. Adapt to changes incrementally.

D. Limit work in progress.

30. Kaizen is a Lean principle. The literal meaning of the Japanese word Kaizen is:

A. Continuous integration

B. Continuous improvement

C. Frequent validation and verification

D. Billboard

31. Which of the following is the best definition of ‘definition of done’?

A. A term defined when the project is completed and ready to be shipped to

production.

B. A term defined by the team to determine when a user story is completed

and ready for shipping to a customer.

C. A term defined to indicate acceptance of features by the end user.

D. A term defined to indicate when the Scrum team can take credit for their

accomplishment and demo their deliverables.

32. Harry is a member of the Agile team. He is not a tester, but is interested to

randomly check a few things about the system behavior without a lot of up-front

planning. He begins with the charter and spends an hour or so trying different

things that otherwise are not documented as user stories. Harry is conducting:

A. Refactoring

B. Peer reviews

C. Acceptance testing

D. Exploratory testing

33. Which of the following statements is NOT true?

A. It is cheaper and easier to terminate an Agile project midway than a

waterfall-based project.

B. Agile project have a continuous focus on quality and planning.

C. Fixed price contracts are best suited in Agile.

D. There is no need of heavy change management processes to make and track

changes in an Agile project.

■ Mock Exam II

382

34. A looselyengaged stakeholder requests John the Scrum Master, to show him the

latest weekly status report to check the project health and the remaining amount

of work in the project. Instead, John takes the stakeholder to the team wall where

a few pertinent updates are posted continuously. To address the stakeholder’s

query, John specifically points out to

A. Burndown chart

B. Sprint backlog

C. Task board

D. Velocity trend

35. A persona in an Agile project is:

A. The proxy user who can provide requirement in absence of the product

owner.

B. The person who provides acceptance of the product increment at the end of

every iteration.

C. An imaginary representation of a user role to collect requirements from his

or her perspective.

D. An onsite customer or anyone he/she assigns to be co-located with the team

to provide clarifications on the fly.

36. A product roadmap contains all of the following except:

A. Milestones of each release

B. Estimates of epics and themes

C. Contents of each releases

D. Depiction of value-driven delivery to the customer

37. During iteration planning stories are broken down into tasks that are entered into

the iteration backlog. The tasks neither should not be too long nor too small to

cause a tracking overhead. The thumb-rule of the length of each tasks is:

A. 4–16 hours

B. 0–8 hours

C. One story point

D. Less than half a day

38. Which of the following is not a valid reason to update the product backlog?

A. Change in the composition of the development team

B. Addition of new stories or risks

C. Change in priorities

D. Finding from previous sprints

■ Mock Exam II

383

39. Which is the fastest way to generate a lot of good quality requirements?

A. Surveys

B. Facilitated workshops

C. Wisdom of crowd

D. Dot voting

40. Thumb voting is a group decision-making technique. Holding a thumb sideways

indicates:

A. Agreement

B. Disagreement

C. Neutrality

D. Strong support

41. At the end of the iteration, the team observes that they have completed only 50%

of a story that was initially estimated for 12 story points. How many story points

from this story would count toward the team’s velocity?

A. 0

B. 6

C. 12

D. 18

42. The customer has provided a bunch of requirements to the Agile team. But they

are not sure what the collection of the requirements will finally look like. They

asked the team if they could complete the entire design and give them a preview.

Since up-front design is not encouraged, the Agile team instead produced a:

A. Spike

B. Prototype

C. Persona

D. Definition of done

43. ‘Remember the future’ and ‘Prune the product tree’ are examples of ___________

and used to ___________.

A. Estimation techniques, determine relative size of stories

B. Prioritization techniques, determine relative priorities of stories

C. Brainstorming techniques, solve problems

D. Innovation games, collect requirements

■ Mock Exam II

384

44. As per the estimation convergence / cone of uncertainty graph, estimates

produced at the beginning of the project is called ___________ while that near the

end of the project are called ___________.

A. Budget, definitive

B. Ballpark, accurate

C. Rough order of magnitude, definitive

D. Rough order of magnitude, precise

45. During a 3-week iteration, the team completed 3 stories of 5 story points each, 2

stories of 12 story points each and completed 50% of two stories of 14 story points

each. What is the team’s velocity for this iteration?

A. 39

B. 53

C. 67

D. None of the above

46. Apart from story points, which of the following could be used as unit of estimates

for Agile?

A. Calendar days

B. Coffee-cup sizes

C. Person months

D. Feature points

47. Jeremy, an Agile developer practices picks up a story from the sprint backlog. He

begins with writing the automated unit tests before writing the code. Jeremy is

following the practice of:

A. Test-first development

B. Pair programming

C. Continuous integration

D. Feature-driven development

48. Which is the best definition of escaped defect?

A. A defect that has simply escaped the attention of the tester.

B. A defect that should have been caught during exploratory testing.

C. A defect that went undetected and landed with the customer.

D. A defect that unearths inefficiencies in the processes that needs to be

rectified in the next iteration.

■ Mock Exam II

385

49. During iteration planning, the Agile team comes across a story that has an

iteration length that is almost 90% of the velocity of the team. What is the best

suggestion that you can give to the team in this situation?

A. Reject the story since it is not small enough.

B. Split the story.

C. Extend the iteration length.

D. It is not advisable to compare estimates of a story with the team’s velocity.

50. Use the Earned Value Management technique to determine the status of the project.

The parameters are EV = $4000, PV = $5000 and AC = $6000.

A. Project is behind schedule and within budget.

B. Project is behind schedule and has cost overrun.

C. Project is ahead of schedule and within budget.

D. Project is ahead of schedule and has cost overrun.

51. For the same parameters given in the previous question (#50), what is the

Schedule performance index (SPI)?

A. 0.8

B. 0.66

C. 0.83

D. 1.25

52. Richard has been appointed as an Agile coach. The team is newly formed, so

he has to explain a lot of Agile practices. He asks the team to practice Just-InTime (JIT) planning as that is the followed in Agile. What is the main reason that

Richard cites to support the practice of JIT planning?

A. A JIT plan is easier to create and maintain by the project manager.

B. JIT planning helps to accommodate changes far more easily instead of using

change control principles.

C. JIT planning keeps the team on their toes and helps to constantly maintain

focus among the team members.

D. JIT planning helps to keep stakeholders at bay, since they cannot see the

overall picture.

53. The sponsor of an Agile project approaches the Scrum Master and asks him

about the burn rate of the team per sprint. The team consists of 6 members each

of whose billing rate is $50 per hour. Assuming a 40 hour week and an iteration

length of 2 weeks, what is the burn rate per sprint?

A. $36,000

B. $20,000

C. $30,000

D. $24,000

■ Mock Exam II

386

54. An iteration started with 10 user stories to deliver. In the middle of iteration, a

team member got sick and was not available to work. During a daily stand-up

meeting, this was raised to the Scrum Master to seek advice as team thinks they

cannot deliver all 10 user stories in the iteration. What should be the Scrum

Master’s advice to team?

A. Work overtime to catch up on the lost time.

B. Fastrack if possible and extend the iteration.

C. Complete what can be done and the pending items should be put in the

backlog for future iterations.

D. Reduce the scope of iteration from 10 user stories to 8 user stories and

deliver as per the revised commitment.

55. A team’s average velocity is 40 story points per 2-week iteration. There are 600 story

points left in backlog. How many iterations are needed to complete the backlog?

A. 30

B. 25

C. 20

D. 15

56. Who facilitates the sprint review?

A. Sponsor

B. Product owner

C. Anyone from the self-organized team

D. Scrum Master

57. A team’s average velocity is 45 story points per 2-week iteration. There are

490 story points left in backlog. How many weeks are needed to complete the

backlog?

A. 22

B. 20

C. 10

D. 11

58. Affinity estimating is the process of:

A. Averaging the best and worst case estimates.

B. Checking that the stories in the same functional areas are of equivalent

magnitude.

C. Checking that the stories of the same estimated size are of equivalent

complexity.

D. Checking that the stories of the same estimated size are of the same

technology.

■ Mock Exam II

387

59. What does the term “Done Done” mean in Agile projects?

A. Unit testing completed, all tests passed.

B. Accepted by the sponsor.

C. Development done, ready for exploratory testing.

D. Ready for Production release and available to the end user.

60. All tasks that are to be completed before the final release of the product are called:

A. The iteration backlog

B. The project backlog

C. The sprint backlog

D. The product backlog

61. As far as whole-team coaching is concerned, the Agile coach is most active

during:

A. Beginning of the sprint.

B. End of the sprint, during the retrospective.

C. In the middle of the sprint.

D. During sprint planning and retrospectives.

62. Which of the following is an Agile Manifesto value?

A. Individuals and interactions over comprehensive documentation.

B. Working software over following a plan.

C. Customer collaboration over contract negotiation.

D. Working solutions over processes and tools.

63. Agile projects unleash creativity and innovation by:

A. Engaging customers in frequent interactions and shared ownership.

B. Recognizing that individuals are the ultimate source of value and creating

an environment where they can make a difference.

C. Making continuous flow of value our focus.

D. Group accountability for results and shared responsibility for team

effectiveness.

64. Which of the following Agile Manifesto values deals with working closely with

business or client?

A. Individuals and interactions over processes and tools.

B. Working software over comprehensive documentation.

C. Customer collaboration over contract negotiation.

D. Responding to change over following a plan.

■ Mock Exam II

388

65. Which of the following Agile principles shows “Architecture and design emerge

from a collaboration between teams”?

A. The best architectures, requirements and designs emerge from selforganizing teams.

B. Business people and developers must work together daily throughout the

project.

C. Build projects around motivated individuals. Give them the environment

and support they need and trust them to get the job done.

D. Continuous attention to technical excellence and good design enhances

agility.

66. Which of the following artifacts helps to bring product owner and team together

collaboratively?

A. Iteration Plan

B. The Product Backlog

C. The Iteration Backlog

D. Burndown chart

67. During iteration planning meeting, who is responsible to commit to deliver

selected user stories in the iteration?

A. Product Owner

B. Agile project manager

C. Scrum Master

D. The team

68. Which of the following is the least desirable practice in the case of a distributed

team?

A. Setting ground rules that a team in a particular time zone will have to extend

their working hours to ensure overlap.

B. Use collaboration tools and videoconferencing whenever practical.

C. Have some time overlap between remote teams for handoffs and daily

interactions.

D. Maintain common coding rules and tools for continuous integration.

69. What is expected from a traditional Project Manager on Agile projects?

A. People management.

B. Responsible to pick up and estimate user stories for next iteration.

C. Direct team on how to work, track their progress.

D. None of the above.

■ Mock Exam II

389

70. What are the five XP values?

A. Communication, feedback, simplicity, courage and respect

B. Commitment, openness, simplicity, courage and respect

C. Commitment, openness, focus, courage and respect

D. Commitment, feedback, simplicity, courage and respect

71. An Agile leader is planning the seating arrangement for the team. He makes sure

that everyone can see each other. The benefit of such a seating arrangement is

that:

A. The leader will be able to exercise authority.

B. The leader is making optimum use of available space.

C. The team will be able to see what the other person is doing.

D. This helps in osmotic communication.

72. The three pillars of empirical process control are:

A. Planning, Adaption, Retrospective

B. Inspection, Transparency, Adaptation

C. Planning, Inspection, Consistency

D. Collaboration, Value-driven, Kaizen

73. Which of the following is a valid prioritization method for an Agile project?

A. Sidky maturity model

B. Monopoly money

C. Kanban

D. Value stream mapping

74. The daily stand-up meeting was scheduled to start at 9 a.m. However the team

waited till 9:08 a.m. before all participants came into the meeting room. Morning

greetings exchanged between the participants. By then the clock showed

9:12 a.m. There was an issue reported by a team members and team gets into

brainstorming and spent another 10 minutes. Finally, the meeting was over at

9:37 a.m.

Calculate the process cycle efficiency of this process.

A. 73%

B. 57%

C. 52%

D. 68%

■ Mock Exam II

390

75. What should be the severity order of the following four risks in descending order?

Risk A has an impact of 0.3 and a probability of 0.2.

Risk B has an impact of 0.4 and a probability of 0.2.

Risk C has an impact of 0.3 and a probability of 0.5.

Risk D has an impact of 0.5 and a probability of 0.8.

A. D, C, B and A

B. D, B, C and A

C. D, C, A, B

D. D, B, A, C

76. Agile projects deliver reliable results by:

A. Engaging customers in frequent interactions and shared ownership.

B. Recognizing that individuals are the ultimate source of value and creating

an environment where they can make a difference.

C. Making continuous flow of value our focus.

D. Group accountability for results and shared responsibility for team

effectiveness.

77. One of the key stakeholders suggested changing the priority of a user story by

making it number one on the backlog. The story was earlier placed third on the

prioritized backlog. He is very influential and powerful in the department. How

should you act on the suggestion made?

A. Accept the suggestion, change the prioritization order and inform all

stakeholders.

B. Simply decline. Inform him that product backlog has already been

prioritized and no more changes can be made.

C. Inform and discuss this with product owner.

D. Explain why this is placed at number 3 in backlog and importance of other

top user stories to deliver early.

78. Which artifact is the best to display when releases of the product will be ready

and what all features will be included in those releases?

A. Developer team

B. Product backlog

C. Product owner

D. Product roadmap

■ Mock Exam II

391

79. There are anumber of projects running where your company is losing money.

To reduce the losses, company decides to review and terminate a project.

Consequently, 3 projects were shortlisted for review. Which project should be

terminated first?

Project 1 has an internal rate of return of -7%

Project 2 has an internal rate of return of -3%

Project 3 has an internal rate of return of -5%

A. Terminate project 1

B. Terminate project 2

C. Terminate project 3

D. Terminate all projects, all have negative IRR and are losing money

80. To track and report the status of schedule and cost, which tool is best to use?

A. S-curve graph

B. Gantt chart

C. Burndown and burnup chart

D. Project plan

81. You called a TV engineer to repair your faulty TV set. You spent 10 minutes

explaining the problem with the TV set. It took 4 hours for the engineer to repair

the TV set and then you take another 10 minutes to check if the issue is fixed or

not before the engineer leaves the site.

In the whole exercise, what is the process cycle efficiency for the engineer and

you? Assume that the engineer only values the repair time, whereas you value

only the time explaining the issue and checking the TV set.

A. 92.3% for engineer, 7.7% for you

B. 93.7% for engineer, 6.3% for you

C. 95.8% for engineer, 4.2% for you

D. 98.3% for engineer, 1.7% for you

82. Agile project charter is different than s traditional project charter because:

A. Agile projects do not require a charter.

B. While creating an Agile project charter, what approach to be used is not

clear.

C. The scope is less clearly defined on Agile projects.

D. Agile projects typically are small, so a small charter is enough.

■ Mock Exam II

392

83. Why is the presence of the customer representative made mandatory in Agile

projects?

A. The customer representative is the main judge for business value.

B. The project leader needs to build personal rapport with the customer

representative.

C. The customer representative can dictate the project plan and suggest course

corrections.

D. All of the above.

84. When an item is blocked, Kanban teams gather around and collectively work to

remove the obstacle. This is prioritized over picking up any new piece of work

and ensures continuity of flow through the system. This technique is called:

A. Collective ownership

B. Self-organization

C. Swarming

D. Group decision-making

85. All are the following are helpful when performing risk management except:

A. Risk-Based Spikes

B. Risk-Adjusted Backlogs

C. Risk Burndown Charts

D. Risk Owner

86. During a project audit, it is determined that the vendor is artificially inflating the

estimates of the user stories. They are on a time-and-materials contract, so the

longer they stay on in the project, the more revenue they generate. On getting to

know such a practice, what should you do?

A. Report to PMI®

.

B. Halve the estimates produced.

C. Report the unethical conduct to the appropriate parties.

D. Drag the vendor to the court.

87. Wideband Delphi technique is best described as:

A. A group-based estimation approach

B. A value-driven estimation approach

C. A negotiating estimation approach

D. A team-based estimation approach

■ Mock Exam II

393

88. Story points are used as one of way to estimate Agile projects. These story point

estimates are:

A. Absolute

B. Relative

C. The sum of the features in release

D. A fraction of the velocity of the team

89. Planning poker allows multiple rounds of estimates.Which other technique

allows a similar approach?

A. Shu-Ha-Ri

B. Wideband Delphi

C. Triple nickel

D. Circle of questions

90. On an Agile project, you get to see estimates of a user story expressed as:

A. Completed by November 15th 2016.

B. Completed within 3 months from when the user story was started.

C. Completed before the start of the next user story.

D. Completed within 40 to 60 hours.

91. On a burndown chart, the top of the bar moved lower from one iteration to the

next. What does that imply?

A. The team corrected some of the underestimates of the past.

B. The team completed work in the previous iteration.

C. Scope got added into the backlog.

D. Scope got removed from the backlog.

92. Which of the following qualifies to be a good MMF?

A. An online grocery shopping cart that allows you to view and save the items

you want to buy and complete the purchase process.

B. A bicycle having 2 wheels along with supporter, decorative lights, a water

bottle space.

C. A cell phone that allows you to make and receive calls, click photos and

allows you to connect with social media and other Internet world.

D. A camera that allows you to take photos and then access the Web to add

descriptions and share them with friends.

■ Mock Exam II

394

93. It is observed that the bottom of the bar in the burndown chart is raised above

the X-axis. What does that mean?

A. Scope has beenremoved.

B. Scope has beenadded.

C. This could be a mistake in plotting.

D. Team is tracking ahead of the estimated velocity.

94. Drawing a tree, the participants are asked to add related features as leaves closer

to the trunks and dependent features higher on the tree. This activity is called:

A. Leaves and trunks

B. Features and dependencies

C. Define the scope tree

D. Prune the product tree

95. During an internal project audit your project is marked as RED and highlighted

as noncompliant as it does not have a detailed plan. You are asked to prepare the

project plan and submit within 3 days instead of having plan for next 2 iterations.

What should you do?

A. Ask the team to create a plan based on experience.

B. Ignore them, as this is an internal audit and has no adverse effect on you

and the project.

C. Conduct a meeting with them explaining the Agile methodology and

progressive planning approach.

D. Contact your management and ask for project exception from the audit.

96. You are into the 6th month of the project, which has an estimated schedule

completion of 1year from start. Referring to the latest project status report

submitted by you, your sponsor wants to understand why you show that the

project will be completed a month earlier than the schedule project completion

date. What data should you present in support of your report?

A. Velocity

B. Risk burndown chart

C. Cumulative Flow diagram

D. Risk-based spikes

97. In an Agile project charter, you will not find the:

A. Detailed project scope

B. Estimated project cost

C. Expected ROI

D. Project objective

■ Mock Exam II

395

98. In a control chart, a process is expected to be out of control:

A. When the measured parameter is below the lower control limit.

B. When the measured parameter is above the upper control limit.

C. When the rule of seven is violated.

D. Any of the above.

99. Kanban boards reflect WIP limits against each stage of the workflow. The

drawbacks of WIP include the following:

A. Hides bottlenecks.

B. Results in context switching.

C. Delayed feedback.

D. All of the above.

100. Project cost calculation must include:

A. Total cost = (Time X Resource rate) + other project costs

B. Total cost = (Team velocity X average labor rate) + additional project costs

C. Total cost = (average team size X average labor rate) + non-labor project

costs

D. Total cost = (team size X hourly rate) + additional project costs

101. You are managing a project and the labor cost per month for the whole team is

30,000 USD. The fixed cost for infrastructure procurement is estimated at 10,000

USD. Based on prioritized product backlog items and team velocity, the team will

need 20 iterations of 1 month each to complete the work. Post backlog items are

successfully delivered and a 1-month warranty period is requested for the team

to remain intact before the project is closed and the team released. What would

be the total cost of the project until completion?

A. $5,90,000

B. $6,60,000

C. $6,30,000

D. $6,40,000

102. What do you expect from a servant leader?

A. Tracks tasks on the Kanban board.

B. Empowers the team.

C. Collects requirements and gather user stories.

D. Hosts the iteration review meeting.

■ Mock Exam II

396

103. Which of the following is not a characteristic of high performing Agile teams?

A. Constructive disagreement

B. Plan driven

C. Empowered

D. Self-organizing

104. Which of the following is not appropriate to be discussed in a daily stand-up

meeting?

A. The application developer is on vacation, so the code changes are on hold.

B. Build failed for the transaction validator. This is expected to be fixed by

today evening.

C. Code upgrade for the payment module is completed.

D. That configuration fix made by Harry last week has caused a significant

improvement in our batch jobs. However there is room for a bit more

improvement.

105. An Agile coach is building a high-performance team. Which of the following

techniques can she adopt?

A. Make all decisions on behalf of the team, saving their time.

B. Demonstrate expertize by solving problems hands-on.

C. Performing individual coaching interventions in the middle of the sprint

when team members approach with problems.

D. Intervene at every possible hint of conflict within the team.

106. In a distributed team, which is the most effective tool to use for communication

between team members?

A. Email

B. Wiki

C. Skype

D. Audio playback

107. A product owner MUST attend a planning poker estimation session. Without his

presence:

A. The session will not be moderated.

B. The team will have a tendency to overestimate.

C. The team will not get the necessary clarifications regarding the stories

getting estimated.

D. There will be no timekeeping.

■ Mock Exam II

397

108. You are managing a complex program across the globe and team members are

from different regions. You have a large number of team members working on

projects and reporting to the respective project manager and then each project

manager is reporting to you. Currently you have 10 different project managers

on a program. To have an effective communication, how many communication

channels will be there between you and project managers?

A. 10

B. 45

C. 55

D. 110

109. Which of the following Emotional Intelligence pairings is correct?

A. Self-management relates to self-control.

B. Self-awareness relates to empathy.

C. Social skills relate to influence.

D. Social awareness relates to self-confidence.

110. Which is a correct pairing of adaptive leadership and team phases?

A. Directingand Storming, Coaching and Forming, Supporting and Norming,

Delegating and Performing

B. Directingand Forming, Coaching and Storming, Supporting and Norming,

Delegating and Performing

C. Coaching and Forming, Supporting and Storming, Directing and Norming,

Delegating and Performing

D. Coaching and Forming, Supporting and Storming, Directing and Delegating,

Performing and Norming

111. You should be flexible while leading and managinga team as an Agile coach

and improve emotional intelligence. There are different aspects of emotional

intelligence, divided into quadrants. What are they?

A. Self, Team, Regulate, Recognize

B. Self, Others, Regulate, Optimize

C. Self, Team, Regulate, Optimize

D. Self, Others, Regulate, Recognize

112. Which of the following is not a Kanban principle?

A. Limit WIP

B. Visualize work

C. Make processes explicit

D. Limit feedback loops

■ Mock Exam II

398

113. Which of the following is not a Lean principle?

A. Eliminate waste

B. Empower the team

C. Optimize learning

D. Defer decision

114. You are a program manager and taking an interview for a PMP certified project

manager position in your organization. This position is for a different project that

will be led by a different program manager. During the interview process, you

find the person violating the standards of PMI®

 code of ethics and professional

conduct. However, you find him a suitable candidate for the position. What you

should do?

A. Confront the person.

B. Report this to PMI®

 to get it appropriately investigated, as you have a

suspicion, but no concrete evidence.

C. Ignore it and do not recommend him to be hired him for the project

manager position.

D. Ignore it and recommend him for hiring as he will not be working with you,

so it is of no harm to you.

115. What are the success criteria for a methodology while performing process

analysis?

A. The project got stopped, sponsorship remained intact and the team would

work the same way again.

B. The project got stopped, leadership remained intact and the team would

work the same way again.

C. The project got shipped, sponsorship remained intact and the team would

work the same way again.

D. The project got shipped, leadership remained intact and the team would

work the same way again.

116. One thing to avoid when choosing a new Agile practice over an existing process is:

A. Accepting the claims of new practice without validation.

B. Taking time to research the validity of the benefits claimed for the new

practice.

C. Testing the approach on a small scale before committing to it on the project.

D. Discontinuing the activities that have led to the underlying problems we

want to address.

■ Mock Exam II

399

117. In focus on / focus off activity, what is focused on rather than an argument?

A. Inquiry

B. Conversation

C. Dialogue

D. Understanding

118. As per principle of systems thinking, Agile works well when a project is:

A. Highly-complex requirements and highly-complex technology

B. Low-complex requirements and low-complex technology

C. Highly-complex requirements and highly-complex technology

D. Medium-complex requirements and medium-complex technology

119. An Agile team’s velocity is 18. The team is referring to the following stories in

priority order on the product backlog:

Story 1 - 4 Points

Story 2 - 1 Points

Story 3 - 5 Points

Story 4 - 2 Points

Story 5 - 13 Points

Story 6 - 5 Points

Story 7 - 5 Points

What is the best choice of stories for the next iteration assuming that stories

cannot be split any further?

A. Story 1, 2, 3, 4, 6

B. Story 1, 2, 5

C. Story 1, 2, 3, 4

D. Story 3, 5

120. Which of the following is not a good idea to have in a brainstorming session?

A. Send meeting invites with a clear agenda in advance.

B. Have an experienced facilitator lead the session.

C. Allow people to vent their frustrations and criticisms openly.

D. Have a diverse group so as to consider many different perspectives.

© Sumanta Boral 2016 401

S. Boral, Ace the PMI-ACP®

 exam, DOI 10.1007/978-1-4842-2526-4

1. What are the core values of the PMI®

 code of ethics?

A. Responsibility, Respect, Fairness, Truth

B. Responsibility, Respect, Fairness, Honesty

C. Accountability, Integrity, Respect, Fairness

D. Accountability, Responsibility, Respect, Honesty

2. Kano, Wiegers’ and MoSCOW are techniques used for:

A. Disaggregation

B. Risk analysis

C. Value-based prioritization

D. Collecting requirements from customers

3. The letters V, S and T in the acronym INVEST (that is used to describe user

stories) stands for?

A. Valuable, small, testable

B. Valuable, smart, time-bound

C. Verifiable, small, testable

D. Valuable, specific, timely

4. An Agile coach is suggesting ways for the team to increase their velocity. Which

of the suggestions are valid?

A. Increase headcount of the team if budget permits.

B. Engage the customer closely, if possible let him/her be co-located with rest

of the team.

C. Remove technical debt by refactoring code continuously.

D. All of the suggestions above are valid.

Mock Exam III

■ Mock Exam III

402

5. Team members are observed to be frequently conflicting with each other, even

on petty issues. Referring to Bruce Tuckman's team formation model, at which

stage do you think the team is in?

A. Forming

B. Storming

C. Norming

D. Adjourning

6. During an iteration, the team has committed to deliver 20 story points. As the

end of the iteration nears, it appears that 4 story points cannot be completed

during the iteration. Which option is the team most likely to exercise?

A. Extend the iteration by a few days.

B. Relax the definition of done.

C. Terminate the sprint, because the estimated velocity cannot be achieved.

D. Complete whatever is possible and carry over the balance to the product

backlog.

7. Referring to the Agile planning onion, which of these are in the correct

sequence?

A. Strategy, product, portfolio, iteration, daily

B. Portfolio, product, release, iteration, daily

C. Portfolio, release, product, iteration, daily

D. Portfolio, daily, strategy, iteration, release

8. Midway during an iteration, a team member had to go on emergency leave for

personal reasons. The team is on the verge of missing the committed sprint goal.

What should be the course of action now?

A. Agile teams are self-organized, so the others should rally around and

makeup for the absent team member.

B. Agile teams are self-empowered, so they should remove the scope from the

sprint goal.

C. Agile teams are cross-functional, so the Scrum Master should help in coding

and testing activities.

D. Agile teams maintain sustainable pace, so they deliver what is possible

during the sprint and leave the rest to be put back into the product backlog.

9. What are the first three steps to conduct a retrospective?

A. Set the stage, gather data, generate insights.

B. Gather the team, brainstorm, make decisions.

C. Introduce, collaborate, actions.

D. Set the stage, generate data, gather insights.

■ Mock Exam III

403

10. Which of the following statements related to different levels of coaching are true?

A. Whole team coaching happens in the middle of the sprint, while individual

coaching happens at the beginning and end of the sprint.

B. Whole team coaching happens at the planning stage of the sprint, while

individual coaching can happen throughout the whole sprint.

C. Whole team coaching happens in the planning and retrospective sessions of

the sprint, while individual coaching happens at the middle of the sprint.

D. Whole team coaching happens throughout the whole sprint, while

individual coaching can happen at the middle of the sprint.

11. The formula for Little's Law states:

A. WIP = Lead Time * Throughput.

B. WIP = Lead Time / Throughput.

C. WIP = Lead Time + Throughput.

D. Higher the WIP, greater is the flow through the system.

12. An Agile team agrees on a 3-week iteration and a planned velocity of 40 story

points per iteration. The team starts with a backlog of 400 story points. In the

middle of the project, 40 story points get removed and an additional 120 story

points get added. How long will the project team take to complete the project?

A. 39 weeks

B. 36 weeks

C. 33 weeks

D. 36 weeks provided the average velocity of the team remains at 40 throughout

the project

13. Spikes are conducted to:

A. Mitigate risks

B. Make better estimates

C. Gain confidence

D. All of the above

14. Who can terminate a sprint midway?

A. Product owner

B. Scrum Master

C. Development team

D. Anyone in the Scrum team, but not someone who is outside the team

■ Mock Exam III

404

15. Sequence the following in descending order of size:

A. Themes, tasks, stories

B. Epics, features, stories, sub-stories

C. Epics, stories, tasks, subtasks

D. Feature, tasks, stories

16. Lyssa Adkins has provided some recommendations to follow during one-on-one

coaching. Which of the following is not one of them?

A. Meet team members a half-step ahead

B. Partner with functional managers

C. Create positive regard

D. Feedback and follow-up

17. “We are going too slow. Let us remove the lower priority stories #12 and #23 from

the backlog.” Who do you think has the right of saying this?

A. The development team since they are observing the velocity trends.

B. The Scrum Master since he facilitates the daily Scrum meetings and needs

to escalate the impediments to the product owner.

C. The Product Owner since he needs to balance ROI and determine what gets

delivered when.

D. The Project Manager since his job is to track scope, time and cost.

18. How doAgile teams achieve knowledge sharing?

A. Through team participating in all ceremonies.

B. Through practices like pair programming and continuous integration.

C. Through use of osmotic communication and technologies across virtual teams.

D. All of the above.

19. The vertices of the Agile triangle are labeled as:

A. Quality, Value, Constraints

B. Quality, Scope, Time

C. Quality, Value, Scope

D. Time, Cost,Scope

20. Which of the following is NOT a criterion for determining the length of an

iteration for an Agile team?

A. Maintaining focus and sense of urgency

B. Length of the largest story in the release

C. Risk and uncertainty in the requirement

D. Overhead of iterating

■ Mock Exam III

405

21. A story map is meant to show the stories that are to be delivered over time. The

time parameter is shown in the horizontal (X) axis. What is there on the vertical

(Y) axis?

A. Priority of the story.

B. Estimate of the story.

C. ROI of the story.

D. None of the above.

22. ________ is a low-fidelity prototype that shows a mockup for a set of screen,

containing the basic layout of the different widgets on it.

A. Persona

B. Wireframe

C. Spikes

D. Story map

23. A value stream map used to show:

A. Release date and mapping to business benefits.

B. Product backlog items mapping to risk.

C. Current process flow.

D. Estimates per user story in product backlog.

24. The velocity of a Scrum team is observed to be slightly below the average velocity

computed over the last three sprints. The Scrum Master is concerned and asks

the team to reflect and come up with a corrective action. Which do you think is a

valid action?

A. All stories needs to be reestimated to arrive at better estimates.

B. Redo the definition of story point.

C. Increase the length of the iteration.

D. There is no need to be overly concerned. Such variations are naturally going

to happen.

25. Which of the following is not a valid statement in the Agile Manifesto?

A. Individuals and interactions over processes and tools.

B. Working software over comprehensive documentation.

C. Customer negotiation over contract collaboration.

D. Responding to change over following a plan.

■ Mock Exam III

406

26. A distributed Agile team is more likely to use __________.

A. Work breakdown structure

B. An electronic Kanban board for tracking work in progress

C. A command and control style of leadership

D. A project manager to monitor and control day-to-day tasks.

27. Agile contracts are characterized by:

A. Ability to define scope upfront.

B. Ability to squeeze the vendor to do more for less.

C. Ability to respond to change without the need of change control procedures.

D. Ability to deliver by a fixed time and at a fixed cost.

28. All of the following hinder effective communication in a team space EXCEPT:

A. Teams seated by their skillsets, like developers together, testers together, etc.

B. Information radiators that have not been regularly updated.

C. Developers using headphones to listen to music.

D. Developers using webcams for communicating with their distant team

members.

29. One uses “shuttle” diplomacy by carrying thoughts from one group to the other

until they are able to de-escalate the conflict situation. At which level of conflicts

do we see the use of shuttle diplomacy?

A. Level 1: Problem to solve

B. Level 2: Disagreement

C. Level 3: Contest

D. Level 4: Crusade

30. Bill and Harry belong to a XP team and are paired up for a programming session.

They pick up a story from the backlog and observe the acceptance criteria

mentioned at the back of the story card. They code the acceptance test cases first

and then write their modules in such a way to make the test cases pass. Which

technique are they using?

A. Continuous integration

B. Peer code reviews

C. Test first development

D. Refactoring

■ Mock Exam III

407

31. The __________ is the summation of labor costs for the team. This is the cost that

the team incurs during each iteration.

A. Planned Value

B. Burn rate

C. Earned value

D. Indirect cost

32. Sailboat, 20/20 vision and prune the product tree are innovation games that Agile

teams use to:

A. Collect requirements

B. Determine release plan

C. Perform retrospective

D. Perform estimation

33. All of the following are true about ground rules EXCEPT:

A. They are abided by all team members.

B. They are unwritten rules.

C. They set clear expectations of what is or is not acceptable behavior.

D. They are enforced by the Agile coach and all team members have to follow

them.

34. A Kanban board reflects columns marked with a WIP limit of 5 for analysis and 7

for coding. This means that

A. There are 5 analysts and 7 developers on the team.

B. Coding cannot start until all the 5 work items are done with analysis.

Similarly testing cannot start until all 7 are finished coding.

C. The team can progress on a maximum of 5 work items for analysis and 7

work items for coding at any time. Any work item beyond that needs to wait.

D. It should take a maximum of 5 days to complete analysis and 7 days to

complete coding for a work item. Anything beyond that signifies that the

work item is too complex and it must be further broken down.

35. A team member, while trying to gather more details around a user story, is not

able to get hold of a particular user. He has attempted several times, but seems

like the user is unable to provide his time to the team member. What should the

team member do first?

A. Escalate to the product owner and ask him to appoint a proxy.

B. Escalate to the Scrum Master as he is supposed to remove the impediments.

C. Escalate to the Team during the daily stand-up meeting.

D. Remove the item from the backlog and continue with the rest.

■ Mock Exam III

408

36. The __________ is responsible for updating the Task board.

A. Tester (when test cases pass)

B. The Team (as they progress)

C. The Scrum Master (after the daily Scrum)

D. The Product owner (after the sprint review)

37. A senior member of the team Henry is negotiating with a third-party vendor on

the applicable rates on the contract. Henry is passionately hearing the vendor’s

concerns and trying to relate to it. Which skill is Henry using?

A. Active listening

B. Servant leadership

C. Emotional intelligence

D. Empathy

38. One of the very important stories in the sprint backlog has not passed acceptance

testing. The whole team has swarmed around and tried to isolate the defect, but

they have not yet been successful. The sprint is almost coming to an end and the

review is in another 2 days from now. It is unlikely that the ‘definition of done’

will be met for this particular user story. What should the team members be

thinking of now?

A. As the story is very important, they should extend the sprint deadline and

defer the sprint review meeting.

B. They should deliver the software as is (with the story that failed) and ask the

customer not to use it, until it is fixed in the next sprint.

C. They should consult with the Agile coach on the best way forward.

D. They should deliver only the stories that have met the definition of done. All

other stories that are incomplete should be removed from delivery.

39. It seems that the number of escaped defects has been rising over the last 3

iterations. As a Scrum Master what should you do?

A. Identify which developer(s) is/are not doing things properly and schedule

one-on-one meetings with them.

B. Do nothing, but wait to vent it out in the upcoming retrospective meeting.

C. Ask the team to print out the chart showing the escaped defects trend and

post it on the team wall.

D. Get the team to address the issue collectively.

■ Mock Exam III

409

40. You have been appointed as an Agile coach in a fairly large department. On an

initial survey you notice that there are several projects implementing Agile in

their own way and sometimes in different ways. Their definition of story points

and velocities are also different. The team members also have varied maturity

levels. What should you be doing?

A. Ignore. You have been recently appointed and it will take some time to

understand the ways of working in different teams.

B. Express no concern. It is completely acceptable that the team implements

Agile and tailor it in a way that suits them the best.

C. Express deep concern. Pull up the Agile PMO and ask them why they have

not been able to address the issue of inconsistency.

D. Express deep concern. Ask each of the teams to email you their metrics

every Friday morning.

41. The keyword SMART is used to denote attributes of a well-defined user story.

The letters S and T stand for?

A. Smart, testable

B. Specific, testable

C. Short, timeboxed

D. Specific, time-bound

42. In Agile, prioritization is done on the basis of:

A. Risk

B. Value

C. A and B

D. Complexity

43. Which of the following are NOT benefits of pair programming?

A. Collaboration within the team

B. Collective code ownership

C. Feedback on coding on the fly

D. Refactoring

44. Agile teams have large walls where they display artifacts and different metrics

showing progress. These are collectively called:

A. Caves and commons

B. Information refrigerator

C. Information radiator

D. Status reports

■ Mock Exam III

410

45. Which of the following is NOT a group-based technique used to arrive at a

decision?

A. Nominal group technique

B. Delphi

C. Control charts

D. Wisdom of crowd

46. Undocumented knowledge that team members gather by working in close

proximity to each other is called:

A. Informative workspace

B. Expert in earshot

C. Confidential information

D. Tacit knowledge

47. Which of the following is NOT a core practice in XP?

A. Test-Driven Development

B. Continuous integration

C. Value Stream mapping

D. Collective Code ownership

48. Which of the following are valid project selection methods?

A. Discounted payback period, Net present value, ROI, Benefit cost ratio

B. Planning poker, Benefit cost ratio, internal rate of return, payback period

C. Monopoly money, feasibility, value-based prioritization

D. ROI, NPV, IRR, MMF

49. Earned value management technique can be used on Agile projects, especially

for tracking release. EVM is an example of:

A. Lagging metric

B. Leading metric

C. Both A and B

D. None of the above.

50. Velocity is __________ across iterations for a given team on a given project.

Velocity is __________ across teams or projects.

A. Comparable, comparable

B. Comparable, not comparable

C. Not comparable, comparable

D. Not comparable, not comparable

■ Mock Exam III

411

51. During the first half of the iteration planning meeting, the product owner mentions

that Feature A should be implemented since it has the highest ROI. The team argues

that they think that Feature B would give the maximum benefit to a section of users

as they found out during previous conversations. What should happen now?

A. The team should use the ‘force’ technique of conflict resolution and go with

the Feature Benefit.

B. The team should use the ‘smoothing’ technique of conflict resolution.

C. The team should use the ‘withdraw’ technique of conflict resolution and go

with Feature A, since the product owner has the last say as far as the ROI of a

feature is concerned.

D. The team should use the ‘compromise’ technique of conflict resolution and

do a little bit of both Features A and B.

52. The responsibility of creating the product roadmap primarily rests with:

A. The product owner

B. The empowered team

C. The Scrum Master

D. The onsite customer

53. The responsibility of fixing defects found during acceptance testing lies with:

A. The programmer who coded it.

B. The programmer who paired and reviewed the code.

C. Anyone on the team.

D. A subject matter expert.

54. The Product owner declined an invite for the sprint planning meeting indicating

his unavailability. What should happen now?

A. The Sprint planning meeting cannot happen without the PO, so it should be

rescheduled.

B. The Scrum Master should substitute for the PO and refer to the existing

Product Backlog. Any questions from the team should be taken offline.

C. The team is self-organized, so they should determine the sprint backlog

themselves.

D. The sprint should be used only for spikes and technical tasks instead of

business features.

55. One of the values of XP is collective ownership. What does the team collectively

NOT own?

A. Quality of the deliverable.

B. Code.

C. Product backlog.

D. Coding conventions.

■ Mock Exam III

412

56. The team is unable to decide whether it makes sense to buy an off-the-shelf from

the vendor or go about building it themselves. Both options have its merits and

demerits. As a Scrum Master what would be your recommendation to the team?

A. Consult with the product owner of what he is willing to sponsor.

B. Conduct a spike to evaluate both options.

C. Do a fist of five voting.

D. None of the above.

57. As per Stacey’s matrix, Agile projects are best suited where there is:

A. Agile projects can be applied in all of the below situations.

B. High disagreement on requirements and high uncertainty of technology.

C. High agreement on requirements and high certainty of technology.

D. Moderate agreement on requirements and some uncertainty on technology.

58. As an outcome of the team retrospective, the team members decide to procure

the Teamcity software to automate their build process. This is an example of:

A. Agile tooling

B. Refactoring

C. Information radiator

D. Emotional intelligence

59. If an XP coach asks the team to be DRY, he/she means that:

A. Team should check-in and integrate their code many times a day.

B. Team should not duplicate the same code at multiple places.

C. Team should follow test-driven deployment.

D. Team should be disciplined in their practices.

60. A release burndown chart should show a downward trend to show progress.

However, if there is an upward movement, it implies that:

A. One or more team members is absent and the team has slowed down.

B. This is a glitch in data collection and it should be fixed during charting.

C. User stories were added to the backlog.

D. The team has been working on analysis, spikes and prototypes more than

delivering business functionality in recent times.

■ Mock Exam III

413

61. The team has identified a new stakeholder of the project. However, the

stakeholder has low power and low influence. The stakeholder requests the

Scrum Master for an invite in the daily stand-up meeting such that he catches up

with the latest of the project. The Scrum Master:

A. Agrees, but tells the stakeholder that he needs to participate actively in the

meeting.

B. Agrees, but tells the stakeholder that he needs to listen in, but not allowed to

speak in the meeting.

C. Disagrees, but tells the stakeholder to wait for the next review meeting to see

if his expectations have been fulfilled or not.

D. Ignores the request stating that this is not a legitimate request.

62. The Scrum team is in a formative stage. It is learned that the team will not be colocated. What are the options available to the team?

A. Be persistent with the demand of co-location without which the project will

fail.

B. Invest in collaboration tools and technologies like interactive chats, audio

and video conferences.

C. Explore possibility of rotating team members such that each gets a flavor of

the culture and working at the other location.

D. B or C.

63. During a sprint planning session, the team is looking at the following stories from

the backlog sorted in descending order of priority. They also have the estimate of

each story as mentioned below.

Story A - 12 story points

Story B - 6 story points

Story C - 2 story points

Story D - 5 story points

Story E - 7 story points

Story F - 15 story points

Story G - 8 story points

Story H - 6 story points

Story I - 2 story points

Assuming the team velocity of 20 story points and that no story can be further

split, what is the most likely backlog for each sprint?

A. Sprint 1: ABC, Sprint 2: DEG, Sprint 3: FI, Sprint 4: H

B. Sprint 1: ABC, Sprint 2: DEF, Sprint 3: GHI

C. Sprint 1: ABC, Sprint 2: DEG, Sprint 3: F, Sprint 4: HI

D. None of the above

■ Mock Exam III

414

64. If you happen to hire for a new Agile team, you should prefer:

A. Developers

B. Specialists in the technologies to be used

C. Generalists with cross-functional skillsets

D. People who exhibit adaptive leadership skills

65. During the sprint planning session, the PO asks who will be developing

a particular story, because he would like to have a conversation with that

developer privately. What would happen?

A. A developer comes forward and volunteers.

B. It is not known who will develop a story at the planning stage. But this will

be reflected in the task board during the iteration when the story is picked

up for development.

C. Ask the PO to attend the daily stand-up meeting to keep a tab on who is

working on which story.

D. The Scrum Master should be providing the requested information to the PO.

66. Levels two, three and five in Lea’s conflict model represent:

A. Disagreement, contest, world war

B. Problem to solve, contest, world war

C. Problem to solve, contest, crusade

D. Disagreement, contest, crusade

67. All of the following are brainstorming techniques except:

A. Quiet Writing

B. Round-Robin

C. Free-for-all

D. Triple nickels

68. All of the following are techniques to gathering data during retrospectives except:

A. Mad, sad, glad

B. Timeline

C. Circle of questions

D. Team radar

■ Mock Exam III

415

69. During the iteration planning meeting, the Agile teams commit to deliver stories

A, B, C and D having estimates of 20, 12, 8 and 4 story points. However the team

could complete stories A, B, C and 50% of D. What is the team velocity?

A. 38

B. 40

C. 42

D. 44

70. ESVP is used during ________ while Weigers’ method is used during ________.

A. Retrospectives, estimation

B. Retrospectives, prioritization

C. Meeting etiquettes, prioritization

D. Planning, estimation

71. The current size of the Agile team is increasing from 9 to 15. As a result, it is

observed that the team is unable to complete their daily stand-up meetings

within the stipulated 15 minutes. As a Scrum Master, which option out of the

following are you most likely to explore?

A. Extend the meeting from 15 to 25 minutes to accommodate everyone.

B. Ask team members to talk about blockers only and leave the other two

questions.

C. Ask only the senior team members to talk.

D. Divide the team into two subteams and have two separate daily stand-ups.

The team division should be such that they are mostly independent.

72. Agile teams are self-organized and empowered to make decisions. Which of the

following core value in the Agile Manifesto best relates to this?

A. Individuals and interactions over processes and tools.

B. Working software over comprehensive documentation.

C. Responding to change over following a plan.

D. None of the above.

73. The steps of TDD are as follows:

A. Write code, test code, fix defect, retest

B. Write test, write code, refactoring

C. Green, red, refactor

D. Write code, refactor and test

■ Mock Exam III

416

74. The sponsor of an Agile project:

A. Represents the user community

B. Defines the product roadmap

C. Approves the project plan

D. Provides funding for the project

75. Amplify learning is a principle of ________, while system metaphors are used in

________.

A. Lean, XP

B. Kanban, Scrum

C. DSDM, XP

D. Scrum, Lean

76. Although the acceptance test cases have passed, the team realizes that the code

violates a few coding standards, which might make it difficult to maintain over

the long term. This is because of some last-minute tactical changes done by the

team to complete the user story. Such an issue is an example of:

A. Violation of definition of done.

B. Introduction of technical debt.

C. Violation of ground rules.

D. Violation of collective ownership.

77. In the hardening sprint, one expects the team to:

A. Continue adding features that add business value

B. Complete testing of whatever is there and make it ready for deployment to

production

C. Refactor the code

D. Perform process improvements as per the last retrospective

78. As time progresses, in an Agile project you expect:

A. Cycle time to be shorter

B. Estimates to be shorter

C. Velocity to be shorter

D. Iterations to be shorter

■ Mock Exam III

417

79. The ________ manages the product backlog while the ________ manages the

iteration backlog.

A. Scrum Master, developer

B. Product owner, Scrum Master

C. Product owner, team

D. Product manager, team

80. A Product owner is or could be invited in all of the following meetings except:

A. Iteration planning

B. Daily stand-up

C. Iteration review

D. Iteration retrospective

81. The Y-axis of an iteration burndown chart depicts ________.

A. Time

B. Story points

C. Number of features completed

D. Burn rate / cost of resources

82. All of the following are valid units of estimation in Agile projects except:

A. Story points

B. Ideal days

C. T-shirt sizes

D. Person-days

83. Your team agreed on a velocity of 25 story points per iteration. The Agile PMO

pointed out that another team working on a project of similar complexity is more

productive with a velocity of 40 story points per iteration. What should you do?

A. Agree to go with 40 and convince the team that overtime might be necessary

to catch up.

B. Stick to 25 and convince the PMO that velocities of two teams cannot be

compared to each other.

C. Hire an Agile coach to see how to reach 40.

D. Use an alternate estimation technique.

■ Mock Exam III

418

84. Which of the following are valid promises made by the product owner to the

team and vice versa?

A. PO promises not to change the scope in the middle of the sprint, the team

commits to deliver what is mentioned on the sprint goal.

B. PO promises to be available for any questions the development team might

have, the team commits to implement any changes introduced in the middle

of the sprint.

C. PO promises to bring in a prioritized list of backlog, the team promises to

bring in their list of risks and technical tasks that compete in priority over

the business requirements.

D. PO promises to deliver a world class product, the team commits to use the

most sophisticated technologies available at the market.

85. An Agile project charter contains all of the following except:

A. Description of the purpose of the project.

B. A detailed project plan.

C. Identified stakeholders and the intended customer base.

D. Rough timelines when the project is likely to be delivered.

86. In the context of Agile project management, which characteristic is the odd one

out in the below?

A. Iterative and incremental delivery

B. Focus on individuals and interactions

C. Tracking and monitoring with high-tech, low-touch tools

D. Value-based prioritization

87. Which of the following is going to be least effective in increasing velocity of the

team?

A. Increase involvement of the customer.

B. Remove technical debt by continuously refactoring code.

C. Shield the team from interferences.

D. Use an alternate technique for estimation.

88. An Agile coach practices whole team coaching during __________ and individual

coaching at __________.

A. Sprint planning, middle of sprint.

B. Middle of sprint, throughout the sprint.

C. Sprint planning and retrospective, middle of sprint.

D. Throughout the sprint, retrospective.

■ Mock Exam III

419

89. A team of 5 members has an average velocity of 20 story points. They need to

deliver a backlog of 120 story points at iterations of 2 weeks duration. Assuming

that weekly labor rate of each team member is $100$ what would be the

estimated budget of the project? Consider only labor costs.

A. $4000

B. $5000

C. $6000

D. $7000

90. The following are characteristics of exploratory testing EXCEPT:

A. Simultaneous learning and testing.

B. Testing with focus on execution rather than up-front planning.

C. Writing acceptance tests before writing code.

D. Used in conjunction with other forms of testing like automation, regression,

usability and acceptance, etc.

91. One should use daily stand-up meetings to do all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Keep up peer pressure and commit to each other.

B. Highlighting issues and bottlenecks.

C. Collaborate effectively with each other.

D. Provide a status update to the Scrum Master or Product Owner.

92. Agile teams sometimes use extreme personas to collect stories. Extreme personas

are helpful since:

A. Unlike other forms of personas, they are imaginary characters that one can

relate to easily.

B. Considering extreme personas help to discover stories that otherwise would

have been missed.

C. Extreme personas are used when all other forms of story writing is found to

be noneffective.

D. None of the above.

93. Which of the following is not a preferred unit of estimation for Agile stories?

A. Function points

B. Story points

C. Ideal days

D. T-shirt sizes

■ Mock Exam III

420

94. The technique of breaking up an epic into a story, a story into a task and a task

into a subtask is called:

A. Decomposition

B. Simplification

C. Disaggregation

D. Splitting

95. The progress midway in an iteration is monitored best using:

A. Working software, as per the Agile Manifesto.

B. Release burndown chart.

C. Task board.

D. Conducting demos midway between the sprints.

96. An Agile team space is characterized by a zone where maximum osmotic

communication takes place and another zone where privacy prevails and the

team members can take care of their needs for separation. This arrangement is

called?

A. Information radiators

B. Caves and commons

C. Private and public areas

D. Informative team zones

97. You are invited to screen a few proposals from a few vendors. While doing so, you

notice that one of the proposals is from a company owned by your relative. What

should you do?

A. Ignore and try to evaluate as fairly as possible.

B. Contact your relative and ask them to tweak the proposal to make it sound

more competitive.

C. Influence the rest of the proposal evaluators that your relative’s company is

the best as you know them personally.

D. Disclose it to the appropriate authorities and stay out of the selection

process.

98. Which of the following is the least-recommended way to determine the initial

velocity of a team?

A. Refer to historical values.

B. Make a guess.

C. Run an initial iteration as a pilot, measure and use the velocity of that.

D. Use another team’s velocity.

■ Mock Exam III

421

99. In which stage of a retrospective are the techniques like 5 Why’s, Fishbone and

Force field analysis used?

A. Set the stage

B. Gather data

C. Generate insights

D. Decide what to do

100. XP teams use the technique of ________ to enhance code quality, while keeping

its behavior unchanged.

A. Refactoring

B. TDD

C. Spikes

D. Pair programming

101. For sprint planning, the following should participate actively:

A. Customers, analysts and developers

B. Scrum Master, product owner and analysts

C. Whole project team

D. Sponsor, onsite customer, Development lead, testing leads

102. How doAgile teams manage scope?

A. Prevent scope creep during the project.

B. Lock down scope during a sprint.

C. Allow scope changes to the backlog only before a sprint.

D. B and C.

103. Which of the following statements regarding velocity is not correct?

A. Velocity helps to correct and adjust inaccuracies in estimates.

B. Velocity differs from team to team.

C. Velocity can differ from one iteration to another iteration.

D. It is impossible to determine the initial velocity, unless the team has actually

worked in the project.

■ Mock Exam III

422

104. As an Agile coach, you keep reminding the team to standup during the daily

Scrums, update the storyboard before leaving for the day and complete the tasks

they have committed during the daily Scrum meeting. This is a description of

which failure mode of Agile coaching?

A. The Expert

B. The Nag

C. The Opinionator

D. The Seagull

105. During osmotic communication between teams, we have to be careful of drafts

that are__________.

A. Unwanted chatter on topics that are not useful in the context of the current

working environment.

B. Gush of air from the window.

C. Negative publicity.

D. Conflicts between the storming phases of the team.

106. The pillars of Scrum are:

A. Plan, Do, Check, Act

B. Honesty, respect, fairness, responsibility

C. Transparency, Inspection and Adaptation

D. Green, red, refactor

107. During the estimation session, the team wants to compare the estimate of a new

story with a small story and a medium story that has already been estimated to

1 and 5 story points. This is commonly referred to as:

A. Affinity estimation

B. Analogous estimation

C. Wideband Delphi

D. Triangulation

108. Which of the following is true for a user story card?

A. The story card is not a requirement specification, but a reminder to have a

conversation between the developer and the customer.

B. The story card can be torn apart after the definition of done is achieved.

C. The acceptance criteria are written at the back of the card.

D. All of the above are true.

■ Mock Exam III

423

109. Which of the following Scrum artifacts acts as a communication bridge between

the developer and the product owner as far as priorities go?

A. Product backlog

B. Release burndown charts

C. Cumulative burndown and burnup charts

D. Product increment

110. From a risk burndown chart, we get to see:

A. New risks or existing risks whose severity has changed.

B. Whether the team is able to address risks properly and the cumulative risk

severity is showing a downward trend.

C. Both A and B.

D. How many spikes have been performed in the team.

111. During the Scrum meeting, Richard the Scrum Master notices there is some

disagreement between Bill and Harry on the timing to change a run-time

configuration of the software. The conflict was assessed at Level 1. What should

Richard do?

A. Openly blast Bill and Harry in the Scrum meeting, reminding them that such

conflicts are not healthy in a self-organized team.

B. Do nothing. Since it is a Level 1 conflict, Richard expects Bill and Harry to

resolve it on their own.

C. Immediately after the Scrum meeting, take Bill and Harry to another room

and try to mediate to resolve the problem.

D. Escalate to Bill and Harry’s line managers.

112. Mute mapping is a technique used for categorizing ideas. Which of the following

is true?

A. All phone lines are muted so that the speaker can continue without

interruption.

B. It is used during sprint review.

C. Participants are not allowed to speak while they move related cards (topics)

together and put unrelated cards separate.

D. The ideas with the maximum votes win and the others are discarded.

■ Mock Exam III

424

113. Fractional assignment is not suitable for Agile projects since:

A. Lot of time is wasted because of context switching.

B. People do not get bored because they are involved in a variety of tasks.

C. Productivity suffers.

D. A and C.

114. During which Scrum ceremony are risk audits held?

A. Sprint planning

B. Sprint execution

C. Sprint review

D. Sprint retrospective

115. If co-location is not possible, which of the following is NOT a good practice in

distributed teams?

A. It is advisable to bring them team together at the beginning to conduct a

kick-off meeting or get teams to work together for 1 or 2 iterations and get

used to each other’s styles of working.

B. Distribute the team as per job specification – such that all analysts are

in one location, all developers are in another location and all testers in

the third location. Such kind of horizontalization will increase osmotic

communication where team members can learn from each other.

C. Invest behind communication technologies like interactive chats, webcams,

audio and video conferences, collaboration tools, electronic task boards like

Jira and online planning poker sites.

D. Explore if work times can be adjusted such that there is some overlap

between team members located in different time zones.

116. The product owner brings all stakeholders in a common place with an intent to

reach consensus on the priorities of the items on their wish list. He tells everyone

to distribute 100 points across all features that are deemed valuable to them.

They may even choose to give all 100 to only one feature, if that is the only one

they are interested in. Once the choices are made, the product owner sums up

the votes and lists the features in descending order of priority. What is the name

of this prioritization technique?

A. Planning Poker

B. Delphi

C. 100-point method

D. Weigers’ method

■ Mock Exam III

425

117. Which of the following roles could an Agile PMO play in a project?

A. Help in resource management, especially shared resources.

B. Help in rolling up management reporting.

C. Help in vendor and contract management.

D. All of the above.


118. By tracking velocity trends, a team can:

A. Gauge the rate of progress

B. Estimate how much longer it will take to complete

C. Correcting estimation errors

D. All of the above


119. Bob is a newbie in an Agile team. He is studying how the team is working and

sieving through the artifacts that teams track to measure their progress. While

looking at a burndown chart, he observes that the bar chart, instead of going

down has actually risen in the current iteration, from where it was in the past. He

is confused and runs to Jessica for a clarification. What is Jessica likely to explain?

A. Jessica explains that there is a mistake in the burndown chart, as the bar

graphs should always show a downward trend.

B. Jessica explains that the team has corrected the estimates of a few stories

based on better understanding that they have gathered recently. In the past,

there was an underestimate.

C. Jessica explains that the product owner has recently added a bunch of new

stories to the backlog, hence the top has moved up.

D. Jessica explains that the rise in the bar graph is because the team’s progress

has been slow in the last few days, as a colleague has been ill.

120. A Kanban team uses an expedite lane on their Kanban board to:

A. Slot in work items that exceed the WIP limit, but must get done on a best

effort basis.

B. To tackle critical and urgent work like production issues, but are again

subject to their own WIP limits.

C. To find bottlenecks in the rest of the lanes on the Kanban board.

D. The word expedite shows that the team is working expeditiously – reacting

to tasks and changes as swiftly as possible at all times.

© Sumanta Boral 2016 427

S. Boral, Ace the PMI-ACP®

 exam, DOI 10.1007/978-1-4842-2526-4

Answers

1. C

2. D

3. C

4. D

5. C

6. C

7. B

8. C

9. D

10. B

11. C

12. B

13. A

14. D

15. C

16. C

17. A

18. A

19. D

20. D

21. C

22. C

23. B

24. D

25. C

26. A

27. B

28. C

29. C

30. B

31. B

32. D

33. A

34. D

35. C

36. A

37. C

38. D

39. A

40. C

41. C

42. C

43. D

44. C

45. A

46. B

47. B

48. D

49. A

50. D

51. D

52. C

53. D

54. B

55. D

56. B

57. A

58. C

59. C

60. D

61. A

62. D

63. C

64. A

65. B

66. D

67. A

68. C

69. A

70. C

71. C

72. B

73. C

74. A

75. B

76. D

77. B

78. C

79. A

80. D

81. C

82. D

83. A

84. C

85. B

86. A

87. D

88. C

89. B

90. C

91. B

92. A

93. C

94. D

95. D

96. D

97. C

98. B

99. A

100. C

101. C

102. D

103. B

104. A

105. D

106. C

107. A

108. C

109. C

110. C

111. D

112. C

113. C

114. D

115. B

116. D

117. A

118. A

119. C

120. D

Answers – Mock Exam I

■ Answers

428

Answers – Mock Exam II

1. D

2. D

3. B

4. C

5. A

6. D

7. B

8. B

9. C

10. C

11. B

12. C

13. A

14. B

15. B

16. D

17. C

18. A

19. A

20. D

21. B

22. A

23. B

24. D

25. C

26. B

27. D

28. D

29. D

30. B

31. B

32. D

33. C

34. A

35. C

36. B

37. A

38. A

39. B

40. C

41. A

42. B

43. D

44. C

45. A

46. B

47. A

48. C

49. B

50. B

51. A

52. B

53. D

54. C

55. D

56. B

57. A

58. C

59. D

60. D

61. D

62. C

63. B

64. C

65. A

66. B

67. D

68. A

69. D

70. A

71. D

72. B

73. B

74. D

75. A

76. A

77. C

78. D

79. A

80. A

81. A

82. C

83. A

84. C

85. D

86. C

87. A

88. B

89. B

90. D

91. B

92. A

93. A

94. D

95. C

96. A

97. A

98. D

99. D

100. A

101. D

102. B

103. B

104. D

105. C

106. C

107. C

108. C

109. A

110. B

111. D

112. D

113. C

114. B

115. D

116. A

117. B

118. D

119. A

120. C

■ Answers

429

Answers – Mock Exam III

1. B

2. C

3. A

4. D

5. B

6. D

7. B

8. D

9. A

10. C

11. A

12. D

13. D

14. A

15. C

16. D

17. C

18. D

19. A

20. B

21. A

22. B

23. C

24. D

25. C

26. B

27. C

28. D

29. D

30. C

31. B

32. A

33. D

34. C

35. C

36. B

37. A

38. D

39. D

40. B

41. D

42. C

43. D

44. C

45. C

46. D

47. C

48. A

49. C

50. B

51. C

52. A

53. C

54. A

55. C

56. B

57. D

58. A

59. B

60. C

61. B

62. D

63. A

64. C

65. B

66. A

67. D

68. C

69. B

70. B

71. D

72. A

73. B

74. D

75. A

76. B

77. B

78. A

79. C

80. D

81. B

82. D

83. B

84. A

85. B

86. C

87. D

88. C

89. C

90. C

91. D

92. B

93. A

94. C

95. C

96. B

97. D

98. D

99. C

100. A

101. C

102. D

103. D

104. B

105. A

106. C

107. D

108. D

109. A

110. C

111. B

112. C

113. D

114. D

115. B

116. C

117. D

118. D

119. B

120. B


------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- 

Scrum Theory :

Quetions :

1.How should developers deal with non-functional features ?


Options:


Incorporate the2m into every Increment​

Incorporate them before the release​

Incorporate them in the hardening Sprint​

Incorporate them in the integration Sprint


Ans: 1 Incorporate them into every Increment​


2. The development team is free to change its engineering and testing practices whenever they want.

Correct True.


The DT is self-organized and cross-functional; they have to decide how best to handle their development,

and this decision can evolve during the project, as more is learned about the needs.

This is about their development and doesn't have to be constrained by the scprints.

The elements that shouldn't changed during the sprint are thoserequired for

keeping them focused on their development.


3. From the following answers, chose one which is not a prioritisation technique?

Correct :

X Kano analysis - Prioritisation technique

Kano analysis Definition :  Is a quality measurement tool which is used to determine which requirements are important. ... Kano analysis can help you rank requirements for different customers to determine which have the highest priority. Kano analysis is a tool which can be used to classify and prioritize customer needs.

X Planning Poker - Is not Prioritisation technique

Priority poker is a game for collaboratively prioritizing items, be they features, backlog estimations, goals 

 x User story mapping -  Prioritisation technique


 Theory : Planning poker, also scrum poker, is a consensus-based, gamified technique for estimating, mostly used to estimate efforts or 

 relative zide of development goals in software development. In planning poker, members of the group make estimates by placing numbered cards face-down on

 the table; instead of saying them aloud. The cards are revealed, and the estimates are then discussed. By hiding the figures in this way, the group can avoid the 

 cognitive bias of anchoring, where the first number spoken aloud sets a precedent for subsequent estimates. Planning poker is not a prioritisation technique.


80 question answer  

 Correct Prodcut Backlog Ordering - Is a sPrioritisation technique

 

 4. Ater scrum implementation, the scrum team ensures the exception of technical debt

Correct False > Debt False

Scrum  can not ensure the exception of technical debt.


 5. According to the scrum guide, the scrum is based on....type of process

Correct Empirical

 

Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory or empiricism. Empiricism asserts that knowledge comes from experience and making

decisions based on what is known. Scrum employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predicctability and control risk.


6. Which role in scrum should know the most about the release and product requirements? 

Correct 

The Product Owner

X The scrum master


The Product Owner is responsible for product, including decisions about release. THe Product Owner's decisions are visible in the content

and ordering of the product backlog. No one can force the development team to work from a different set 

of requirements.


7. Scrum is software development methodology

Correct False

Scrum is a process framework that has been used to manage work on complex products since the early 1990's. Scrum is not a processtechnique or definitive

method. Rather, it is a framework within which you can employ various processes and techniques. Scrum makes clear the relative efficacy

of your product management and work techniques so that you can continouously improve the product, the team, and the working environment.


8. Scrum is not a 

Correct Software development process


9. Which nof the following is not a pillor of scrum?

adaptation

Inspection

Transparency

Empiricism


Correct Not a pillar is Empiricism


Thre pillars uphold every implementation of empiricial process control; 

adaptation, Inspection and Transparency


10. What type of process control is scrum?

Correct Emprical


Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory or empiricism. Empiricismasserts that 

knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is know. Scrum

employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and conrtol risk.

Three pillars uphold every implementation of empiricial process control; 

adaptation, Inspection and Transparency


11. The Team may decrease the technical debt by .....

Correct

Improving the deifinition of "Done"


There;s usually room for improving the definition of "Done". A good definition will let less technical debts pass on to the next sprints.

Technical debt is minor shortcomings in the code that makes it less than "good Enough", and therefore creates risk in the future

It usually decreases velocity in the future ( Because the team has to fix the shortcomings), and as 

some of the debt might remain in the final product, the maintenance cost will increase as well. 

Another Agile way of reducing technical debt is continuous refactoring.


12. The benefits of having a solid product vision are ( Choose 3 answers)

Correct It gives an overall direction to the sprints

Correct It makes it easier to inspect the incremental progress of the product

Correct It helps the team stay focused and make better decisions.


Product vision is not explained in the scrum guide and is not a mandatory part of the framework.

However, it's recommended to have one, and use it to help align the decisions and development with the expected outcome of the project.


13. 2. From the following answers chose one. In scrum, by transparency we mean ........

Correct

Significant aspects of the process must be visible to those responible for the outcome


X The whole process should be visible to any.

X The process should be visible and understood by each stakeholder


Transparency is about visibility and doesn't contain understanding; even though we'd better try out best to create the 

right understanding too, but that's another story. Thne "whole process" might be too much for

some stakeholders; "significant aspects" is enough, as we treat most things in agile environments.


15. Select 2 true statements aboout scrum

Correct Scrum is a framework for developing and maintaining complex products

Correct Scrum is base on empirical process control theory


16. Scrum is container for other techniques and methodologies

Correct  Yes


Scrum is a process framework that has been used to manage work on complex products since the early 1990's. Scrum is not a processtechnique or definitive

method. Rather, it is a framework within which you can employ various processes and techniques. Scrum makes clear the relative efficacy

of your product management and work techniques so that you can continouously improve the product, the team, and the working environment.


17. In what ways does the product ownere manage the value of the product? ( choose 2 answers) 

Correct Product Backlog Ordered

Correct Customer feedback via frequent releases


The Product ownere manages the value of the product by : 1- Product Backlog Ordered 2- Correct Customer feedback via frequent releases 


18. According to the scrum guide empiricism provides

Correct Frequent Opportunities to discuss different possibilities

Correct Frequenc opportunities to make informed decisions, reducing risk

X Frequent opportunities to get information using which uncertainty can be completely eliminated.


Scrum is founded on empirical process control theory or empiricism. Empiricismasserts that 

knowledge comes from experience and making decisions based on what is known. Scrum

employs an iterative, incremental approach to optimize predictability and conrtol risk.

Three pillars uphold every implementation of empiricial process control; 

adaptation, Inspection and Transparency


19. Scrum as a framework increases the transparency of ....( Select one answer)

X Technical ability of team to create product increment

Information on real progress

Correct Both


Within just a few sprints, Scrum increases the transparency of Technical ability of team to create product increment and

Information on real progress.


20. 49. What does the team use in the scrum, to reduce the likelihood of not meeting big commitments?

Correct  Timeboxking, so the events cannot exceed a predetermined time box


Scrum controls the risk associated with long term planning and big commitments by constraining the product development into 

shorter iterations call sprints. Each sprint is strictly time-boxed so they expire on the predetermined date no matter what.

By timeboxing, the risk of pursuing a wrong direction is limited to the cost of one sprint.


21. According to the scrum guide, a self-organized team......

Correct Managing their work ot reach a common a goal


Self-organized teams are empowered to organize and manage their work. However, the team cannot self-manage the human resource

related aspects. They also cannot work from a different set of requirements outside the product backlog.


22. One of the member of the Development team is requested by the stake holder ( ONe of the manager of the compamy)

to help them with an urgent and important task outside the sprint goal. The team member set aside the sprint work

for the day and instead helped with this request. wich statemment describes the team member action?


Correct The team member did not live by the scrum value of focus.


The Scrum value of focus helps to avoid doing other things not related to the sprint goal. THe team member is expected to live the

scrum value of focus by prioritizing and completing the sprint work to achieve the goals of the scrum team.


23. According to the scrum guide, what should be the frequesncy of inspection in scrum? Select all that apply

Correct In Every even withing the sprint

Correct Frequently, as decided by the team, but not getting in the way to work.


Scrum users must frequently inspect scrum artifacts and progress toward a sprint goal to detect undesirable variances. Their inspection

should not be so frequent that inspection gets in the way of the work. Inspections are most beneficial when diligently preformed by skilled

inspectors at the point of work. Other than that the sprint itself, which is a container for all othe events, each event is Scrum is a formal 

opportunity to inspect and adapt something.


Scrum Team :

------------

1. In Scrum, product owner is accountable for.....


Correct Creating and sustaining a Product backlog that maximises value and represents the needs of the Stakeholders.


X Refining the top level poduct backlog itesm until they are ready to be handover to the development team


X Describing an increment at the sprint planning and making sure that the development team delivers it by the end of the sprint.

 

The product owner is the sole person responsible for managing the product backlog. Product backlog management

Includes:- Clearly expressing product backlog items; - Ordering the items in the product backlog to best achieve goals and missions;-

Optimizing the value of the work the development team performs;- Ensuring that the product backlog is visible, transparent, and cleear to all

and shows what the scrum team will work on next; - Ensuring the development team understands items in the product backlog to the level needed.

 

2. One of the member of the development team often has conflicts with entire

team. These conflicts cause issues to progress. Whos is responsible for removing this issue?

Correct Development Team 

X Product Owner

X Scrum Master


Think about who is responsible for identifiying and removing differnt type of issues. The scrum master is responsible for removing implediments outside the development team's influence.

Also, they are responsible for causing change that increases the productivity of the scrum team. In this case, the issue faced ny the development team is well within the influence of 

the development team to resolve. so, the scrum master should coach the team to resolve such items themselves. If the scurm master actively takes steps such as removing this person from

the team, it will lead to a dminished inclination of the development team to resolve internal prblems for themselves in the long run.


3. Imagine you are a Scrum Master in a small Organization that tries to adopt Scrum. There are 10 developers and the Product Owner. How can they be divided into teams? Choose all applicable options:


Correct : 2 teams of 6 and 4 people (after a short meeting the developers decided this is the best option)

Correct : 3 teams of 4, 3 and 3 people (each team is cross-functional)

x 2 teams of 6 and 4 people (because it is good to have a separate QA team)

x 1 team of 10 people (because there is no reason to divide)

 

Optimal Development Team size is small enough to remain nimble and large enough to complete significant work within a Sprint. Fewer than three Development Team members decrease interaction and results in smaller productivity gains. Having more than nine members requires too much coordination. The Product Owner and Scrum Master roles are not included in this count unless they are also executing the work of the Sprint Backlog.


4. I`n the middle of the sprint the development team realise they are not able to complet all sprint backlog items.

 what is the best action for the PO to reslove this issue?

 Correct Help the developers adjust their work and meet the sprint goal


5. The Product Owner has doubts about the quality of the definition of “Done”. What should she / he do ?


Adjust the definition of “Done” immediately

Adjust the definition of “Done” at the end of the Sprint

Ask the company QA department to investigate the issue

Correct increase the product quality by adaption of the definition of "Done" in the next  Sprint retrospective. or Point it out in the next Sprint Retrospective.


Ans: 4


The Development Team is responsible for the definition of “Done” rather than the Product Owner. So, if the Product Owner doubts the quality of the definition of “Done”, he/she can discuss it with the team on the next Sprint Retrospective, so that if they agree, it would be adjusted for the next Sprint.


6. Who assigns tasks for developers?

Developers Themselves


They are self-organizing. No one (not even the scrum master) tells the development team how to trun product backlog into increments of potentially

releasable functionality.


7. During the sprint zero, the product owner must .....


Correct : All answers are incorrect because there is no sprint zeor in scrum


X Prepare the product backlog for the whole project

X Prepare the product backlog for the next few sprints

X Communicate with the customer and understand the requirements


There's no such thing as a sprint zero. The first sprint is called Sprint 1, and it's exactly the same as other sprints; it

creates an increment. The infrastructure and tools and requirements are prepared gradually throlughout the project.


8. The product owner is the ownere of the product backlog

Correct True


The product owner is the sole responsible person, and they even "Own" the product backlog. Remember that the sprint backlog is owned bu the development team. 

this is not in contrast to the fact that the product backlog itesm are estimated by the developers, they provide this information to the product owner to be

included in the product backlog. There are multipe implications by saying the product ownere "Owns" the product backlog or is the solre responsbile person. Only

can add items to the backlog or decompose them into smaller items; while this is done by input from the customers and dvelopers, and even the product owner can 

delegate this responsibility to the developers. Only they can decide on the order of the items on the product backlog, while this is usually based on the input 

from customers and developers.


9. 51. Due to high season in organisation, the product owner doesn't spend enough time to maximise the value of the 

product and doesn't attend mandatory events. which of the following options is the best response from the scrum master?

Correct Train the PO why its important for her/him to spend enough time on the project

X Bring up the issue in the sprint retrospective.


The SM is responsible for training and coaching team members on a proactive way and convinces them to do right thing.

All other options are either reactive, or not self-organized.


10. Scrum Teams are working on the same Product. Due to this each team should have their definition of "Done".

Correct : False


All teams can use the same definition of "Done", but individual scrum teams may choose to apply a more stringent definition

of "Done" within their own teams, but cannot apply less rigorous criteria than agreed for the increment.


11. If there are 35 developers for a scroum project, how should they be divided into teams?

Correct Developers should decide 

X They dont have to be divided


Each Scrum team should (not must) have a maximum of 9 members, when more developers are required, multiple teams can work on 

the same product and it will be callred Scaled Scrum. The developers are self-organized and decide how to form the teams.


12. This role in scrum is responsible for updating remaining work during the sprint

Correct The Development Team


The Sprint Backog is a plan with enough detail that changes in progress and can be understood in the daily scrum. the development team modifies the

Sprint backlog throughout the sprint, and the sprint backlog emerges during the sprint. This emergence occurs as the development team works through 

the plan and learns more about the work required to achieve the sprint goal.


13.  The Development Team should have all the skills needed to:

 A) Do all of the development work, except for specialized testing that requires additional tools and environments.

 B) Complete the project as estimated when the date and cost are committed to the Product Owner.


Correct C) Turn the Product Backlog items it selects into an increment of potentially releasable product functionality.


The Development Team consists of professionals who do the work of delivering a potentially releasable Increment of "Done" product 

at the end of each Sprint. Development Teams are cross-functional, with all of the skills as a team necessary to create a product Increment.


14. Developers sign up to own (individually) sprint backlog items at the sprint planning

Correct : False


The ownership of the items and tasks are shared. The items are not even "assigned" to developers because they

require multiple expertise. Only the tasks are assigned, and even then, their ownership is shared.


15. Choose all activities which are the responsibilities of the development team in scrum

X Prioritize the Product Backlog

Correct Provide Estimates

Correct Trun the sprint backlog items into an increment

Correct Make technical decisions

X Create timeline for burndown chart


Designing the software is part of the development and should be done by the developers. They are self-organized and make technical decisions.

Estimation is the responsibility of the developers because they are the people who will develop the item. The rest is done by the product owner.


16. The scrum team begins the first sprint. what is the main activities for the development team during 

this sprint? select all correct answers

* Correct :  Turn the product backlog items its selects into the sprint backlog to an

increment of potentially releasable product functinality. ( KW : increment )


Development teams deliver an increment of product functionality every sprint. This increment is usable, so a product owner may choose to 

immediately release it. if the definition of "Done" for an increment is part of converntions, standeards or guidelines of the development 

Organization, all scrum teams must follow it as a minimum.


17. who is responsible for maximizing the value of the work the development team performs?

Correct The Product owner.

The product owner is the sole person responsible for managin the product backlog. Product backlog management includes,

clearly expressing product backlog items; Ordering the items in the Product backlog to best achieve goals and missions; Optimizing the value 

of the work the development team performs.


18. The Product Owner is responsible for the definition of "done"

Correct ans. False


Development team deliver an increment of product functionality every sprint. This increment is usable, so a product owner may choose to immediately

release it. If the definition of "Done" for a increment i for an increment is not a convention of the development organization the 

development team of scrum must definition of "Done" Oppropriate fot the Product. If there are multiple scrum Teams working on the sustem or Produc


19. This role or these roles are responsible to change the sprint backlog in the middle of the sprint?


Correct The Development Team


The sprint backlog is a plan with enough detail that changes in progress can be undestood in the dialy Scrum. The development team

modifies the sprint backlog throughout the sprint, and the sprint backlog emerges during the sprint. This emergence occurs as the development

team works through the plan and learns more about the work needed to achieve the sprint goal.


20. hich role in scrum does represent interests of the stakeholders and ensures the value of 

completed work?

Correct Product owner


The Product Owner is one person, not a committee. The product onwer may represent the desires of a committee in the product backlog, but those wanting to

change a product backlog itesm priority must address the product woner.


21.  When more scrum teams are added to a project that works on single product,

the productivity of the original scrum teams mostly likely will increase

Correct

False


Each scrum team needs to mutually define their definition of "Done" so their combined work will be potentially releasable. This involves some overhead work in

Syncing up, and hence the impact to productivity.


22. The scrum team gathers for the sprint planning meeting. the product owner has some stories but the team 

finds that the stories do not provide enough information to make a forecast. the next immediate step is 


Correct : The developement team makes it transparent that they cannot make a forecast with insufficient information and 

negotiates with the product owner on refining the stories to a ready state


The development team works to forecast the functionality that will be developed during the sprint. The product ownere discusses the objective that the sprint 

should achiveve and the product backlog items that, if completed in the sprint, would achieve the sprint goal. The entire scrum team collaborates on understanding

the work of the sprint. The input to this meeting is the product backlog, the latest product increment, projected capacity of the development team during the sprint.

and past performance of the development team. The number of items selected from the product backlog for the sprint is solely upto the development team. only the 

development team can assess what it can accomplish over upcoming sprint.


Scrum Events :

--------------

https://www.volkerdon.com/courses/take/psm1/quizzes/9563755-scrum-events-practice-test


1.  According to the scrum guide, ...are 

The purposes of the Sprint Retrospective is to (select three):


Correct Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements

Get feedback from the Key Stakeholders invited by the Product Owner

Get technical or domain advice from specialists invited by The Development Team or The Scrum Master

Correct Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools

Correct Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work


The purpose of the Sprint Retrospective is to:


Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools;

Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements; and,

Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work.


2. Who creates the sprint goal?

* Correct The scrum Team

X The product owner

X The development team


The Sprint goal is an objective set for the sprint that can be met through the implementation of product backlog. It provides guidance to

the development team on why it is building the increment. It is created during the sprint planning meeting. The sprint goal gives the development 

team some flexibility regarding the functionality implemented within the sprint. The selected product backlog items deliver one coherent function,

which can be the sprint goal. The sprint goal can be any other coherence that causes the development team to work thogether rather than on 

seperate initiatives.


3. Which of the following is the most important opportunity for capturing lessons learned ?

Sprint Retrospective​

Sprint Planning​

Sprint Review​

Daily Scrum


Correct : Sprint Retrospective​


Lessons learned are always captured, but the main purpose of Sprint Retrospective is capturing and planning for lessons learned.

The purpose of the sprint retrospective is to : Inspect how the last Sprint went with regards to people, relationships, process, and tools;

Identify and order the major items that went well and potential improvements; and,

Create a plan for implementing improvements to the way the Scrum Team does its work.


4. Select all that apply. who must participate at the daily scrum?

Correct : Development Team


The daily scrum is a 14-minute time boxed event for the development team. The daily scrum is held every day of the sprint. At it, the 

development team plans work for the next 24 hours. This optimizes team collaboration and performmance by inspecting

the work since the last daily scrum and forecasting sprint work. The daily scrum is held at the same time and place

each day to reduce complexity. 


5. 13. from the following answers choose the common outcomes of daily scrums


Correct The scrum master identifies new impediment


Correct Everyone is clear on the next steps towards the sprint goal


X The impediments are discussed and possible solutions select

X the prodcut owner is informed of the progress.


Impediments are pointed out in daily scrum, but we don't discuss them. Each developer informs everyone about tasks they will

handle in the next 24hours, which is how the team progress towards the goal.


6. What is the resason why the daily scrum is held at the same time and same Place?

Correct : To reduce complexity and Overhead


It's not wise to spend time everyday scheduling the next daily scrum when the meeting itself is only 15 minutes. we usually expecte to

have a common place for the team and have them collocated. The meeting will be held in the same common place, in front of the scrum board; we

don't book a meeting room for it.



7. Which of the following is true about the sprint review? ( Choose 2 answers )

Correct It is 4 hours in one month sprint.

* Correct Stakeholders must attend this event ( sprint review)


A Sprint review is held at the end of the sprint to inspect the increment and adapt the product backlog if needed/ During the sprint review, the scrum and

stakeholders coolaborate on what was done in the sprint. Based on that and end any changes to the product backlog during the sprint, attendees collaborate on

the next things that could be done in order to optimize value. 


This is an informal meeting, not a status meeting, and the presentation of the increment is intended to elicit feedback and foster collaboration. This is at mostl

a four- hour meeting for one-month sprints. For shorter sprints, the evenet is ususally shorter. The scrum master ensures that the event takes plac and that attendees understand

its purpose. The scrum master teaches everyne involved to keep it within the time-box.


8. The new sprint starts immediately after the end of the previous sprint. There are no additional activities between 2 sprints?

Correct : True


Noting happens between two sprints - the next one starts o,,edoate;u after the conclusion of the previous.


9. The purpose of the daily scrum for the developers is to inform the product ownere of the progress.

Correct False


The main purpose of daily scrum is the synchronization for the developers.


10.The scrum event for the process improvement is ....( according to the scrum Guide )

Correct Sprint Retrospective

X Sprint review


The Sprint Retrospective is an opportunity for the scrum team to inspect itself and create a plan for improvements to be enacted

during the next sprint.


11. The sprint may be cancelled when.....

Correct The sprint goal doesn't make sense anymore.


Sprints are cancelled by the product onwer only because they dont't make sense anymore, or

becocme obsolete/ Its mainly about the sprint goal.


12. Which of the following might be discussed in a sprint restrospective? 

Correct The definition of "Done"


Sprint restrospective is used for planning for improvements. One of them is improving the definition of "Done"


13. No one attends the sprint planning but the scrum team.

Correct False


Everyone is free to "attend" the meetings, as long as they don't "participate"


14. As we know from the scrum guide this role is responsible for managing the progress of work during a sprint

Correct The development team

 

At any point in time ina sprint, the total work remaining in the sprint backlog can be summed. The development team tracks this total

work remaining at least for every daily scrum to project the likelihood of achieving the sprint goal. By Tracking the remaining work 

thoughout the sprint, the development team can manage its progress.


15. At the sprint review, the stakeholders notice that the product development is going very slow, the product progress is not very clearly visible and lacked transparency. 

In general, stakeholders can't understand what the team is doing and not sure about the value of the product. Who is responsible for this?

 or

During sprint review stakeholders notice that the product development progress is not very clearly visible and lacked transparency. Moreover, they are not able to understand the next steps. Who is responsible for this?


Correct "The Product Owner" is responsible for this.


From the scrum guide : The PO is ensuring that the product backlog is visible, transparent, and clear to all, and shows what the scrum team will work on next

The product owner is the Lead Facilitator of key stakeholder involvement. The PO is responsible for identifiying key stakeholders for the rpduct and involving tem as

necessary throughout the development effort. We will change the explantion to make it more clear.16. 


16. Who decides the duration of the sprint?

Correct Scrum Team

X Scrum Master 


The "right" duration of sprint should balance the product owner's appetite for receiving increments of value, with the ability of the development tema to supply those

deliverables. The scrum master may have some coaching duties to perform in that regards. So, the scrum master is maybe the most important team memeber who decides the

duration of sprint but we do not agree that the scrum master is the only one who decides this duration.


17. The Sprint review is an event that requires`

Correct Stakeholders active participation

X Only inspection and adaption activities.


A Sprint review is held at the end of the sprint to inspect the increment and adapt the product backlog if needed. During the sprint review, the scrum team and stakeholders

collaborate about what was done in the sprint. Based on that and any changes to the product backlog during the sprint, attendees collaborate on the next things that could be

done to optimize value. This is an informatl meeting, not a status meeting, and the presentation of the increment is intended to elicit feedback and foster collaboration.


18. During the daily scrum, a team member says he doesn't know when his task will be completed .

what is the right action from the scrum team?

Correct The development team should collaborate to plan alternative steps such as pairing the member with someone else to 

eliminate the risk of not meeting the sprint goal


Development teams have the following characteristic :- They are sel-organizing. No one( not even the scrum master) tells the development team how to trun product backlog

into increments of potentially releasable functionality.


------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- 


Scrum Artifacts :

--------------

https://www.volkerdon.com/courses/take/psm1/quizzes/9563775-scrum-artifacts-practice-test


1. As  we know form the scrum guide this role is responsible for managing the product backlog in scrum

Correct The Product owner.


The product backlog is an ordered list of everything that is know to be needed in the product. It is the single source of requirements for any changes to be made to the

product. The Product Owner is responsible for the product backlog, including its content, availabily, and ordering.


2. How should a product backlog item to be refined before its development begin? Choose 2 answers)

Correct : To be checked : 

In a way that its clear enough for Dev Team

Correct : In a way that it can be "Done" in the timeboxed duration of one Sprint


In a way that it's clear enough for the developers. In a way that it can be "Done" in the timebboxed duration of one sprint. Items at the tops of the product

backlog need to be small enough to fit into one sprint. They also need to be clear and detailed enough; but not too detailed (e.g. not with all the tasks 

identififed), as it would be upfront planning. Tasks are created gradually during the sprint. Product backlog items required multiple expertiese, and usually

done by multiple developers. Therefore, they are not assigned. Task, however, are assigned to the individual developers, while everyone stays accountable. 


3. When a product backlog item or an increment"done" means. which o is described as "done", everyone must understand

what "Done" means . which of the following describes the definition of "done"? choose 2 answers

Correct Helps ensure increment is releasable

Correct Increases transparency


When a product backlog item or an increment is described as "done", everyone must understand what "Done" means. Although this may vary significantly per

scrum team, members must have a shared understanding of what it means fow work to be complete, to ensure transparency. This is the definition of "Done"

for the Scrum Team and is used to assess when work is complete on the product increment.


4. In Scrum, an increment is valuable when it.......(Select all correct answers) 

Correct : Reduce long-term operational costs

Correct : Increase customer satisfaction


X Is delivered ontime

X It has all the features that the product owner expected.


The customer's satisfaction is valuable and important to us. Reducing the operatinal costs, which consequently decreases the total cost of

ownership, is also a way of bringing value. All increments are delivered on time because the sprints are timeboxed. There's no need to have

all the sprint backlog items completed before the end of the Sprint. Atlease, this is not the most important thing when we are dealing with 

Value.


5. 3. The product backlog refinement should not take more than 10% of the product owner's time

False 


Refinement usually consumes no more that 10% of the capacity of the development team. However, product backlog itesm can be

updated at anytime by the product owner or at the product owner's discretion.


6. From the scrum guide we know, that the product backlog lists all features, functions,

requiremenst, enhancements, and fixes that consistute the changes to be made to the product 

in future release. When should the product backlog items be refined?

Choose 2 answers.

Correct 

During the sprint, if they have not been refined in the previous sprints.

In one or two preceding sprints.


Product backlog refinement is a continuous activity. when an item is at the top of the backlog, which means it will be developed in the near

feature, more refinements are usually needed to make sure it is clear and contains just enough details ( not all possible details). It's 

preferable to have the items that will be selected in the sprint backlog completely refined before sprint planning, however, it's ok to have

more refinement done during the development. Remember that there's no such thing as sprint 0, and there's no time between two sprints that can

be spent on something such as refinement. The team is also cross-functional and does the a-z of the work needed for each item, including refinement;

they don't use people from other parts of the company.


7. Which of the following can be Considered for ordering the Product backlog?

Correct Importance

X Risk


The most important basis for ordering the product backlog is a value. :impotance" can alsorefer to a value, and 

that's why this is the right answer. The size, risk, and cost affect the value, but do not impact ordering "directly".


8. Ordering the product backlog item is part of the product backlog refinement.

Correct True


Higher ordered product backlog items are usually clearer and more detailed than lower ordered ones. More precise estimates are made based on the greater

Clarity and increased detail; the lower the order, the less detail. Product backlog items that will occupy the development team for the upcoming sprint are

refined so that any one item can reasonably be "Done" within the sprint time-box. Product backlog items that can be "Done" by the development team within one 

sprint are deemed "Ready" for selection in a sprint planning. Product backlog items usually acquire this degreee of transparency through the above described 

refining activities.


9. There is a singel product backlog for multiple scrum teams

Correct True


There is a singel product backlog for entire Nexus and all of its scrum teams.

The Product ownere is accountable for the product backlog, including its content, availabily and ordering.


10. How much of the sprint backlog should be defined during the sprint planning meeting?

Correct

Just enough, so the development team can forecast what it can do, and to start the first several days of the sprin


The sprint backlog includes the itesm selected from the product backlog and the tasks created by decomposing the items. The items are completely 

planed in the sprint planning, bu not all tasks are created; just enought fo the first few days of development. The rest of the 

tasks will be created during the sprint.


11. From the following answers choose the best statement which description of the sprint backlog is :

Correct : It's the development Teams's plan for the sprint.


The Sprint backlog is created during the sprint planning and includes the items selected from the product backlog (by the development team), and the tasks 

created by decomposing the items (by the development tema). Developers keep adding tasks during the sprint, so the sprint backlog updates. Its the development team's plan

for the current sprint. Thi splan is not detailed upfron. If the development team cannot deliver some of the items, they will go back to the product backlog

and will beordered again, they do not go to the next sprint acutomatically. Each task is assigned to one developer or a pair of developers, bu the ownnership 

is still shared. Items are not assigned or owned bu specific developers, all of them share accountabilility/


12. Which statement can be considered as an increment?


A few new features is unable state that are added to those delivered in the previous sprintss.


The increment is the sum of all the product backlog items completed during a sprint and the value of increments of all previous 

sprints. At the end of a sprint, the new inrement must be "Done", which means it must be in useable condition and meet the scrum

Team's definition of "Done".


13. From the scrum Guide : The Product Backlog refinement is the act of ... to the items in the product backlog.

Correct Adding detail, estimates, anad order


Product backlog refinement is defined in the scrum fuide as that act of adding detail, estimates,

and order to the product backlog items. Remember that product backlog reinement is an on going

activity, and is not timeboxed, The rule is that it shouldn't take more than 10% of the developers time.    


14. The scrum team uses the value points to order the product backlog. what is the benefits of this method?

Correct 

Makes the ordering more transparent


Value points are relative units for value assigned to the product backlog items. It increases transparency (everyone understands why)

when applied correctly.


15. How are product backlog itesm selected in scaled scrum?

Development teams pull in itesm in agreement with the product owner


The Development teams are self-organized and it's their responsiility to select itesm from the Product Backlog. Where there are multiple teams, all of them

should do it together. They should alos seek the acceptance of the product Owner, since s/he should be able to have a history of items.


16. According to the scrum guide, what happens to the incomplete product backlog 

items when the sprint is over?

Correct

They would be re-estimated and moved back to the product backlog


The items should be reestimated, because they have been partially done, and it would take less effort to complete them in the future. Whenever an item is not done during the sprint

(for cancellation or reaching the end of the timebox), it would be moved back to product backlog, rarther than the next sprint 

backlog. This is so, because the product owner might reorder them, and they won't be on the top of the product backlog anymore.


17. How should a product backlog item to be refined before its development begin? Choose 2 answers)

Correct : To be checked : In a way that its clear enough for Dev Team

Correct : In a way that it can be "Done" in the timeboxed duration of one Sprint


Items at the top of the product backlog should be small enough to fit in one sprint. They should also be clear and detailed enought; but not too detailed (e.g. not with

all the tasks identified), as it would be an upfront planning. Tasks are created gradually during the sprint. Product backlog items require multiple

experties, and are usually done by multiple developers. Therefore, they are not assigned. Tasks, however, are assigned to the individual developers, while 

everyone stays accountable.


18. Who monitors the remaining work of the sprint backlog?

Correct : The product Development Team

 

The product owner is responsible for measuring the progress of the project and tracking the remaining work in the product backlog. The development team is responsibile for 

measuring the progress of the sprint and tracking the remaining work in the sprint backlog.


19. At the end of a sprint, the new Increment must be "Done", which means it mus be in useable condition and meet the scrum

team's definition of "Done". When should increment be shipped?

Correct  When it makes sense


The increment should be potentially releasable (Shippable), but we don't have to release all of them. It depends on the project enviornment and the 

customer, and the product owner is supposed to decide on it.


20. Which statements are correct about a sprint backlog items that was not finished until the endo of the sprint? 

Choose 2 answers

*  Correct It will be moved to the Product backlog

** Correct  It won't be demonstrated at the sprint review meeting


Only the 100% completed items are demonstrated, to avoid confusion. When something is not completed, it will be moved back to the product backlog.

If it's still on the top of the product backlog, development will continue in the next sprint.


21. According to the scrum guide, the product backlog item "ready" for selection in a 

sprint plannning meeting.......


Correct When it can be "Done" within one sprint


X when it meets the criteria in the definition of "Ready"

X  When all tasks required for completing it are identified.


Product backlog items that will occupy the developement team for the upcoming sprint are refined so that any one item can reasonably be "done" within

the sprint time-box. Product backlog items that can be "Done" by the development team within one sprint are deemed "Read" for selection in a sprint planning.

Product backlog items usually acquire this degree of transparency through the above described refining activities.


22. From the following answers choose the best. the most correct description of the sprint backlog is :

Correct  The Sprint backlog is the set of prodcut backlog itesm selected for the sprint, plus a plan 

for delivering the product increment and realising the sprint goal.


Explanation of the answer is in the answer: The Sprint backlog is the set of prodcut backlog itesm selected for the sprint, plus a plan 

for delivering the product increment and realising the sprint goal. 

This is definitely the best description of the sprint backlog and as we think ( Based on answers) almost the same answer to will see at exam.



23. How many weeks are required to release increment based on the following information:- 240 points

release backlog - 3 -week per sprint - 45 points velocity per sprint?


Correct 18 Weeks

X 12 Weeks

X 16 weeks​

X 6 weeks


45 points are velocity for 1 Sprint ( 3 Weeks). It means that velocity for 1 week is 15 points (45/3 = 15) 

There are 240 points to complete resele 240 points / 15 points ( 1 week) =16weeks. 

But the duration of scrum is 3 weeks and the increment will be ready only after the thrid week of the

sprint. So the correct answer is 18 week.



24. How many weeks are required to <<< release increment >>>  based on the following information:- 

240 points release backlog - 3 -week per sprint - 45 points velocity per sprint?


Correct 18 Weeks

X 12 Weeks

X 16 weeks​

X 6 weeks


45 points are velocity for 1 Sprint ( 3 Weeks). It means that velocity for 1 week is 15 points (45/3 = 15) 

There are 240 points to complete resele 240 points / 15 points ( 1 week) =16weeks. 

But the duration of scrum is 3 weeks and the increment will be ready only after the thrid week of the

sprint. So the correct answer is 18 week.


In short to be calculated as 240/45 = 5.333 = 6 Release

6 release X 3 week = 18 weeks.


25. Which two statements are true about the sprint backlog

Correct The Sprint backlog is a plan with enough detail that changes in progress can be understood in the daily scrum

Correct The Sprint backlog makes visible all of the work that the develoment team identifies as necessary to

meet the spring goal.


The sprint backlog is the set of product backlog items selected for the sprint, plus a plan for delivering the product increment and

realizing the sprint goal. The sprint backlog is a forecast by the development team about what functionality will be in the next

increment and the work needed to deliver that functionality into a "Done" increment. The sprint backlog makes visible all the work

that the development team identifies as necessary to meet the sprint goal. To ensure continuous improvement, it includes at lease on

high priority prcess improvement identified in the previous retrospectiv meeding.


Q : what is the definition of increment in Scrum?

Correct The sum of the value of all increments from previous integrated with the product backlog items "done" in latest sprint.


The increment is the sum of all product backlog items completed during a sprint and the value of the increments of all previous sprints. At the need of a sprint,

the new increment must be "Done", which means it must be in  usable condition and meet the scrum team's definition "Done"


------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- 

10042020

---------

8. When a product backlog item or an increment is described as "Done", everyone must understand what "Done" means. Which of the 

following describes the definition of "Done" ( Choose 2 answers)

x Helps increase velocity

Correct Increases transparency

X Ensures everything is documented

Correct Helps ensure the Increment is releasable

Ans: 2 & 4


64. As we know from the scrum guide this role is responsible for managing the Product Backlog in scrum?

* Correct The Product Owner < PBM - TPO>

X The Development Team

Correct

The Product Owner is the sole person responsible for managing the Product Backlog.

No comments:

Post a Comment